Home

process automation controller - Service, Support

1. XD asin x Output 1 gt 01 Input X Output 1 T NJPJUJT X input x block tag output E S N Exec Seq 000 to 250 000 l l NENNEN BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 2 15 ATD Analog Trend Display ATD blocks can be used as needed in loops up to a ANALOG TREND DISPLAY maximum of 5 per loop to trend an analog variable connected to input A The block can store up to 170 data LALA points depending upon the use of the enable disable function see below A trend can be displayed using ANALOG TREND Modbus commands Data can be retrieved and displayed by a remote operator station that can retrieve interpret and P display data packets from the station A PC or ilstation running ilwarePC interface software can display PD trend data on Loop Detail screen or Analog Detail screen Trend Full Parameter TRND TYP allows data to be stored in one of two formats the average over each sample time or the peak peak values of the data over each sample time All Sim 1 F 2 data is stored normalized form based on value of the PTR range pointer input range information will 0
2. EC External Count Input Integrator Zero Drop Out TotaL 200 4 gt 1 gt o dt y i TA Analog Input BIBEEAOTRGS TOTalizer UNITs Display 13121 i S Stop T R Reset INITital VALue PRESELI Tripi i 7 00 Trip 1 External Setting Alarm1 r PRESET 2 aan 2 8 00 i T2 Trip 2 External Setting 2 PULse SCALing PuLse gt 00001 99999 Required Available i 0 5 Max Pulse Rate Max Pulse Rate Time Base sec PUL SCAL Cycle Time Rev 2 DIAGRAM April 2012 3 27 Function Blocks UM353 1B 3 2 19 BATSW Batch Switch BATSW function blocks can be used on one per loop basis Each is used with PID function block to eliminate BATCH SWITCH overshoot during startup conditions When placed in the feedback path of the controller it causes the reset Barsw esn 000 component of the controller to be reduced if controller action is Rev Without the use of a batch switch during Input A BATCH SWITCH Output 1 startup the controller output 1 GE will equal full ou
3. Controller ODC Code R W Description Register L PI R Process 3 3 to 103 3 0 0FFF 40201 10 1 L SI R W Setpoint 3 3 to 103 3 0 0FFF 40202 10 1 L VI R W Valve 3 3 to 103 3 0 0FFF 40203 10 1 R X Variable 3 3 to 103 3 0 0FFF 40204 10 1 L YI R Y Variable 3 3 to 103 3 0 0FFF 40205 10 1 L RI R W Ratio 0 00 to 38 40 80 0F80 40206 10 1 L BI R W Bias 100 0 100 80 0F80 40207 10 1 L TlmI R Totalizer 3 ms whole digits 0 999 0000 03E7 40208 10 1 L TIII R Totalizer 3 Is whole digits 0 999 0000 03E7 40209 10 1 L PCSW Block Status Word V1 3 1 7 0001 0007 40210 10 1 Sequencer ODS Code R W Description Range Register MB LHSSNI R Sequencer Step No 0 250 0000 00FA 40201 10 1 L SNSI R Sequencer Number of Steps 0 250 0000 00FA 40202 10 1 LZSNGI R Sequencer Number of Groups 0 16 0000 0010 40203 10 1 L SLS R W Sequencer Loop Status see SLS see coils L SNRI R Sequencer Number of Recipes 0 9 0000 0009 40204 10 1 L CRNI R W Current Recipe Number 0 9 0000 0009 40205 10 1 L PCSW Block Status Word 1 7 0001 0007 40206 10 1 Total Active Conditional Msgs 0 64 0000 0040 40207 10 1 spare 0 0000 40208 10 1 spare 0 0000 40210 10 1 Analog Indicator ODA Code
4. gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt 90 v vio o o oj mmmmzizizzz i5 z SsZAZZuUu mnm Jzzizizimmmim x x ziziziziojo eieiAl2A 2l m gt 4 lt 5 cieiojoojor rrrjooooH8 4 4m248mQym mxno7cccjciwuuwu I I MP then in order of occurrence Priority I causes the station 1 HI LO HJEV LJEV dEV or bargraphs and condition e g Al to flash and requires css None LEO HOEN LEV AEV o n 10 8 TYPE 5 none HI LO HdEV LdEV dEV or dEV acknowledgment to stop flashing Priority 2 also flashes the Y A4 TYPE S noneHL LO HdEVLdEV dEV or oe n L 1 DeLay IN 9 0 4 1 2 5 15 30 60 Sec 0 bargraphs and condition but stops flashing when the alarm L A2 DeLay IN 5 0 4 1 2 5 15 30 60 Sec 0 clears i e Self Clearing Priority 3 causes the event LEDs L DeLay IN 5 0 4 1 2 6 15 30 60 Sec 0 L A4 DeLay IN 5 0 4 1 2 5 15 30 60 Sec 0 and S and condition to flash Flashing stops only when the D L O A1 DeLay OUT s 0 4 1 2 5 15 30 60 Sec 0 2 DeLay OUT 5 0 4 1 2 5 15 30 60 Sec 0 alarm is acknowledged Priority 4 also causes the event
5. INPUT loop tag block tag output IINIPIUT INPUT B loop tag block tag output ILN PIUT INPUT C loop tag block tag output ES Exec Seq No 001 to 250 3 50 April 2012 UM353 1B Function Blocks 3 2 52 NOR Logic NOR function blocks perform logical NOR on the three inputs Any unused input will be set low 0 Output 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 2 53 NOT Logic NOT function blocks perform a logical NOT on input A Any unused input will be set low 0 gt gt 01 BLOCK DIAGRAM NOR NOR ESN 000 Input A D Input B 1 Input INPUT A H loop tag block tag output loop tag block tag output INPUT INPUT C H oop tag block tag output 6 Exec Seq 001 to 250 NOT Not esn 000 Input CD NOT Output 1 LIN P U T INPUT loop tag block tag output null Exec Seq No H 001 to 250 April 2012 Function Blocks UM353 1B 3 2 54 ODA Operator Display for Analog Indication amp Alarming ODA blocks are one of five operator dis
6. BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 2 42 GB Gain amp Bias GB function blocks provide action gain and bias adjustments to input signal A Although this block can provide signal scaling it should not be used if needed as a reference for a range pointer The SCL function block should be used when scaling is required for this purpose INput A OUTput BIAS BIAS DIRect ACTing I INput A OUTput EN gt gt gt 01 Input GAIN 3 GAIN Output 1 O1 Go AGi Bi Bo gt 1 BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 2 43 HLD Hold HLD function blocks provide an output equal to the HOLD VAL set in configuration for interconnection to other function blocks HOLD VALue BLOCK DIAGRAM FALLING EDGE TRIGGER FIG ESN 000 FALLING EDGE Pulse Input 1 TRIGGER IN PUIT INPUTP H loop tag block tag output EISIN Exec Seq 001 to 250 GAIN amp BIAS GB ESN 000 TR Input amp BIAS Output 1 IG AI INput GAIN 5 1 0 QU IT OUTput GAIN 5 Real 1 0 IB 1 5 input A BIAS 5 Real 0 0 OUTput BIAS 5 0 0 DIRect ACTing
7. 1 t 5 Comparator l RanGe gm 4 L B gt IF A gt B THEN 100 H gt PoinTeR DG IF A gt B DB AND A lt B THEN gt AND gt Y IF A lt B DB THEN H 0 l HO Engineering Hox High IN i Engineering 5 I Gp INput units p gt DB Dead gt A Em DEViation scaling units tH 5544 AND Engineering 01 5 gt units LO Comparator scalin _ iV IF A lt B THEN L 100 LAT Setpoint Low nginsering x IF A lt B DB AND A gt B THEN L Lt LS gt DEViation gt gt IF A gt B DB THEN L 0 LO Enable 1 Absolute Value 1 Absolute Error SE SE 3 BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 62 April 2012 UM353 1B Function Blocks 3 2 60 OR OR Logic OR function blocks perform logical OR on the three inputs Any unused input will be set low 0 BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 2 61 ORSL Override Selector ORSL function blocks are used on one per loop basis and they enable primary input signal such as the output from controller to be overridden by other signals For selector configured as LO the function block outputs the lower of the primary or override inputs For a selector configured as HI the function block will output the higher of the primary or override inputs Override signa
8. 500 5000 Software Output Analog slidewire 0 0 to 100 0 ACCURACY c t ys 0 196 Ambient Temperature Effect 0 01 Ohms Resistance Range 0 5000 Software Output Analog ohms ACCULACY iati entend 0 1 Ambient Temperature Effect 0 01 Millivolt Narrow 19 0 to 19 0 mVdc ACCURACY pe 5 0 uV Ambient Temperature Effect 1 0 uV C Wide Range eee 30 0 to 77 mVdc ACCULACY sei eto 8 0 uV Ambient Temperature Effect 2 5 uv C Software Output Analog millivolts ees See Table on next page April 2012 13 7 Model Designation and Specifications UM353 1B Millivolt Overvoltage Case Rear Terminals Case Rear Terminals Maximum AINUI AINU2 46 to 47 50 to 51 30 Vdc 45 to 47 49 to 51 48 to 47 52 to 51 5 0 7 Vdc 45 46 47 or 48 to 49 50 51 or 52 to 3 30 Vde station common station common Analog Input 1 Input Range e RO Rp 0 5 Vdc standard calibration 1 5 Vdc Vio 0 1 Vdc Span fanskare 4 5 Vdc Type aie hte Si Sel eben ey Single ended onto Rd 0 10 Resolution 0 024 Software Output
9. 0 to 99999999 REV IEEE Floating Point REVerse s NO YES YES RP BAUD rear Port BAUD rate S Table3 2 5 RP DEL AY Rear Port DELAY 5 1000 0 FP BA UD Front Port BAUD rate 9 Table 3 2 6 FP RT S FPRTS CTS handshaking 8 Table 3 2 1 FP DEL A Y Front Port DELAY 5 0 1000msec 0 HW PRE Hardware PRESent 3 3 CT BAS E Cycle Time BASE msec 20 to 2000 CT BIAS Cycle Time BIAS msec 9 0101000 0 1 L Constant AVAlLable bytes R varies software rev VM AVA LL volitie AVAILable bytes R varies w software rev BAT NONES conFiGuration Time Out NO YES YES o z 1 0 No Lock Out Writes Allowed 1 2 or 3 Lock Out Enabled Writes Not Allowed r2 B Level a warm time setting less than the power up time will be set to the power up time When the station powers up after a loss of power but prior to the expiration of the warm timer the station will execute a Hot Start If the station powers up after the warm timer expiration but prior to expiration of the cold timer the station will execute a warm start In all other cases the station will execute a cold start When using Modbus Network communications the WATCHDOG timer be set to a value other
10. placed in the ENG UNITS parameter When OHMs or MVs are selected the ENG UNITS parameter can be configured to correspond to the process engineering units The default SEN MIN and MIN SCALE are set to the minimum operating value and SEN MAX and MAX SCALE are set to the maximum operating value SEN MIN and SEN MAX always indicate the sensor range limits in degrees C However it is important to enter the actual intended operating range in the MINSCALE MAXSCALE and DPP parameters so that other function blocks such as the controller operator faceplate and workstation interface can point to this block for range and display informationBlock names IDs Input terminations terminal numbers are listed in Section 7 4 Electrical Installation All input types are factory calibrated and do not require field calibration However for those cases where outputs must be adjusted to meet a local standard a field calibration feature is available to override the factory calibration for the input type selected The factory calibration is retained so that the input can be returned to the factory calibration at any time by storing FAC in the calibration selection Table 3 8 provides the input values that are used to perform a field calibration A verify mode is available during calibration to view the sensor input over the full range The signal that is viewed in the calibration verify mode is in the basic units of measure e g C for
11. Controller Terminals Resistive Load 5 5 5 Digital i 8 igital Output C o 9 Common Controller Terminals Common Ground Bus E ri 5 26 Vdc Resistive Load Earth 8 10K Typical Ground 8 5 Digital Output Current Output Isolated 9 Common Inductive Load with Common Ground Bus Controller Terminals Suppression Diode See Note Earth 5 26 Vde E g 8 c B Voltage Output Non Isolated 5 8 Digi mu E Digital Output 24 Vdc ST Common Notes 1 Inductive load must shunted with transient i ODIO Ground BUS A suppression diode 1N4005 or equiv to prevent Earth damage to station output circuit Ground 2 See Table 7 1 for DOUT2 terminal numbers Or any station common terminal C Current Output Isolated Figure 7 12 Digital Output DOUT1 Resistive and Inductive Loads 7 14 April 2012 UM353 1B Installation 7 4 5 Thermocouple Input Wiring Function blocks AINU1 and AINU2 be configured for thermocouple or RTD input Thermocouple input wiring is shown in Figure 7 13 Shown is a typical grounded tip thermocouple If an ungrounded thermocouple is used the thermocouple wire shield can be grounded at the Siemens 353 Thermocouple wire often has a solid conductor Make connections as outlined in Section 7
12. Analog configurable default 0 0 100 0 Normal Mode Rejection gt 50dB 60Hz Input gt 1 megohm Maximum Continuous Input 30 Vdc Analog Output 1 Standard 4 20 mAdc nasa wie een 4 mAdc trim SPAM EE 16 mAdc trim i iiie tree rtt 0 10 Resolution 0 003 Software Input Analog configurable default 0 0 100 0 Current Range Limits esee 2 4 to 21 6 mA dc Signal Referents serinya aene output tied to station common Output Load ssri intese 800 Ohms Overvoltage 30 Vdc Digital Input 1 Logic 1 Range eee 15 30 Vdc Logic 0 Range 0 1 Vde tesis 30 Vde Minimum Required ON Time gt Scan Time Software Output Type Digital Isolatioti nne eene 100 Vdc Universal Digital Inputs 2 Logie T Range eem em 4 30 Vdc Input Current eite epe lt 7 mA 30V Logic 0 Range 0 1 Vdc Overvoltage 5 eue akoiete terssi 30 Vdc Frequency Range eee 0 to 25 000 Hz AXCGUEAC i eee ike et cs 0 03 96 of re
13. loop tag block tag output nulh Exec Seq No H 001 to 250 0 10 POWER UP During warm or cold start the dynamic elements and the output will be initialized to the value of the current input on the first scan 3 246 Limit LMT function blocks are used to limit a real signal LIMIT Input will normally pass through the function block to the output O1 If the input exceeds one of the limits the ESN 000 block will output the limit value Output 1 Input A LIMIT High Status If the HI LIMIT is set lower than the LO LIMIT the block tA LAL will output the high limit value The output statuses will Low status be high 1 when the block is in a limit condition High LIMIT 5 Real 100 00 LO LOW LIMIT 5 2 1 Real 0 00 LNPUT INPUT A loop tag block tag output i E S Exec Seq No 001 to 250 HI SELECTOR LO SELECTOR PP 01 1 High limit Status gt HS i Low limit Status 15 i LO LIMIT HI LIMIT BLOCK DIAGRAM April 2012 3 47 Function Blocks UM353 1B 3 2 47 LN NATURAL LOGARITHM NATURAL LOGARITHM LN function blocks will output the natural logarithm of input X 2s When the input is lt 0 0 the input will be
14. quality status of the output signal Ol and will go high 1 SJEN SENsor TYPE input Values Table 15 when the output is of bad quality Bad quality indicates an MINimum Sen MivMax Table 15 A D conversion failure or an open circuit T C sensor MAXimum Sen Min Max Table 75 LIT FILTer 0 to 180 sec 0 sec WE OUT 5 output BIAS 6 Real 0 0 scaling function is used to establish an output range in minimum SCALE Sen MivMax Table 185 engineering units for the selected sensor range e g 0 10 mv MAXIS CAIL E maximum SCALE Sen Min Max Table 1100 or 50 0 150 0 amperes Direct Temperature Measurements Decima Pt Poston prefered S 000000 000 Dr Temp Meas UNITS input Types Table 1 i e T C RTD bypass sensor and range scaling and the E NIG UIN T T S ENGineering UNITS Input Types Table 1 block output units are selected from Table 3 7 When CAL TYPE 0 Sen MinMax Table _FLOVFAC FAC selected the proper read only ASCII characters GAL ZERO ZERO field Values Table di the t it lected will anit tically b CAL F ULI scale field cal Cal Input Values Table corresponding to the type units selected automatically be e rr VIEW view input verity calices Real
15. 0 0 1 ON TIME gt 0 0 ON nON ON INput AT p CYCLE Output 1 Adapt OFF TIME gt 0 0 Time ON TIME gt 0 0 off gt ET INputAT n _ gt RT S gt START Start gt Output 1 01 BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 80 April 2012 UM353 1B Function Blocks 3 2 74 RLM Rate Limiter RLM function blocks limit the rate of change of analog input A Separate up and down rates are entered in configuration in engineering units per minute Output RL will be high 1 if the block is limiting a rising input signal and output FL will be high when the block is limiting a falling input signal The Adaptive Rate inputs will vary the configured adaptive rate between 0 100 as the input varies from 0 to 100 When the input is not configured the adaptive rate will not apply Input E asserted high 1 will enable the limit action of the block When input E is low 0 the output will track the analog input If input E is not configured the limit action of the block will be enabled RATE LIMITER RLM_ Analog Input A Output 1 Enable B RATE LIMITER Rising Limit Adaptive Up AU Falling Limit Adaptive AD UP RATE units minute s Real 100 0 DOWI NIR A T Down RATE units minute Re
16. 0312650 Basic Operator Display MD Message Display BLOCK DIAGRAM POWER UP When the switch is configured for momentary action it will always power up in the NC position For sustained action with the POWER UP parameter set to YES the switch will power up in the last position during hot or warm start and during cold start will power up in the NC position When the POWER UP parameter is set to NO the switch will power up in the last position during hot start During warm or cold start it will power up in the NC position April 2012 3 65 Function Blocks UM353 1B 3 2 64 PB2SW PB2 Switch PB2SW is one of three general purpose switches available in each loop It can be utilized for switching Boolean signals in such applications as toggling the External Internal setpoint Transfer Switch function block Start Stop controlling the position of a TSW Transfer Switch function block for switching analog signals or other operator initiated actions The switch can be configured for momentary or sustained operation As momentary the switch will transfer to the NO position when the button is pressed and will return when released Momentary action is used in toggle applications such as changing the function of the function block In the sustained mode the switch will alternate positions each time the button is pressed An unconfigured NC input defaults to 0 and an unc
17. 1 ESN Exec Seq No 5 ALARM Alarm Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer LOOPO1 AINL OR INPUT P Input P LOOPO1 AIN1 01 INPUT D Input D LOOPO1 SETPT O1 ESN Exec Seq No 10 LOOPO1 2 PID PID Controller Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer 1 INPUT P Input P LOOPOI AINI OI INPUT S Input S 1 5 1 INPUT Input F 1 1 INPUT Input LOOPOI A M AS ESN Exec Seq No 15 A M Auto Manual Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer LOOPOI PID OR INPUT Input A LOOPO1 PID O1 ESN Exec Seq No 20 April 2012 Factory Configured Options UM353 1B Loop 01 cont ODC Operator Display for Controllers P RG PTR P Range Pointer LOOPOI AINI OR RG PTR V Range Pointer LOOPOI PID OR INPUT P Input P Process LOOPOI AINI OI INPUT S Input S Setpoint LOOPOI SETPT OI INPUT V Input V Valve LOOPOI A M OI LOOP Loop 01 Analog Output 1 Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer LOOPO1 PID OR INPUT Input LOOPOL A M O1 Loop 02 SETPT Setpoint Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer LOOP02 AIN2 OR INPUT I
18. 2 2 0000 nre trennen 13 6 13 8 ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS ennorororerrrrerarenenensnresenerenpernrarerenensnnenerenensnrsrerenenensesenenensenereresnen 13 9 13 8 L Standard Mo ntnes tpe eR Ae eat oe AE ote tes Ries ia ende Pete sed 13 9 13 82 Enclosure MOuntiDg udi hc doter ote e apt re i a ER bere cete e o ee istae 13 9 13 8 3 Electromagnetic Compatibility sess 13 9 13 9 AGENCY APPROVALS ein beg eu e Dee snabel arsen RR ET DE e d 13 10 13 9 1 CSA Hazardous Locations Precautions 13 10 13 9 2 Special Conditions for Safe Use 13 11 14 0 ABBREVIATIONS AND 8 2 2 1 2 4 14 1 SOFTWARE RELEASE LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS FIGURE AND TITLE PAGE 1 1 Sleniens 353 Exploded VIEW iiu eo tb eed ey E krise 1 2 1 2 Ethernet Architecture Example 4 222 oh tious Anti Re e p heu rig Ede ter antente 1 3 2 1 Configuration Road Map etie tete etate don en eibi Da ee Doce tite ig e pte ede ie iret 2 6 2 2 MultiMediaCard Road Map nono oTi HERE EO T E REPEAT ripe EL 2 7 3 1 PCOMECLEOPIC ep att eet cedar em P ee a ind eee it 3 69 7 1 Cover Installation and Removal 4 3 passes cde ote rore ee TE e e 7 4
19. 3 51 32 53 NOT NOT Logens ottenere RR E RR e Te e REC UH ELE SHE 3 51 3 2 54 ODA Operator Display for Analog Indication amp Alarming eere 3 52 3 2 55 ODC Operator Display for Controllers esee eene nennen enne ener enne 3 54 3 2 56 ODD Operator Display for Discrete Indication amp Control sese 3 56 3 2 57 ODP Operator Display for PushButtons eese eene nennen enne nennen trennen 3 58 3 2 58 ODS Operator Display for Sequencer essent enne nennen rennen nnne 3 60 3 2 59 ON OFF Controller 1 2 orent pe RE etm he deine ede i es 3 62 3 2 600 OR OR Log eR men roin ate ei rp EROR 3 63 3 22 61 ORSLE Overnde Selectors ia iege mecs Gad eite to tre th 3 63 3 2 62 0S T One Shot tte te bete lese 3 64 32 63 PBISW PBl E ER HER UTR 3 65 3 2 64 PB2SW PB2 S witch t eter RU FERRE Tu ERE ken Ee 3 66 3 2 65 PB3SW PB3 Switch ii st r ehe hee een bee 3 67 3 2 66 PCOM Phase 3 68 322 07 eter oe a e R 3 70 32 68 PID PID Controller o rere eerte e e e eM 3 72 3 2 69 PIDAG PIDAG Controllers DAP e tbid 3 74 3 270 PRSEQ Program SequetiCer
20. N OVERWRITe MESING YES be part of the data packet when retrieved over the network INPUT E RES sj communications When this input is unconfigured range Exec Seq 00010 250 000 of 0 0 100 0 will be used Several inputs can control the operation of the ATD function block Input E enable can be used to enable the trend function when high 1 or unconfigured Trend action can be disabled by setting E low 0 Each time the function block is enabled new trend packet will be created The block also includes parameter OVER WRIT that when set to YES will cause the block to overwrite old data i e circular file When the parameter is set to NO the block will stop trending when full and retain the data until reset When the full state is reached output TF Trend Full will high 1 This function can be used to enable second ATD block April 2012 3 23 Function Blocks UM353 1B 3 2 16 ARCTANGENT function blocks output a signal in radians of which the input is the tangent ARCTANGENT ke ESN 000 XD o gt Output 1 1 gt X gt 01 Input X Output 1 X inpurx loop tag block tag output i 5 Exec Seq No 000 to 250 000
21. numeric display e g TC2053 P is the Process variable for loop 100 R 2053 loop tag that is displayed is called the Active Loop and EN all operator controls e g PB1 PB2 D UNITS ALARM TUNE TAG QUICK will affect the function blocks 60 within the Active Loop 40 gt e Pushbutton controls the operation of the PB1SW PB 1 20 transfer SWitch function block when the block has been configured for use within the Active Loop See the function block details in Section 3 for more information on PB1SW 2 Pushbutton controls the operation of the PB2SW PB 2 0 100 transfer SWitch function block when the block has been configured cLose OPEN for use within the Active Loop See the function block details for more information on PB2SW Pushbutton controls the operation of an Auto Manual P AG function block when the block has been configured for use within 353 the Active Loop See the function block details for more information on A M When the A M is switched to Auto the numeric display will show the Setpoint value as indicated by S in the alphanumeric display and when switched to Manual the Valve value and V will be shown 0314152 e LOOP Pushbutton selects the Active Loop when more that one loop has been configured When more than one loop has been configured the LOOP butt
22. 001 to 250 Input 01 Pi a Output 1 HE External Limit 0313250 BLOCK DIAGRAM DEAD BAND the output will return from high 1 output to low 0 output when input is less than the limit Dead BAND setting for direct action or greater than the limit Dead BAND for reverse action EXTERNAL LIMIT When input EL is configured the LIMIT setting will be ignored and the value of input EL will be used as the limit value April 2012 3 31 Function Blocks UM353 1B 3 2 24 COS COSINE COS function blocks accept radian inputs and output the cosine of that angle COSINE ESN 000 Input xD COS X gt Output 1 cos x gt X Input X 9 1 01 I N P UIT X INPUT x loop tag block tag output E S N Exec Seq 000 to 250 000 BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 2 25 CWE Coil Write Ethernet CWE_ function blocks use Modbus command 15 Force Multiple Coils to enable the controller to write Coil data to other stations over the Ethernet network Up to 32 CWE_ blocks are available Blocks are assigned in sequence controller wide with each use Up to 16 ON OFF block inputs 10 to IF can write to 16 consecutive coil locations in a destination Modbus device The IP ADRES parameter is used to configure the IP address of the destination Modbus device The MB ADRES parameter allows a M
23. Clockwise MANua S NO YES YES MANual allows the operator to adjust the manual value manual ACCeLeration 5 siow Med Fast 6 EM Emerg Manual PRIORity 5 0 1 2 3 4 5 4 unless STANDBY is active The manual value tracks Emerg Man switches to MAN NO YES NO the block output when in AUTO or STANDBY The L OC K Lock MAN in Emerg Man NOYES NO i SB StandBy PRIORity 0 1 2 3 4 5 4 value adjusted when in MAN provided A INPUT A loop tag block tag output null the displayed variable is the process or the valve e g TV INPUT TV looptag blocktag output null TC2053 P or TC2053 V When a loop is switched to I N P U T INPUT TC t loop tag block tag output null INPUT EM o loop tag block tag output MANual the display will automatically show the valve EIS N Exec Seq No 001 to 250 e g TC2053 V The range pointer input Range lets the A M function block know the range of the auto input signal and enables the A M block to properly process pulser changes from the operator faceplate The range pointer also defines the range of the manual function as 1096 to 110 This can be useful to prevent inadvertent changes from an operator workstation that might set the manual value well beyo
24. Step 6 Group 2 Output Mask 0000 FFFF 41206 30 1 LHS007GOI R W Step 7 Group 0 Input Mask 0000 FFFF 41207 30 1 145007600 Step 7 Group 0 Output Mask 0000 FFFF 41208 30 1 LHS009G2I R W Step 9 Group 2 Input Mask 0000 FFFF 41223 30 1 15009620 Step 9 Group 2 Output Mask 0000 FFFF 41224 30 1 L S010GOI Step 10 Group 0 Input Mask 0000 FFFF 41225 30 1 L4S010GOO Step 10 Group 0 Output Mask 0000 FFFF 41226 30 1 LHS010G 11 Step 10 Group 1 Input Mask 0000 FFFF 41227 30 1 LHS010G10 Step 10 Group 1 Output Mask 0000 FFFF 41228 30 1 L S010G2I Step 10 Group 2 Input Mask 0000 FFFF 41229 30 1 L S010G20 Step 10 Group 2 Output Mask 0000 FFFF 41230 30 1 6 8 April 2012 UM353 1B Data Mapping 6 3 4 Dynamic Loop Floating Point Data 32 bit IEEE Controller ODC Code R W Description Range Register MB LHPF R Process Real 41951 20 1 L SF R W Setpoint Real 41953 20 1 L VF R W Valve Real 41955 20 1 L XF R X Variable Real 41957 20 1 LHYF R Y Variable Real 41959 20 1 1 R W Ratio Real 41961 20 1 L BF R W Bias Real 41963 20 1 L TLF R Totalizer Real 41965 20 1 spare 00000000 41967 20 1 spare 00000000 41969 20 1 Sequencer ODS Code R W Description Ra
25. Dr ilware PC Faceplate Display BLOCK DIAGRAM Rev 3 April 2012 3 55 Function Blocks UM353 1B 3 2 56 ODD Operator Display for Discrete Indication amp Control ODD function blocks are one of five operator displays that can be used on one per loop basis to configure the local operator display functions as well as network parameters See the ilware PC faceplate example on the next page The ODD function block displays up to 16 discrete variables Each input has a corresponding block output that is equal to the input when the variable mode is in Auto Each input variable can be assigned a mode The value of the output can be changed while in Man by using the pulser and pressing the ACK button When a variable is switched to Manual it will always equal the input value until changed The LOOP parameter is used to index reads and writes to Modbus parameters See Section 5 for more information on network parameters The VIEW OD parameter when set to YES enables the operator display to be viewed and accessed locally In cases where it is desired to view display or operation parameters only from a network workstation the parameter should be set to NO During a cold or warm start each input variable will power up in the auto mode During a hot start the mode and manual value will equal the value prior to power down Each discrete input variable can be displayed on the local faceplate using the D button When first
26. 01 1 4 6 April 2012 UM353 1B Factory Configured Options ODC Operator Display for Controllers P RG PTR P Range Pointer Loop01 AIN1 OR V RG PTR V Range Pointer Loop01 PID OR X RG PTR X Range Pointer Loop01 AIN2 OR INPUT P Input P Process Loop01 AIN1 01 INPUT S Input S Setpoint 01 1 INPUT V Input Valve 01 1 INPUT Input X X Variable Loop01 AIN2 01 LOOP Loop ft 01 Digital Output 1 Function Block INPUT Input S Loop01 ALARM A1 DOUT2 Digital Output 2 Function Block INPUT S Input S Loop01 ALARM A2 April 2012 4 7 Factory Configured Options UM353 1B 4 5 105 Ratio Set Control w Operator Setpoint Limits Factory Configured Option FCO105 provides a ratio set controller in 01 The setpoint to the Captive Flow controller can be maintained as a ratio of the Captive Flow to Wild Flow The controller has complete setpoint tracking as well as ratio tracking The local setpoint will track the Captive Flow signal when the loop is not in auto NA is in External Ratio Set ES The value of the RATIO will be computed as Captive Flow setpoint Wild Flow while in the tracking mode which occurs whenever the loop is not in auto NA OR is in Internal Set IS The tracking features can be removed by setting the TC inputs to UNCONFIG
27. Analog configurable F R K Ambient Temperature Effect 0 07 C C Type E Thermocouple Range Limits sss 185 C to 1000 C 300 F to 1830 F Performance Range 0 to 1000 C 0 5 Conformity esee 0 06 Software Output Type Analog configurable F R K Ambient Temperature Effect 0 07 C C Type 5 Thermocouple Range Limits 18 C to 1650 C 0 F to 3000 F Performance Range 200 to 1650 C 0 7 C Conformity eese lt 0 06 Software Output Type Analog configurable C F R K Ambient Temperature Effect 0 14 C C Type R Thermocouple Range Limits sess 18 C to 1610 C 0 to 2930 F Performance Range 200 to 1610 ACCULACY de er pe ente 0 7 C Conformity eese lt 0 06 Software Output Type Analog configurable F R Ambient Temperature Effect 0 15 13 6 2012 UM353 1B Model Designation and Specifications Type Thermocouple Range Limits sess 18 C to 1815 C O F to 3300 F Performance Range 800 to 1815 C A CCUFAC eo
28. OPE Feedback Messages Auto 1F M 1 RUN 0 STOP ROR Ke TEELE FRETS SAT ES SU NEUE eres Oe eee 4 i Groups 2 to 7 KOKE LE KE TE ES KA 1 Group 8 Message START 51036 Stop 81 PBI 81 O STOP 2 2 A 24 9 BA 5 83 XO OF 8M T O if Feedback Messages 8F lo M 1 RUN mae 0 5 Block Diagram ilware PC Faceplate Display April 2012 3 59 Function Blocks UM353 1B 3 2 58 ODS Operator Display for Sequencer ODS function blocks are one of five operator displays available on one per loop basis to configure the local OPERATOR DISPLAY for SEQUENCER operator display functions as well as the network commands from an operator workstation associated with d the loop See the ilware PC faceplate example on the OPERATOR i i DISPLAY following page Step Number SN p Loop Event Recipe Number VIEW OD parameter when set to YES the default er Station Error value enables the operator display to be viewed and accessed locally using the LOOP button Set the Condition Msg 01 01 Optional Inputs parameter to NO to view the display or operation Condition Msg nn EDI Condition Messages parameters only with a network workstation and not allow operation from the local display This may be Console Loc
29. UM353 1B Data Mapping L G3Tag R Group 3 Tag 6 ASCII Char 45499 100 1 L G3P1T R Group 3 PB1 Tag 6 ASCII Char 45502 100 1 L G3P2T R Group 3 PB2 Tag 6 ASCII Char 45505 100 1 L G3SAT R Group 3 Switch Position A Tag 6 ASCII Char 45508 100 1 L G3SMT R Group 3 Switch Position M Tag 6 ASCII Char 45511 100 1 L G3F1T R Group 3 Feedback 1 Tag 6 ASCII Char 45514 100 1 L G3F0T R Group 3 Feedback 0 Tag 6 ASCII Char 45517 100 1 L G4Tag R Group 4 Tag 6 ASCII Char 45520 100 1 Group 4 1 6 ASCII Char 45523 100 1 L G4P2T R Group 4 PB2 Tag 6 ASCII Char 45526 100 1 L G4SAT R Group 4 Switch Position A Tag 6 ASCII Char 45529 100 1 L G4SMT R Group 4 Switch Position M Tag 6 ASCII Char 45532 100 1 L G4F1T R Group 4 Feedback 1 Tag 6 ASCII Char 45535 100 1 L G4F0T R Group 4 Feedback 0 Tag 6 ASCII Char 45538 100 1 LHG5Tag R Group 5 Tag 6 ASCII Char 40451 30 1 5 Group 5 Tag 6 ASCII Char 40454 30 1 LHG5P2T R Group 5 PB2 Tag 6 ASCII Char 40457 30 1 58 R Group 5 Switch Position A Tag 6 ASCII Char 40460 30 1 L G5SMT R Group 5 Switch Position M Tag 6 ASCII Char 40463 30 1 L G5F1T R Group 5 Feedback 1 Tag 6 ASCII Char 40466 30 1 L G5FOT R Group 5 Feedback 0 Tag 6 ASCII Char 40469 30 1 Spares 40472 40480 Note These Modbus groupings normally used for Variable Loop Integer Data with displays other than ODP L G6Tag R Group 6 Tag 6 ASCII Char 41201 30 1 L G6P1T
30. er HE unconfigured 1 RO wo JU DN unconfigured 0 ABORT wa wo Figure 3 1 PCOM Logic READY gt AND OR OR L gt 12 gt AND HL 54 FTG IK 24 pR EN 3 2 228 2 gt gt ANDI 57 gt 25 DONE 37 AND OR gt RS AND Ls AND EO 59 Es ABORTED gt 27 RS READY D A RS 28 READY gt AND RS He OR ano READY READY gt 5 RUN READY lt lt EO gt s JFF gt Rol 4 AND gt gt READY 20 OR DONE i gt ABORTED oe EO gt gs s JFF je Pid AND gt gt OR HO 29 gt AND ST gt RTG gt 30 EN 6 p Sr 45 Br lt ST 31 2 9 an ST OR PE EN HELD RUN HUN gt AND gt Sy FF 34 2 a d Bon p AND HO 35 AND EN 69 FD gt gt anp 8 HO 36 gt EN 4 RUN app HELD 37 RUN gt AND gt SI OR 8 OR AD READY ms ABORTED gt 16 DONE Eg gt EO gt 73 HELD s JFF gt E AND BONE AND gt DONE 50 OR gt
31. 220 0 VIIU Umm Rev 2 3 6 April 2012 UM353 1B Function Blocks 3 2 AND LOOP FUNCTION BLOCKS This section provides detailed description of each input output and loop function block Blocks are listed alphabetically 3 2 1 A M Transfer One A M function block can be used per loop and it is AM TRANSFER normally used on the output of controller blocks to gram pnm enable auto manual operation of the loop It is separate em from the controller block allowing the option of Range inserting other function blocks e g override Auto AD A M Auto Status feedforward between the controller and the A M Track Variable TV TRANSFER Not Auto status function 2 PB3SW has been used the Track Command FERNER ock is not available Emerg Man ED EM Switch AUTO allows the signal from the controller input A to Standby Switch become the output of the A M Transfer unless EMER MAN or STANDBY is active Auto ONLY forces the SETE harde operator pushbutton to be locked in the AUTO position Power nec pige but EMEG MAN and STANDBY will function OIN LIY Auto ONLY amp NO YES normall POWER UP position 5 AM A Power Up LAST 0 NO YES YES
32. Database Compatibility Test Controller operation suspended Press ENTER to if possible convert the database or load Controller board default constant data Board Compatibility Test Install compatible Controller board Calibration Data CRC Test Controller operation suspended Press ENTER to load I O Expander board default calibration data Software Compatibility Test Controller operation suspended Replace I O Expander board or press ENTER to remove from the configuration all references to blocks relating to the Expander board Database Compatibility Test Controller operation suspended Replace I O Expander board or press ENTER to if possible convert the database or load Expander board default constant data Board Not Present Controller operation suspended Install I O Expander board or press ENTER to remove from the configuration all references to the missing board Board Compatibility Test Install compatible I O Expander board 10 6 April 2012 UM353 1B Maintenance 10 4 2 On Line Error Codes and Status Codes These codes can be produced while the controller is running function block and may be actively controlling process Depending on the message and its priority level user intervention may be required or the message may simply be informational in nature Parameter 5 located at Modbus register 40002 will reflect unacknowledged error or status messages pre
33. External Setpoint 0 00 100 00 PRCT ot e AIN2 PB2SW Ot SETPT ORO1 Process 0 00 100 00 MANT 7 L SETPT Setpoint Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer Loop01 AIN1 OR INPUT TV Input TV Loop01 AIN1 01 INPUT TC Input TC Loop01 OR01 O1 ESN Exec Seq No 10 PB2SW PB2 Switch Function Block INPUT MD Input MD Loop01 E I SE ESN Exec Seq No ALARM Alarm Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer Loop01 AIN1 OR INPUT P Input P Loop01 AIN1 01 INPUT D Input D 01 1 ESN Exec Seq No 20 PID PID Controller Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer Loop01 AIN1 OR INPUT P Input P Loop01 AIN1 01 INPUT S Input S 01 1 INPUT F Input F 01 1 INPUT A Input A 01 5 INPUT I Input I LoopO1 E LES ESN Exec Seq No 25 gt Ot A 01 S 1 pip EM 2 AOUT1 2 GE AW 05 D Valve LOOPO1 E I Ext Int Transfer Switch Function Block INPUT ST Input ST Loop01 PB2SW PS INPUT E Input E Loop01 AIN2 01 INPUT I Input I Loop01 SETPT O1 ESN Exec Seq No 15 A M Auto Manual Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer Loop01 PID OR INPUT A Input A Loop01 PID O1 ESN Exec Seq No 01 OR Function Block INPUT A Input A INPUT B Input B ESN Exec Seq No 01 Loop01 A M MS Analo
34. Digital Inputs Universal 1 and 2 Relay Outputs and 2 April 2012 UM353 1B Introduction When even more I O is needed for multiple loop applications advanced control or batch sequencing Modbus TCP Ethernet can be used to connect remote I O The standard Ethernet capability of the 353 provides connectivity to a large selection of standard Modbus TCP Ethernet I O products that provide analog inputs and outputs and digital inputs and outputs using solid state technology Although the Siemens 353 can be connected to and operated entirely from a central operator workstation such as ilstation a controller faceplate is included This local operator interface is for applications where loops need individual attention during startup troubleshooting maintenance or emergency conditions The convenient faceplate layout and sophisticated software allow process and configuration changes to be made quickly and easily The controller can be completely configured from the operator faceplate or as mentioned above configured remotely using ilconfig the optional PC based Graphical Configuration Utility A MultiMediaCard MMC can be used to transfer a configuration from one controller to another or between a PC running ilconfig and a controller when downloading a configuration over a network is not available Network communication options are listed in the following table Protocols Available
35. Range VAD OPERATOR 1 Parameter VIEW OD when set to YES the default ve DISPLAY gt 3 X Range setting enables the operator display to be viewed and variabie x to in 2 5 CONTROLLERS GOD Een accessed locally using the LOOP button In some cases Y Range Station Error 2 ariable it may be desired to view only display or operation variable Y DS i User Status1 MP parameters with a network workstation and not allow user Status2 eee Pulse oN 2 arm operation or viewing of the control loop from the local inputa Management PURE display Here the parameter should be set to NO Emerg Local CoMputer Local Operation 2 Output LE is high 1 when loop event is active Output SE is high when a station error is active 3 LOOP is used to index reads and writes to Modbus Not Local Watch Dog parameters The LOOP must be entered to enable PITIR i B tag block tag Modbus Modbus TCP communications Y R G Input Y range Poter is sep arter un 011 lt 5 5 User 1 STATUS 5 8 ASCII Ut STAT U 2 S T A T U S user2 STATUS 5 8 Char ASCII U2 STAT User 1 PRIORity 5 0 1 2 3 4 5 5 Range pointers for both the process s
36. SEC SPLIM LS ESN Exec Seq No 5 ODC Operator Display for Controllers ALARM Alarm Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer SEC AIN2 OR P RG PTR P Range Pointer SEC AIN2 OR V RG PTR V Range Pointer SEC PID OR INPUT P Input P Process SEC AIN2 OI INPUT P Input P SEC AIN2 O1 INPUT S Input S Setpoint SEC SPLIM O1 INPUT D Input D SEC SPLIM O1 INPUT Input Valve SEC A M OI ESN Exec Seq No 10 LOOP Loop 02 PB2SW PB2 Switch Function Block INPUT MD Input MD SEC E LSE ESN Exec Seq No 15 4 16 April 2012 UM353 1B Network Communications 5 0 NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS This section provides an overview of the data that can be obtained from the 353 using Modbus or Modbus TCP Ethernet which provides Modbus over Ethernet protocol In the Modbus TCP protocol all listed Modbus items are available and are embedded in the Modbus Ethernet protocol frame Refer to Section 6 Data Mapping for detailed list of the actual data Go to the Modbus IDA Website http www modbus org for more information on Modbus and access to Modbus technical specifications 5 1 MODBUS DATA MAPPING Modbus is master slave protocol where master device e g PC based operator workstation sends commands to one slave 1 Siemens 353 Process Automation Controller and waits for response When using RS485 network
37. eod 1 5 1 2 3 Configuration ido te aw ab iet P e eet ted eb ec edes tes 1 5 1 3 CUSTOMBR PRODUCT SUPPORT ipit tree ra teer tne e Ho een 1 7 1 4 EQUIPMENT DELIVERY AND eere 1 8 1 4 1 Factory SHIPMENT emque oe ORE e RR per es 1 8 14 2 Re eipt of Shipment 1 8 43 StOTAge o eee pei eR RR RR TRE Ve rer EES 1 8 1 4 4Lypical Shipment Contents 2 x tere pri paper E REEF REDE TEM 1 8 2 0 CONFIGURATION 2 1 4 2 2 1 2 1 STATION FUNCTION BLOCKS ete dea tede Ue tine eco pee Pe eei 2 1 2 2 STATION HARDWARE BLOCKS eniaint eara 2 1 23 LOOP FUNCTION BEOCKS iof erre ede dede e dedo ebd eme 2 1 2 4 ETHERNET DATA FUNCTION BLOCKS nre enne nete trennen 2 3 2 5 CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE aae e ERE D ER Hen e Ebor eee Pee RR Pee Pe Rx ee dehet 2 3 2 6 OPERATION DURING LOCAL ON LINE CONFIGURATION eerte ener 2 5 3 0 FUNCTION O 3 1 3 1 STATION FUNCTION BLOCKS 2 nein binant bitin 3 2 3 1 1 CONFIGS Configurations Library eese neither 3 2 3 2 SECUR Security ium eo eem e e EET E
38. l Bo ek ty ED SN BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 24 April 2012 UM353 1B Function Blocks 3 2 17 Analog Write Ethernet function blocks use Modbus command 16 Preset Multiple Registers to enable the controller to write analog data to other Modbus devices over the Ethernet network Up to 32 AWE blocks are available Blocks are assigned in sequence e g AWEO1 AWE02 controller wide with each use Data can be written as a real floating point number or as 16 bit integer as configured by the DATA parameter Floating point number can be selected to have one of four byte orders BYTE ORD with I being the most common see Table 3 4 under AIE block description An integer is converted from the block input S which is a floating point number by the MIN INT and MAX INT parameters using the range scaling information obtained from the source function block in the controller with the range pointer input R Both Unsigned Integer Uint and Signed Integer Sint options are available See the table listing parameters and default values below right The IP ADRES parameter is used to configure the IP address of the destination Modbus device The MB ADRES parameter allows a Modbus address to be configured When connecting to other Siemens 353 controllers the Modbus address is set to 1 In some cases other devices may use a different address or when going through a Modbus TCP gateway a Modbus
39. loop tag block tag output null Output MA will provide the moving average of register 0 LNP UT INPUT E tag block tagroutput fe INPUT AT loop tag block tag output null to the output register divided by the number of registers EISIN Exec Seg No 00110250 e g output register 50 MA 1 2 50 51 Input E asserted high 1 will enable the operation of the DTM block When this input is not configured it will be set high A low 0 input will cause all registers and the outputs to equal the input A POWER UP During warm or cold start all outputs will be initialized at 0 and all registers will be initialized to the value of the input on the first scan NOG ADEN Enable 1 1 1 Analog Input gt n RegisterO _ 1 1 e a Register 1 NY gt n 1 gt Y to Pn E Pn 48 gt 01 M Output 1 2 1 ERA lt gt 49 1 1 X gt e Register 50 1 r Adaptive Time Moving Average MA 1 BLOCK DIAGRAM April 2012 3 39 Function Blocks UM353 1B 3 2 35 DWE Digital Write Ethernet DWE_ function blocks use Modbus command 16 Preset Multiple Registers to enable the controller to writ
40. 5 t0 40 10 a n f AT DYNAMic settings 5 Fast controller to normalize the tuning parameters for the ATRESET ves process range If this parameter is not configured the POST Autotune Transfer 5 NO 4 1 P INPUT P loop tag block tag output null controller will use range scaling of 0 00 100 00 6 INPUTS op lag black odi INPUT INPUTF H loop tag block tag output null 1 A INPUT A loop tag block tag output Input I when changed from low 0 to high 1 or from 1 input es ee high to low will cause the controller to initialize i e Exec Seq No 001 to 250 eliminate any proportional gain action during that cycle This can be used to prevent bumping the output when changes are made to the setpoint using switch block POWER UP During warm or cold power up the output will be initialized to MINSCALE and all dynamic elements will be initialized at the current input on the first scan PID Controller Process Pe scaling 1 4 tps Y 1 x PoinTeR D 541 ENG UNITS DG i Lead 1 Y Y Limi
41. Siemens Industry Inc USER S MANUAL UM353 1B Rev 4 SR r2 April 2012 gt N Model 353 PROCESS AUTOMATION CONTROLLER This User s Manual is for Design Level 353 Controllers IMPORTANT Refer to this manual UM353 1B to install configure operate or service Design Level B Siemens 353 Process Automation Controller Refer to UM353 1 to install configure operate or service Design Level Siemens or Moore Products Co 353 Process Automation Controller Refer to the controller nameplate and the Model Designation and Specifications section of the manual for the Design Level character The Design Level is specified by the next to last character in the model designation UM353 1B Contents TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION AND TITLE PAGE PREFACE esesevenvenvevensenverenseneenensenennensenennensenennensnennenssnennenssnennennsvennennsvennenssvennennsvennennsvennennsvennenasvennennsvennennsvennevnseesnee vii 1 0 INTRODUCTION 1 1 1 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 1 2 1 EUNGIEION BEGOQGCKS ono rrt eedem io tre fee e eerte 1 4 1 21 LOOP Functi n Block Types tek efe e i eh n 1 4 1 2 2 Power Up Imti hz tiom 22m en ent RIA IUe ieu a Rs Wa ens eee
42. 1 ODC Operator Display for Controllers P RG PTR P Range Pointer Loop01 AIN1 OR V RG PTR V Range Pointer Loop01 PID OR INPUT P Input P Process Loop01 AIN1 01 INPUT S Input S Setpoint Loop01 SETPT O1 INPUT V Input V Valve 01 1 LOOP Loop ff 01 4 2 April 2012 UM353 1B Factory Configured Options 4 2 102 Single Loop Controller w Fixed Setpoint Factory Configured Option FCO102 provides a single loop controller configured in Loop01 block diagram of the loop configuration is shown below along with any changes to the default parameter values of the configured blocks If the loop tag 01 is changed all configured references within the station will automatically be changed to the new tag SETPT M Process Valve ot P m ot 8 am v s gt 2 T AM u ss 2 ALARM _ LOOPO1 SETPT Setpoint Function Block A M Auto Manual Function Block PTR Range Pointer Loop01 AIN1 OR RG PTR Range Pointer Loop01 PID OR ESN Exec Seq No 5 INPUT A Input A Loop01 PID O1 ESN Exec Seq No 20 ALARM Alarm Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer Loop01 AIN1 OR Analog Output 1 Function Block INPUT P Input P LoopO1 A
43. 5 lt Figure 7 1 and Rack Mounting Guidelines To Install Terminal Cover Orient the cover as shown Note the four hooked tabs and Ethernet cable clearance cutout Squeeze the cover slightly at the two small cutouts in the cover edges and fully insert the four hooked cover tabs in the rear panel slots Allow cover sides to relax Pull the cover straight down until it snaps into place The cutouts in the cover edges will engage two alignment tabs on the rear panel Where needed the Ethernet cable should exit through the large cutout in the cover i To Remove Cover Squeeze the cover slightly at the two cutouts in the cover edges about 2 down from the top of the cover and push cover upward Pull cover out from rear panel Ethernet cable cutout Cover Installation and Removal The panel face should provide a flat and rigid mounting surface Reinforce the back of the panel if there is a possibility that the panel face will bow Raceways conduit and wiring should not interfere with the removal or accessibility of the instruments control devices alarms and related equipment See Figure 7 2 for panel cutout dimensions and Figure 7 3 for controller dimensions 5 44 0 06 0 138 2 1 5 0 W Panel Cutout Dimensions Tolerances 0 06 0 1 5 0 Height 5 44 138 2 Width 2 84 X A 0 16 inches 72 0 X A 4 1 mm Dimensions Inches Millimeters
44. AND gt 49 ABORTED READY gt READY 52 ABORTED lt EN ABORTED 51 April 2012 Function Blocks UM353 1B 3 2 67 PD PD Controller PD is proportional only controller with manual reset It is one of five controller types that can be used on a one per PD CONTROLLER loop basis mu pp ESN 000 Manual reset allows the output of the controller to be set Range Output Range for a normal operating value 1 the desired output when Process PD the process equals setpoint under given load condition Setpoint 5 CONTROLLER Derivative action is provided when the parameter TD is Feedback F Absolute Error non zero The controller includes an autotune feature that ato ED AT Warning can be initiated from the operator faceplate using the quick TUNE feature RIG RanGe PoinTeR 5 loop tag block tag null 5 Te NO YES When input A is high 1 the controller will operate in the a 0 001 16 100 0 hee normal auto mode and when low 0 causes the controller Time Derivative 5 0 00 to 100 00 min 0 00 output to track the feedback signal to eliminate bumping 2 n
45. LO HI LO 1 Input A SIGNAL ono gt 5 SELECTOR um T ES 01 LIN INPUT C loop tag block tag output l Input B HILO EIS Exec Seq No H 001 to 250 Input i aee ee ee ee BLOCK DIAGRAM April 2012 3 85 Function Blocks UM353 1B 3 2 82 SETPT Setpoint SETPT function blocks can be used on one per loop basis to permit operator adjustment of the controller setpoint within the loop The on line setpoint is adjustable using the pulser knob while lt loop tag gt S is the displayed variable unless the track command TC is high 1 at which time the setpoint will track the TV input setpoint ramping feature allows the setpoint to ramp to TARGET value The start of ramp can be initiated using communication command asserting input SR high the ramp starts on positive transition of the SR input or using RAMP ON OFF function in the QUICKSET mode Both ramp RATE and ramp TIME can be set in configuration Setting configuration parameter USE RATE to YES will cause the setpoint to change at the rate setting and ignore configured ramp time The RTIME or RRATE TARGET and PU SETPT values can be set using the QUICKSET feature if the QUICKSET parameter is set to YES The RG PTR range pointer parameter determines the normal operating range of the function block If the pointer is not SETPOINT ESN 000 Ran
46. Loop01 SETPT O1 RG PTR Range Pointer Loop01 AIN2 OR ESN Exec Seq No 25 INPUT Input P Loop01 AIN2 01 INPUT D Input D Loop01 SPLIM O1 SPLIM Setpoint Limit Function Block ESN Exec Seq No 15 RG PTR Range Pointer Loop01 AIN2 OR INPUT A Input A Loop01 E I O1 ESN Exec Seq No 30 4 8 April 2012 UM353 1B Factory Configured Options PID PID Controller Function Block PTR Range Pointer Loop01 AIN2 OR INPUT P Input P Loop01 AIN2 01 INPUT S Input S Loop01 SPLIM O1 INPUT F Input F 01 1 INPUT A Input A Loop01 A M AS INPUT I Input I 01 8 ESN Exec Seq No 35 A M Auto Manual Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer Loop01 PID OR INPUT P Input A Loop01 PID O1 ESN Exec Seq No 40 Analog Output 1 Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer Loop01 PID OR INPUT S Input S 01 1 ODC Operator Display for Controllers P RG PTR P Range Pointer Loop01 AIN2 OR V RG PTR V Range Pointer Loop01 PID OR X RG PTR X Range Pointer Loop01 AIN1 OR Y RG PTR Y Range Pointer Loop01 SCLO1 OR INPUT P Input P Process
47. UP has a dual purpose When in the normal operation mode pressing the button will scroll through the controller tuning parameters and allow activating the AUTOTUNE algorithm if cor configured for the loop controller If security clearance is satisfied the parameters can also be changed Press ENTER EXIT CONFIG button to return to the on line displays l 0314152 When the configuration mode this button will step up to the next configuration level lt has dual purpose When in the normal operation mode pressing the button will scroll the complete tag name of the Active Loop in the alphanumeric display The tag will scroll one character at time starting on the right e g When the configuration mode this button will provide shift left function for configurable items e g will shift the decimal point left e QUICK gt has a dual purpose When in the normal mode this button will step through and access either previously selected configuration parameters in the quick hold blocks configured within the Active Loop e g the HOLD value QHOLD03 which was labeled to display TEMP LIM having a range of 300 0 to 600 0 or parameters defined as QUICKSET in certain function blocks e g RATIO Press the ENTER EXIT CONFIG button to return to the on line displays When in the configuration mode this button will provide a shift right function for
48. ini ete ts et Eee puteo ailes 3 76 32 7 DI OHD Quickset Hold 2 epokene baka ab iam nnt A eut 3 78 3272 RATIO Ratio erre de eae eI tet p D e e e a a iri et 3 79 3 22 73 RCT Repeat Cycle Timer eo eae ee aee e eae ee eben 3 80 3 2 74 RLM Rate Limiter ite nns eset easi tete esses seite 3 81 3 2 75 ROT Retentive On Timer 1 1474 2 1 66 se e ees panne aee 3 82 3 2 76ROUT Relay IHE SERRE ee ee he qb bed ERREUR 3 82 32 TT RSE S RS Flip Flop sss uta ER PE EPOR re t OE EHE OX DPI RE 3 83 3 2 78 RTG Rising Edge Trigger nt e dia ie eter te Dea reete apte Pee 3 83 32 79 RTT Real Time clock TAP iiec 3 84 April 2012 UM353 1B Contents 3 2 80 SCL ICI E 3 85 3 2 81 SEL Signal Selector tenete erre e e e Ege e EE de ERE To ee dan 3 85 32 82 SETPT Setpoint ee eer Par retineo 3 86 32 83 SIN SINE acea taa ed n A a o n tee ED B Dee i innt 3 87 3 2 84 S BEIM Setpoint Lit eterne tet tina 3 87 3 285 SRE SiSR Elip Elop ier eem p D e D Re Mid o pea ens 3 88 3 2 86 SRI Square ROO et anda raide kin Grad 3 88 32 87 SUB SubtractlOfD ue ete at bete 3 89 32 88 LAN TANGEN iie pte rp a RE TRO ER Ud CRUS 3 89 3 2 89 TH gt Trak amp Hold
49. null TLV INPUT TV loop tag block tag output null The RATIO can be adjusted using the QUICKSET QUICK SET Ratio NO YES YES Exec Seq No 001 to 250 feature if parameter QUICKSET is set to YES The RATIO will continuously change as the knob is adjusted Press the STORE button when the final value is reached to insure that the new RATIO setting will be retained on a Cold power up condition The QS DPP parameter enables setting of the Ratio adjustment resolution when in the QUICKSET mode If input A or E is not configured its value will be set to 1 When input TC or TV is not configured its value will be set to 0 The TO Tracked Output is normally used in applications where an external device is being used to set a ratio in place of the RATIO parameter R is then set to 1 0 When it is desired to have the output of the RATIO block track the TV variable the external device is forced to track TO Input E will then equal TV Ax 1 0 and therefore the RATIO block output O1 will equal TV 1 1 IV p Ww R EN gt TO lt Tracked Output i Track Command 1 1 Track Variable BLOCK DIAGRAM When a configuration containing the RATIO function block is edited in ilconfig and then downloaded to an on line controller
50. 0 00 100 00 2 ot A 01 5 1 GT gt Moni Valve IRev 2 LOOPO1 PB2SW PB2 Switch Function Block Ext Int Transfer Switch Function Block INPUT MD Input MD LoopOI E I SE INPUT ST Input ST Loop01 PB2SW PS ESN Exec Seq No 5 INPUT E Input E Loop01 AIN2 01 INPUT I Input I Loop01 SETPT O1 ALARM Alarm Function Block ESN Exec Seq No 15 RG PTR Range Pointer Loop01 AIN1 OR INPUT P Input P Loop01 AIN1 01 A M Auto Manual Function Block INPUT D Input D LoopO1 E LO1 RG PTR Range Pointer Loop01 PID OR ESN Exec Seq No 20 INPUT A Input A Loop01 PID O1 ESN Exec Seq No 30 PID PID Controller Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer 01 SETPT Setpoint Function Block INPUT P Input P Loop01 AIN1 01 RG PTR Range Pointer Loop01 AIN1 OR INPUT Input Loop01 E 1 01 ESN Exec Seq No 10 INPUT F Input F Loop01 A M O1 INPUT A Input A Loop01 A M AS AOUTI Analog Output 1 Function Block INPUT I Input I 01 Range Pointer Loop01 PID OR ESN Exec Seq No 25 INPUT Input
51. 7 Remove debris from case and board s using a soft brush or low velocity deionized air 8 Insert removed board s into the case and carefully guide the connector end of a board to mate with the connector s at the back of the case Only when the connectors are mated should additional force be applied to seat the board 9 Hold the Display Assembly close to the open case and mate the display cable with the connector on the Display Assembly circuit board The cable is keyed 10 Align the Display Assembly with the case and finger tighten the two faceplate screws To ensure water tightness use a torque screwdriver set to 6 inch pounds to tighten the screws Alternatively use a screwdriver to tighten the screws until a slight resistance is felt then tighten an additional turn DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN 11 Remove the wrist strap 10 2 April 2012 UM353 1B Maintenance Connector Cover Ground Screw Voltage Input Approvals and Warning Label Wamingand O N Mounting Clip Capacity Label Top and Bottom Nameplate O Ring Display Expander Assembly Board gt Removable Portions of Connectors SIEMENS 77 a 77 Display Assembly with K Connector Socket Operator Faceplate Assembly Communications Port on Underside RJ 45 Enemet Connector Case with Flange Ethernet Connector 1 MPU Controller Board _ Display Assembly Cable MultiMedia Card Socket MG00500a
52. A 4 20 mA Input B Millivolt Input Figure 7 8 Universal Analog Input AINU1 for AINU resistor from the installation kit and insulate the bent resistor lead 0 8 PI leevi with a piece of sleeving At the lead end approximately 1 4 6 mm to 5 16 20 3mm 8 mm of bare resistor lead should be exposed 0 5 If crimp on connector is to be used go to step 3 Otherwise go to step 4 12 7mm April 2012 7 11 Installation UM353 1B Crimp On Signal Input Wire Connector 3 Connector Insert the resistor lead and any signal wiring into the 5 connector until the wire ends are visible at pin end of the connector Use a standard electrical connector crimp tool to crimp the connection Be Range Resistor 6 7 certain that all resistor leads and signal input wires inserted in the connector before crimping Loosen the two terminal screws using straight blade screwdriver with 1 8 3 mm blade width Insert wires resistor leads or crimp on connector pin into the two openings in the side of the connector adjacent to the selected terminal numbers Check that all involved components and station wiring are fully inserted and carefully tighten the screws to 5 in lbs Do not over tighten Repeat steps 1 5 for each 4 20 mA 1 5 Vdc and millivolt input Carefully dress resistors and wiring so that excessive stress is not placed on a component wire or connection
53. Output LE is high 1 when loop event is active Output SE is high when a station error is active Conditional Msg n ACK The LOOP will be used to index reads and writes to Modbus parameters The LOOP must be entered to enable Modbus and Modbus TCP communications 3 60 April 2012 UM353 1B Function Blocks An operator display must be configured in order to properly map station loop data to network data Sequencer loop network data is mapped onto registers or coils Input CL controls local arbitration of changes to loop data from the network When input CL is not configured the three status outputs LO and CM will be set high 1 and changes can be made from network command or the local faceplate When CL is configured it can be toggled locally from pushbutton switch such as PB1SW output PS and will change from local to console or from console computer to local each time the input is toggled Also when output LO goes high output will also high and CM will go low indicating that the control source will change to Console whenever Local is disabled either by toggling input CL or from network command The Computer CM state can be set high using a network command The NL output will normally be connected to the MD input of the pushbutton block PB1SW to indicate the C L switch position on the operator faceplate using the green LED for C and the red LED for LO Output WD will go h
54. Warning Label VIN Flip Down Door with Loop ID Card Case Assembly Figure 10 1 Siemens 353 Exploded View Design Level B 10 2 4 Circuit Board Handling ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE ALL ELECTRONIC ASSEMBLIES Semiconductor devices must be protected from electrostatic discharge properly grounded conductive wrist strap must be worn whenever circuit board assembly is handled or touched service kit with wrist strap and static dissipative work mat is available from mail order and local electronic supply companies LITHIUM BATTERY PRECAUTIONS Each MPU Controller board has a lithium battery that is not field replaceable Note the following when handling or disposing of either board e dispose of an un repairable circuit board with a lithium battery Do not burn the battery e Do not place the circuit board on a metal surface or otherwise short circuit battery terminals Do not attempt to charge the battery e If electrolyte is exposed wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when handling the battery e For details contact the battery manufacturer April 2012 10 3 UM353 1 10 3 TROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting the controller is primarily done by error codes Error codes are indicated on the alphanumeric display in response to a failed power up diagnostic test or to an on line controller error Section 10 4 Error Codes lists each code and the type of test or error check
55. nosset 30Vdc maximum Load Cuitrent 4 etes 100 mA maximum April 2012 13 5 Model Designation Specifications UM353 1B Off State Leakage lt 200 uA 30 Vde Transmitter Power 25 Vdc 120 mA short circuit protected MultiMediaCard eene MMC or MMCplus up to 2 GB must support SPI mode 13 7 EXPANDER BOARD SPECIFICATIONS Analog Inputs Universal 2 Type Thermocouple Range Limits esses 185 C to 1100 C 300 F to 2010 F Performance Range 0 to 1100 C ACGUFACy RR 0 5 lt 0 06 Software Output Type Analog configurable F R K Ambient Temperature Effect 0 08 C C Type Thermocouple Range Limits sess 185 C to 1370 C 300 F to 2500 F Performance Range 0 to 1370 C ACCULACY nee 0 6 Conformity eese lt 0 06 Software Output Type Analog configurable F R K Ambient Temperature Effect 0 10 Thermocouple Range Limits 240 C to 370 C 400 F to 698 F Performance 100 to 370 C ACCULACY sss eerte eer 0 5 Conformity eese lt 0 06 Software Output Type
56. power Up LAST 9 NO YES YES The E I switch position can also be changed by an SIT INPUT ST 09 oop tag block tag 0utput UN T JE INPUT EH loop tag block tag output operator HMI command over the Modbus RS485 or LNPUT INPUTI loop tag block tag output Modbus TCP Ethernet networks 1 inputio w loop tag block tag output EISIN Exec Seq No 001 to 250 When PU LAST is set to YES the E I switch will power up in the last position during hot or warm start During cold start it will power up in the position set by POWER UP parameter If PU LAST is set to NO the switch will power up in the last position during hot start but during warm or cold start will power up in the position set by the POWER UP parameter The IO Internal Override input enables a HI 1 input to temporarily select the Internal Input as the function block output O1 This input does not affect the position of the switch Outputs SE and SI indicate the actual position of the switch SE is HI 1 when in the E position and LO 0 when in the I position SI is HI when in the I position and LO when in the position Outputs IS and ES indicate the actual source of the block output IS is HI when Ol is the Internal input and is LO when 1 is the External input ES is HI when O1 is the External input and
57. zm Each AOE block is automatically assigned Modbus registers that can be accessed from any device having Modbus TCP Ethernet capability See Table 3 6 in Section 3 2 7 AIE Analog Input Ethernet for a listing of these registers Rev 2 April 2012 3 21 Function Blocks UM353 1B 3 2 13 AOUT Analog Outputs AOUT function blocks convert function block interconnection signals connected to input S to ANALOG OUTPUT _ a block output having a range of 4 20 mAdc Input D can be used to disconnect the output AOUT_ from the load when asserted high 1 This Range ET feature is useful when two or more controllers i ANALOG OUTPUT are connected to a common load When one Signal 5 EN AOUT controller is connected to the load others are Disconnect 7 D AOUT c disconnected using the disconnect feature The Quality Status G function block includes scaling to range the 4 20 mA output with the block input signal The range pointer parameter input R tells the block RIG RanGe PoinTeR S loop tag block tag null where to obtain scaling information If this I NIPUIT S inputs o loop tag block tag output parameter is not configured the block will use a i N P D INPUT D loop tag block tag output range of 0 00 to 100 00 ZERO output C 4 0 mA FULL FULL scale output o 20 0
58. 00315 48 1 00316 48 1 00317 48 1 00318 48 1 00319 48 1 00320 48 1 00321 48 1 00322 48 1 00323 48 1 00324 48 1 00325 48 1 00326 48 1 00327 48 1 00328 48 1 These bits indicate the status of the switch input MD write 1 will have the same effect as pressing and releasing the button on the faceplate If the action of the switch is sustained the switch will change position If the action is momentary the switch will close for one scan cycle April 2012 Data Mapping UM353 1B Analog Indicator ODA Code L P1AN L P1AE L PIBA 1 1 2 L P2AN L P2AE L P2BA L P2BN L P2BE L OS1 L PB1 L PB2 L PB3 L P3AA L P3AN L P3AE L P3BA L P3BN L P3BE L P4AA L P4AN L P4AE L P4BA L P4BN L P4BE L OS L CC L NA L AE R W Description 1 Process I Alarm A is Active 1 Process 1 Alarm A is Not Acknowledged 1 Process I Alarm is Enabled 1 Process 1 Alarm is Active 1 Process 1 Alarm B is Not Acknowledged 1 Process 1 Alarm is Enabled 1 Process 2 Alarm is Active 1 Process 2 Alarm A is Not Acknowledged 1 Process 2 Alarm is Enabled 1 Process 2 Alarm B is Active 1 Process 2 Alarm B is Not Acknowledged 1 Process 2 Alarm B is Enabled 1 Alarms Out of Service PB1SW Input MD PB2SW Input MD PB3SW Input MD 1 Process 3 Alarm is Active 1 Process 3 Alarm A is Not A
59. 1 L D8S R W Discrete 8 Status 1 0 Manual 1 0 00320 48 1 L D9S R W Discrete 9 Status 1 0 Manual 1 0 00321 48 1 L DAS R W Discrete A Status 1 Auto 0 Manual 1 0 00322 48 1 L DBS R W Discrete Status 1 0 Manual 1 0 00323 48 1 L DCS R W Discrete C Status 1 0 Manual 1 0 00324 48 1 L DDS R W Discrete D Status 1 Auto 0 Manual 1 0 00325 48 1 LADES R W Discrete E Status 1 0 Manual 1 0 00326 48 1 L DFS R W Discrete Status 1 Auto 0 Manual 1 0 00327 48 1 L D00 R W Discrete 0 Output 1 ON 0 OFF 1 0 00328 48 1 L D10 R W Discrete 1 Output 1 ON 0 OFF 1 0 00329 48 4 1 L D20 R W Discrete 2 Output 1 ON 0 OFF 1 0 00330 48 1 L D30 R W Discrete 3 Output 1 ON 0 OFF 1 0 00331 48 4 1 L D40 R W Discrete 4 Output 1 ON 0 OFF 1 0 00332 48 1 L D50 R W Discrete 5 Output 1 ON 0 OFF 1 0 00333 48 1 L D60 R W Discrete 6 Output 1 ON 0 OFF 1 0 00334 48 1 L D70 R W Discrete 7 Output 1 ON 0 OFF 1 0 00335 48 1 L D80 R W Discrete 8 Output 1 ON 0 OFF 1 0 00336 48 1 L D90 R W Discrete 9 Output 1 ON 0 OFF 1 0 00337 48 1 L DAO R W Discrete A Output 1 ON 0 OFF 1 0 00338 48 1 L DBO R W Discrete B Output 1 ON 0 OFF 1 0 00339 48 1 L DCO R W Discrete C Output 1 ON 0 OFF 1 0 00340 48 1 L DDO R W Discrete D Output 1 ON 0 OFF 1 0 00341 48 1 L DEO R W Discrete E Output 1 ON 0 OFF 1 0 00342 48 1 L DFO R W Discrete F Output 1 ON 0 OFF 1 0 00343 48 4 1 L PB1 R W PB1SW
60. 3 Is whole digits 0 999 0000 03E7 40463 30 1 L AITI R W Alarm 1 Type 0 6 0000 0006 40464 30 1 L A2TI R W Alarm 2 Type 0 6 0000 0006 40465 30 1 L A3TI R W Alarm 3 Type 0 6 0000 0006 40466 30 1 L A4TI R W Alarm 4 Type 0 6 0000 0006 40467 30 1 L AIPI R W Alarm 1 Priority 1 5 0001 0005 40468 30 1 L A2PI R W Alarm 2 Priority 1 5 0001 0005 40469 30 1 LHA3PI Alarm 3 Priority 1 5 0001 0005 40470 30 1 LHA4PI Alarm 4 Priority 1 5 0001 0005 40471 30 1 LHCAI R W Controller Action 1 DIR 0 REV 40472 30 1 0 80000 40473 30 1 0 0000 40480 30 1 Sequencer ODS MASK Configurations Code R W Description Range Register MB L S001GO0I R W L S001G00 R W L S001GI1I R W L S001G10 R W L S001G2I R W L S001G20 R W L S002GO0I R W L S002G00 R W Step 1 Group 0 Input Mask Step 1 Group 0 Output Mask Step 1 Group 1 Input Mask Step 1 Group 1 Output Mask Step 1 Group 2 Input Mask Step 1 Group 2 Output Mask Step 2 Group 0 Input Mask Step 2 Group 0 Output Mask Step 5 Group 0 Output Mask Step 5 Group 1 Input Mask Step 5 Group 1 Output Mask Step 5 Group 2 Input Mask Step 5 Group 2 Output Mask L S005G00 R W 1 50056 11 R W L S005G10 R W L S005G2I R W L S005G20 R W 0000 FFFF 0000 FFFF 0000
61. 7 4 3 Analog Output Wiring 4 20 mA 1 5 Vdc Analog output functions blocks are AOUT1 AOUT2 and AOUT3 Figure 7 9 shows connections for an external device that accepts 4 20 mA For an external device that needs 1 5 Vdc see Figure 7 10 Refer to Section 7 4 1 for wiring guidelines Model 353 Rear Terminals Station Common 6 gt 8 5 Er PS2 or Model 760 5 20 m Valve Positioner 17 8 Model 77 or 771 8 48 Transducer or Other 4 20 MA Device Common Ground Bus MG00505c Earth E Or any station common terminal Ground See Table 7 1 for AOUT2 and AOUTS terminals Figure 7 9 Analog Output AOUT 1 Current Output Model 353 Rear Terminals Station Common 6 8 3 17 TS 006 os SIREC D Recorder or Other 1 5 18 Device MG00505c Common Ground Bus Earth Or any station common terminal Ground See Table 7 1 for AOUT2 and AOUTS terminals Figure 7 10 Analog Output AOUT1 Voltage Output 7 12 April 2012 UM353 1B Installation 7 4 4 Digital Input and Output Wiring Connections to Digital Input and Digital Input Universal function blocks are shown in Figure 7 11 Wiring for internal and external power sources is shown Semiconductor devices can replace the mechanical switches shown Wiring guidelines are found in Section 7 4 1
62. DOE Digital Output Ethernet FB DOS Digital Output State FB DOUT Digital Output FB DPP decimal point position DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory DTM Dead Time Table FB DWNLD download DYT Delay Timer FB E I External Internal Transfer Switch FB EM EMER MAN emergency manual EN enable enabled ENG engineering units ERR error ESL Events Sequence Logger FB ESN Execution Sequence Number ET elapsed time EXP Natural Exponent FB EXT Exponentiation FB F Fahrenheit FAC factory FB function block FCO Factory Configured Option FREQ frequency ft feet FTG Falling Edge Trigger FB GB Gain amp Bias FB GS go to step H hold HART Highway Addressable Remote Transducer HI high HLD Hold FB HYS hysteresis Hz Hertz ICI Independent Computer Interface Model 320 ID ID Controller FB identity in inch INIT initial I O input output IO internal override k kilo prefix 107 K Kelvin Ib pound s April 2012 14 1 Abbreviations Acronyms UM353 1B LED Light Emitting Diode LIB library LL Lead Lag FB LMT Limit FB LN Natural Logarithm FB LO low lockout LOG Logarithm Base 10 FB m milli prefix 107 meter M mega prefix 107 MA moving average MAX maximum MB Modbus MD Message Display MIN minimum MMC MultiMediaCard MR manual reset
63. MINimum SCALE t Real 00 Zero will cause the output to integrate to a new output at MAXIS CIA MAXimum SCALE s Heal 1000 Decimal Point Position preferred S 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 the TI time constant IEINIGIUIN I T S ENGineering UNITS 6 ASCII Char PRCT 1 P loop tag block tag output x INPUT S INPUTS loop tag block tag output null The process range pointer parameter points to a function LINIPIUT INPUTF Hoop t g block tee ul block that has range scaling such as the analog input that INPUTA 9 loop tag block tag output Exec Seq No 001 to 250 is providing the process variable signal This enables the controller to normalize the tuning parameters for the range of the process input If this parameter is not configured the controller will use a range scaling of 0 00 100 00 POWER UP During a warm or cold start the output will be initialized to the value of the MINSCALE parameter and all dynamic states will be initialized to their current input value on the first scan cycle
64. NO YES that can be connected to other blocks with Range ZIE RIO ZERO input 0 to 1 0 F ULL FULL scale input 4 0 to 5 0 PTR input ICIAILI Vit EM VIEW input verify Real Analog Input blocks are available on the MPU Controller Board CB and on the I O Expander Board EB Block names IDs are listed in Section 7 4 Electrical Installation together with the case rear terminal numbers Power for 2 wire transmitters is available at the rear terminals A digital filter time constant is available to dampen process noise A square root extractor is also available to linearize a flow signal from a AP transmitter allowing the block output to be configured for flow units Output QS indicates the quality of the analog output signal O1 and will be high 1 when output O1 is bad and low 0 when good Bad quality signifies an A D conversion failure or a 1 5Vdc input signal that falls below 0 7 Vdc indicating an open circuit or failure of a 2 wire transmitter A verify mode CAL VIEW is available during calibration to view the block output over the full calibrated range The input is factory calibrated for 1 5 Vdc and should not require field calibration However field calibration can be performed if another range is required or to match the exact transmitter calibration Current inputs are accommodated using precision dropping resistors connected across
65. No Connection MG00513a Figure 7 15 Universal Analog Input AINU1 2 3 and 4 Wire Inputs April 2012 UM353 1B Installation 7 4 7 Ohms and Slidewire Input Wiring Function blocks AINU1 and AINU2 can be configured for ohm or slidewire inputs Figure 7 16 shows the needed connections for Ohm and Slidewire inputs Controller Terminals Controller Terminals Isolated Isolated 45 gt Power gt 45 NS Power gt MS e Position ENDS 46 Universal er 46 Universal Ohms Converter 5 Converter 5 Isolated 2 5 isolated 2 8 47 Inputs 5 47 Inputs 5 Isolated 1 Isolated 48 7 3148 Z Note See Table 7 1 for AINU2 terminals MG00514a Note See Table 7 1 for AINU2 terminals MG00515a Ohm Input Slidewire Input Figure 7 16 Universal Analog Input AINU1 Shown 7 4 8 Relay Output Wiring Function blocks ROUTI and ROUT are located on the I O Expander board They provide two single pole double throw relay outputs as shown in Figure 7 17 Relay contact ratings are stated in Section 13 6 MPU Controller Board Specifications The load connected to a closed contact should draw a current between the minimum and maximum contact ratings A resistive load is recommended An inductive or capacitive load can cause high peak currents or contact arcing which can pit or otherwise dam
66. Permanent Instrument Tag Stainless steel tag permanently attached to the controller case One line with up to 24 characters can be specified Display Assembly Remote 16353 54 For remote panel mounting of a Display Assembly Includes Mounting Kit Flange Assembly Mounting Clips and Screws Display Ribbon Cable 48 inches 1219 mm long Installation Instruction Does not include the Display Assembly Communications Cable 16353 61 Connects MMJ11 on adapter connected to a personal MMJ11 to MMJ11 computer s serial port to MMJ11 on a Display Assembly Select one of the following adapters Adapter DB25 to MMJ11 16353 62 Adapts personal computer serial port to above Communications Cable Adapter DB9 to MMJ11 16353 63 13 3 SERVICE PARTS KITS Exploded view drawings of the Siemens 353 appear in Section 1 Introduction and Section 10 Maintenance SERVICE PART DESCRIPTION PART NO MultiMediaCard TGX 16353 304 FIRMWARE UPDATE KITS Ps Controller upgrade Utility and Controller Firmware for Models 352P 353 353R 15939 71V4 00 354 and IPAC Contact Siemens Download file fw400 zip the file firmware revision at the time this manual was for current prepared or order a firmware CD version April 2012 13 3 Model Designation and Specifications UM353 1B SERVICE PART DESCRIPTION PART NO ELECTRONIC ASSEMBLIES AND RELATED PARTS f 16353 53 Display Assembly Bezel Replacement Kit 16353 163 Contains gray bezel keypad pulsa
67. Signal Selector SETPT Setpoint SINOI 99 Sine SPLIM Setpoint Limit SRFO0I 99 SR Flip Flop SRTO01I 99 Square Root SUBOI 99 Subtraction TANO1I 99 Tangent 99 Track amp Hold TOTO01 99 TOTalizer 5 01 99 Transfer Switch 01 99 Exclusive OR Logic 2 2 April 2012 UM353 1B Configuration Overview 2 4 ETHERNET DATA I O FUNCTION BLOCKS These function blocks are available in the quantities indicated within a controller These blocks can be selected for use within individual loops but block names are unique station wide 1 01 32 Analog Input Ethernet CWE01 32 Coil Write Ethernet 01 32 Analog Output Ethernet DIEO 32 Discrete Input Ethernet AWEO 32 Analog Write Ethernet DOE01 32 Digital Output Ethernet CIEO01 32 Coil Input Ethernet DWE0 32 Digital Write Ethernet 2 5 CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE Each controller must be configured to perform the desired control strategy The arrangement of functions and the numerical data required for a particular control circuit are referred to as the controller configuration Local and remote configurations are accommodated Local configuration involves the configuration pushbuttons and the pulser knob on the Display Assembly s faceplate Section 8 2 Configuration Mode shows the faceplate and provides brief description
68. TOTALIZER PTD 2 operator faceplate as lt loop tag gt T if the configuration reset PuLse parameter DISP TOT is set to YES A 6 character Trip 1 etema Alarm 1 maximum name g GAL 18 entered in configuration 2 ED Alania under TOT UNIT to identify the totalizer units Input S asserted high 1 will stop the integrator action Time Base 5 1 sec 2 min 3 hr 4 day 5 wk 2 Input R will cause the integrator function to reset to the H H U A TOTalizer UNITS 8 6 Char ASCII nul INITial VALUE S anabera Real 0 0 initial value VAL These inputs do not affect the IDIR acting is WE PuLse output The integrator output is summed with the 2100 zero Drop Out 9 i Real 0 0 Power Up LAST 5 5 INITial VALue entered configuration to provide the PREGET presets mn dae count total The VAL is used as the total when the _ 2 PRESET2 5 Real 0 0 i PIU L SIGIALL PULse SCALING 8 Real 1 0 BATOT 184858 ID I S P pisPlay ToTal NO YES YES LC KIS QUICK SET presets 8 NO YES YES DIR ACT set to YES will cause the integrator to increase QIS D IP P Quick Set presets Dec Pt Pos 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 S IN P U T INPUT EC loop tag block tag output null its outpu
69. The design level is indicated by the next to last character in the model number The characters shown are those required to identify an involved instrument See the Siemens Process Instruments catalog or the instrument s User s Manual UM353 1B for complete model designation information SR353 15 UPGRADE CONSIDERATIONS AND MATERIALS None Note that this firmware release is for use with design level Model 353 controllers only INSTALLING VERSION 4 03 Refer to Software Release memo SR15939 71 6 for a brief list of needed hardware and the firmware installation steps CUSTOMER PRODUCT SUPPORT For support and the location of your local Siemens representative refer to the table below for the URL of the Process Instrumentation PI portion of the Siemens public Internet site Once at the site click Support in the right column and then Product Support Next select the type of support desired sales technical see the table below documentation or software Online Support Request http www siemens com automation support request Technical Support 1 800 333 7421 8 a m to 4 45 p m eastern time Monday through Friday except holidays Customer Service amp Returns 1 800 365 8766 warranty and non warranty Public Internet Site http www usa siemens com pi Technical Publications Click the above link to go to the Siemens Internet site and then click Process in PDF Instrumentation In the colu
70. X03100S1 Where A Number of 353 Stations and 353R or i pac Faceplates Figure 7 2 Panel Cutout Dimensions April 2012 UM353 1B Installation 11 25 285 8 VIEW s 2 84 2 67 8 72 T7 67 8 8 AN Mounting Cli 1 18 gt Le 30 ee Case Dimensions in inches millimeters d SIDE VIEW EY c cl 67 5 42 6 3 137 7 160 1 ar Y 0 32 gt lt 08 Figure 7 3 Siemens 353 Dimensions 7 3 3 Station Mounting straight slot screwdriver with at least 10 254 mm shank is needed to tighten the two mounting clip screws 1 Locate the supplied Mounting Clip Kit It contains two mounting clips and two 8 32 x 1 fillister head screws Thread the mounting screws into the mounting clips See Figure 7 4 From in front of the panel insert the controller case into the panel cutout Slightly rotate the top mounting clip to fit it into the case cutout Then straighten the clip and partially tighten the mounting screw Insert straighten and partially tighten the bottom clip Square the controller with the panel Alternately tighten top and bottom mounting clip screws until the controller is secured to the panel Do not over tighten and distort the case Side View Insert clip as shown straighten 4 Bottom View 0310350
71. composition Real 0 0 HEL I UM HELIUM composition Real 0 0 ARGON ARGON composition Real 0 0 MOL SUM mocL SUM read total composition Real 100 0 INPUT Pf INPUT Pf loop tag block tag output INPUT Tf INPUT Tf loop tag block tag output E SN Exec Seq 000 to 250 000 April 2012 3 13 Function Blocks UM353 1B 3 2 7 Analog Input Ethernet function blocks use Modbus command 04 Read Input Registers to enable the controller to read analog data from other stations over the Ethernet network ANALOG INPUT ETHERNET Up to 32 _ blocks are available Blocks are 5 7 Output Range assigned in sequence e g AIE01 AIE02 2 1 gt Output 01 controller wide with each use i Output QS Data can be received as a real floating point number and m passed to block output 01 directly or it can be LP AD IP ADdRESs n nnn nnn nnn nnn 192 168 0 0 obtained as a 16 bit integer A Floating Point number AD RE S MBADGRESS 1 255 1 can be formatted in one of four methods as shown MB _ ModBus REGister H 1655359 0 4 REG Modbus REGister TYPE InPut Holding InPut Table 3 4 on the next page An integer is converted to DATA Modbus DATA TYPe i FP Uint Sint FP floating point as scaled by MIN INT and MAX
72. een RUD epe ee eon EE S 3 90 32 90 TOT reete eet eee eee ee he ateist 3 90 3 2 91 TSW _ Transfer Switch rsoonnorvvveversennnnnvnsnvevsnnnnnnnnenvevennnnnnenenvsvevnnennenevsssvennnnenenssvsnenennenenssvsnunenven 3 91 3 2 92 XOR Exclusive OR Logic esee reet tree ee We etie ehh 3 91 4 0 FACTORY CONFIGURED OPTIONS seosevvevevvevvevensenverenseneenenseneenenseneenensenennensenennensenennenssnennensenensevensensenennene 4 1 4 1 FCO101 Single Loop Controller w Tracking Setpoint eene 4 2 4 2 FCO102 Single Loop Controller w Fixed 4 3 4 3 103 External Set Controller with Tracking Local Setpoint serere 4 4 4 4 104 External Set Controller with Non Tracking Local 4 6 4 5 105 Ratio Set Control w Operator Setpoint 4 8 4 6 FCO106 Single Loop Controller w Operator Setpoint Limits eese 4 10 4 7 FCO107 Dual Loop Controllers nini reete re E tere peace te e Re a neat Pe sets 4 11 4 8 ECO121 Cascade Control 5 nn t ep E t e Rb eO EO PO DRE tI Esse 4 13 4 9 FCO122 Cascade Control w Operator Setpoint Limits esee 4 15 5 0 NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS sesserevvevverensenverenseneesenseneenensenennensenensensenensensnennenssnennenssnennenssnensensenenssnenn
73. loop tag block tag output null INPUT inputs loop tag block tag output null I NIPUTT C INPUTC loop tag block tag output I NPUT INPUTD loop tag block tag output null I NPUT INPUTE loop tag block tag output null I NIPIUIT F INPUTF loop tag block tag output null Rev 2 DIGITAL OUTPUT _ DOUT DIGITAL OUTPUT Switch Open Collector Transistor Switch DOUT 1 UIT INPUT S loop tag block tag output null Terminal Connections JER EEE Relay DOUTI1 DOUT 1 8 DOUT Ic 9 BLOCK DIAGRAM DOUT2 DOUT2 10 DOUT2c 9 3 38 April 2012 UM353 1B Function Blocks 3 2 34 DTM Dead Time Table DTM function blocks provide shift registers to hold the analog input signal for period of time and shift it from DEAD TIME register to register to provide an overall delay between input and output as configured in parameter DEADTIME ESN 000 Analog Input utput 1 Input AT can be used to adapt the DEADTIME to an Enable gt moving average external signal The actual shift register used as the block Adaptive Time output will equal the whole value of input AT e g 0 184 r gister 0 1 827 Tegister 1 IDIE A D TIL M E DEAD TIME 0 0 to 10000 min 0 0 INPUT INPUT A
74. will power up in the last position during Cold start at the 10 range value 3 78 April 2012 UM353 1B Function Blocks 3 2 72 RATIO Ratio RATIO function blocks can be used on one per loop basis They provide means of setting ratio in RATIO an external setpoint application for example controlling captive flow while maintaining the ratio RATIO ESN 000 Input between a wild flow and the captive flow at the R P Output 1 desired value Inputs A and E external ratio and the Input E LE RATIO operator set ratio R value are multiplied and become Track Command ie OS RXAXE gt Tracked Output the function block output O1 Track Variable TV Track Command input TC asserted high 1 causes the ratio block to track the input variable TV The ET iH oe 6 we P E High Ratio LIMIT 5 Real 30 00 ratio value 10 be recalculated 18 then LO Low Ratio LIMIT S 0 00 The value of will be limited at the HI or LO 05 IDIPIP auickset Dec Pt s 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 LIMIT range settings The factory default settings of loop tag block tag output i INPUT E INPUT E H loop tag block tag output nuli the ratio limits are 0 00 30 00 T C INPUT TC oop tag block tag output
75. 1 2 P nel Cutout Dimensions ere pe P EE 7 4 7 3 Sl mens 353 DIMENSIONS 7 5 7 4 Case Mounting Clip ite ete rte Veo e tee teer ope epu 7 5 7 5 Rear Terminal Layout and Terminal Assignmennts eese eene nne nennen enne 7 8 7 6 Analog Input AINI 2 Wire Transmiter roii 7 10 7 7 Analog Inputs AINI 2 and 3 4 Wire Transmitters essere 7 11 7 8 Universal Analog Input AINU L et cri Gd eite de m c ro nee ess 7 11 7 9 Analog Output AOUT 1 Current 2 00 55 7 12 7 10 Analog Output AOUTI Voltage 20 2 4 000091956 5 7 12 7 14 Digital Inputs DIN and DINU dide n dede tme pee 7 13 7 12 Digital Output DOUTI Resistive and Inductive 02 0 7 14 7 13 Universal Analog Input AINU1 Thermocouple Input eese enne nennen rennen 7 15 7 14 Reference Junction Lead Formation esernvrvronorerevnrrnaenennrrvaenennervrenererenvesvarnennsenennsssrevnssranesnsenennsevsenessresnesnee 7 15 7 15 Universal Analog Input AINUI 2 3 and 4 Wire RTD Inputs esee eene 7 16 7 16 Universal Analog Input AINUI Shown eese enne enne nenne ennt inneren trennen innen 7 17 7 17 Universal Relay Outputs ROUTI and 2 Resistive Load eese eene 7 17
76. C AIL view output verify cal C 96 Two analog output function blocks are available on the Controller Board and one additional on the Board Function block names and terminal identifications are listed below The output is factory calibrated for 4 20 mAdc and should not require field calibration However field calibration can be performed if desired The output is calibrated by adjusting the pulser until the desired output i e 4 0 mA for zero is obtained and then pressing the store button A verify mode CAL VIEW is available during calibration that will show the 0 100 signal driving the output circuit in the numeric display as the pulser adjusts the output over the full range Output QS is the Quality Status output It will go high if the output driver detects a high impedance or an open circuit The alphanumeric will flash AOUT_ OC when an open circuit condition is detected The QS output could also be used to switch to a second output circuit in a redundancy application cc S Scaling DA gt 9 AOUT 1 Output RanGe PoinTeR BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 22 April 2012 UM353 1B Function Blocks 3 2 14 ASN ARCSINE ASN function blocks accept an input between 1 0 and 1 0 and provide an output signal in radians of which the input is the sine ARCSINE ESN 000
77. LHS001TIM R W Step 1 Time Period min Real 43951 60 1 LHS001AEP R W Step I Analog End Point Real 43953 60 1 L S002TIM R W Step 2 Time Period min Real 43955 60 1 LHS002AEP R W Step 2 Analog End Point Real 43957 60 1 L S003TIM R W Step 3 Time Period min Real 43959 60 1 LHS003AEP R W Step 3 Analog End Point Real 43961 60 1 LHS004TIM R W Step 4 Time Period min Real 43963 60 1 LHS004AEP R W Step 4 Analog End Point Real 43965 60 1 L SOOSTIM R W Step 5 Time Period min Real 43967 60 1 L SO05AEP R W Step 5 Analog End Point Real 43969 60 1 LHS006TIM R W Step 6 Time Period min Real 43971 60 1 LHS006AEP R W Step 6 Analog End Point Real 43973 60 1 LHS007TIM R W Step 7 Time Period min Real 43975 60 1 LHS007AEP R W Step 7 Analog End Point Real 43977 60 1 LHS008STIM R W Step 8 Time Period min Real 43979 60 1 LHS008AEP R W Step 8 Analog End Point Real 43981 60 1 LHS009TIM R W Step 9 Time Period min Real 43983 60 1 LHS009AEP R W Step 9 Analog End Point Real 43985 60 1 LHS010TIM R W Step 10 Time Period min Real 43987 60 1 LHS010AEP R W Step 10 Analog End Point Real 43989 60 1 spares 44991 44009 60 1 Controller ODA Code R W Description Range Register MB L QIMNF R W Quickset 1 MIN SCALE Real 43951 60 1 R W Quickset I MAX SCALE Real 43953 60 1 L Q2MNF R W Quickset 2 MIN SCALE Real 43955 60 1 L Q2MXF R W Quickset 2 MAX SCALE Real 43957 6
78. MG00502d Or any station common terminal Common Ground Bus Power Supply Earth Notes Ground 1 See Table 7 1 for Model 353 AIN2 3 and 4 terminals 2 Refer to the Siemens SIREC D manual for details and other analog inputs Figure 7 19 Model 353 to Siemens SIREC D Recorder Analog Input Wiring 7 4 12 Power Wiring Basic connections for AC and DC power input are shown in Figure 7 20 Wiring guidelines are given in Section 7 4 1 Model 35 3530 Rear Terminals Rear Terminals gt gt Hot H H ACToDG 5 Power 5 120 240 Neutral Power Supply 5 N p 5 5 25W on 3 24 Vdc on 5 59125 1 Earth Ground G 3 Earth Ground G 8 0310650 Terminal on rear of case Green screw at top center of rear terminal area Figure 7 20 Controller Power Wiring Power input to Siemens should be routed through clearly labeled circuit breaker fuse or on off switch that is located near the controller and is accessible by the operator The protective device should be located in non explosive atmosphere unless suitable for use in an explosive atmosphere This type of wiring is shown in Figure 7 21 It will permit removal of controller power without affecting the on line status of adjacent
79. OR Logic OR when D P is less than the limit setting minus Ly the deadband SETTENE pamm compares the process input with the range limits referenced by the range pointer parameter and will trip the alarm status high 1 when the process is equal to or greater than the high limit or equal to or less than the low limit The alarm status will clear 0 when the process is less than the high limit minus the deadband or greater than the low limit plus the deadband POWER UP During warm start all alarms will be handled the same as during hot start outputs are initialized at the last state all previously acknowledged alarms are treated as acknowledged and any new alarms will be processed on the first scan cycle On a cold start all alarm outputs are initialized at 0 all alarms are reset and any new alarms based on the block inputs will be processed during the first scan cycle Also during a cold start alarms will be enabled or disabled as determined by the PU ENable parameters Alarm Status Alarm status is available with Modbus or Modbus TCP Ethernet for alarm management at remote location The alarm status is available in coils Detailed information can be found in Section 5 Network Communications An overview of a Loop alarm status coil definitions are shown below 3 20 April 2012 UM353 1B Function Blocks L A_ 1 when Loop alarm is active L N_ 1 when Loop alarm__ is Not acknowledged L
80. Scaled Freq gt SF CT output will power up at the last value DIU Y gt during hot warm start If set to NO during warm or cold start it will be set to GE n ualtyTest gt QS 0 0 The digital filter will be temporarily by passed during hot warm cold start BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 36 April 2012 UM353 1B Function Blocks 3 2 30 DIV Division DIV function blocks perform simple arithmetic division The output will be the quotient of the two configured DIVISION inputs N D The output will be limited to the maximum real number and if the divisor is 0 0 the output will go to _ _ the maximum real number with the sign determined by the Numerator N numerator If the numerator is 0 0 the output will be 0 0 Denominator DIVISION Any unconfigured inputs will be set equal to 1 0 INPUT INPUT loop tag block tag output LNP UT INPUT D loop tag block tag output EIS Exec Seq No 001 to 250 N Numerator 2 Saar a A 01 P EE BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 2 31 DNC Divide by Counter DNC function blocks provide a single output pulse for pre selected number of input pulses The output will go high 1 with a positive transition
81. The Wild Flow signal will be displayed on Variable X and the actual Ratio CF WF will be displayed on Variable Y Wild Flow 0 00 100 00 PRCT E AINT 2 o 2 RATIO Divo gt EM 0 50 1 50 CF WF 5 PB2SW SETPT o oi ORO1 SR gt ORO2 Captive Flow 0 00 100 00 PRCT E gt AIN2 o 4 O1 A O1 5 l2 AE AS E AOUT1 ES su ex mil Valve r ALARM Rev 2 LOOPO1 SETPT Setpoint Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer Loop01 AIN2 OR RATIO Ratio Function Block HI LIMIT HI Range LIMIT 1 50 INPUT TV Input TV Loop01 AIN2 01 LO LIMIT LO Range LIMIT 0 50 INPUT TC Input TC Loop01 0R02 01 INPUT A Input A Loop01 AIN1 01 INPUT LU Input LU Loop01 SPLIM HS INPUT TC Input TC Loop01 0R01 01 INPUT LD Input LD Loop01 SPLIM LS INPUT TV Input TV Loop01 SPLIM O1 ESN Exec Seq No 5 ESN Exec Seq No 20 PB2SW PB2 Switch Function Block INPUT MD Input MD Loop01 E I SE Ext Int Transfer Switch Function Block ESN Exec Seq No 10 INPUT ST Input ST Loop01 PB2SW PS INPUT E Input E Loop01 RATIO O1 ALARM Alarm Function Block INPUT I Input I
82. Therefore the ODC RX input uses the range output of the external setpoint AIN2 OR for scaling The 0 100 bargraph will represent the range of AIN1 when displaying the process variable and the range of AIN2 when displaying the X variable e FCO105 Ratio Set Control and AIN2 are scaled 0 100 of flow The ratio of these flows is displayed on variable Y and the scaler function block is used to define the engineering units as dimensionless ratio CF WF scaled from 0 50 1 50 Connections between blocks are allowed only with similar data types To help you quickly locate function block e this section function blocks are listed alphabetically by the block ID e g AIN for Analog Input e Section 2 function blocks are listed by broad function e g station hardware I O 3 1 STATION FUNCTION BLOCKS Station function blocks include stored configurations such as FCOs security clock setup Ethernet settings and station parameters Each is described in the following subsections 3 1 1 CONFIGS Configurations Library The CONFIGS function block provides a selection of applications either stored in the controller memory as FCOs or stored on a plug in MMC memory card CONFIGS An FCO can be selected from the library and loaded NEN as a complete controller configuration as defined by CONFIGS the FCO documentation see Section 4 This erases the current configuration in the controller Station parameters S
83. for 2006 write a 6 The change to each parameter will take approximately I to 2 seconds each 2 IP Address format nnn nnn nnn nnn 1 2 3 4 default 192 168 0 2 3 IP Mask format nnn nnn nnn nnn 1 2 3 4 default 255 255 255 0 4 IP Gateway format nnn nnn nnn nnn 1 2 3 4 default is 192 168 0 1 5 A major software Rev of 0 no software included and hardware type of 0 not installed April 2012 Data Mapping UM353 1B 6 2 2 Station String Data 8 bit ASCII Char 2 Word Code R W Description Range Register MB STAG R Station Tag 12 ASCII Char 40101 40106 CFNR R Configuration File Name Reduced 8 ASCII Char n a CFN R Configuration File Name 20 ASCII Char 40107 40116 SN R Station Serial No 8 ASCII 40117 40120 Spares 0 0000 40121 40199 6 2 3 Station Coil Data 1 bit Code R W Description Range Coil MB ASE R 1 Active Station Event 1 0 00001 SEN R W 1 Station Event Not Ackl d 1 0 00002 FSB R 1 Flashing Station Bargraph 1 0 00003 SDV R 1 Station Database Valid 1 0 00004 CCL R Config Change Counter LSB bit 1 0 n a CCH R Config Change Counter MSB bit 1 0 n a SCH R 1 Station Configuration Hold 1 0 00007 SRB R W 1 Station Run Bit 1 0 00008 OOS R W 1 Station Alarms Out of Service 1 0 00009 spares 0 00010 00014 CCl R W Config Change Bit 1 1 0 n a CC2 R W Config Change Bit
84. relating to alarms are described in the sections describing the specific faceplate controls and displays All alarms have the following features Deadband requires that the signal either drop below or exceed the limit setting by the amount of the deadband before the alarm clears goes low The alarm deadband is set as a fixed of the range pointer scale Delay In Time requires that the input remain above or below the limit setting for the delay time before the alarm trips goes high This can help prevent nuisance alarms that may be tripping due to process noise Delay Out Time requires that the input remain below or above the limit setting plus deadband for the delay time before the alarm will clear goes low This can help prevent inadvertent clearing of alarms due to process noise Ringback causes a previously acknowledged alarm to require acknowledgment priorities 1 4 when the alarm clears April 2012 3 19 Function Blocks UM353 1B DEV compares the absolute difference between the process input and the deviation input IP DI with the limit setting and it will trip the alarm BLOCK DIAGRAM status high 1 when IP DI is equal to or greater than the limit setting The alarm status will clear 0 when IP DI is less than the limit setting minus the deadband Alarm
85. 100 128 3968 48786 Writing to the sample time will reset all data points A4D1 through A4D170 to 0 6 24 April 2012 UM353 1B Data Mapping Code R W Description Range Register MB ASRMN R ATD05 MIN SCALE Real 48801 ASRMX R ATD05 MAX SCALE Real 48803 ASDPP R ATD05 Decimal Point Position 0 5 48805 ASEU R ATD05 Engineering Units 6 ASCII Char 48806 ASYR R 05 Year V2 0 5 1997 48809 5 ATD05 Month V2 0 5 1 12 48810 ASDY R ATD05 Day V2 0 5 1 31 48811 ASHR R 05 Hour V2 0 5 0 23 48812 5 05 Minute 2 0 5 0 59 48813 55 R ATD05 Second V2 0 5 0 59 48814 ASST R W ATD05 Sample Time x0 01 min 1 48000 48815 ASSTC R ATDOS Sample Time Complete 0 1000 1 48816 ASDI R 05 Data 1 latest 0 100 128 3968 48817 ASD2 R 05 Data 2 0 100 128 3968 48818 A5D3 R 05 Data 3 0 100 128 3968 48819 A5D168 R ATD05 Data 168 0 100 128 3968 48984 A5D169 R ATD05 Data 169 0 100 128 3968 48985 A5D170 R 05 Data 170 0 100 128 3968 48986 Writing to the sample time will reset all data points ASD1 through A5D170 to 0 Notes 1 of any Time Stamp Data i e Year Month Day Hour Minute Second or Sample Time will update all Loop data registers Additional data reads of Trend data within the same block should only request data so as to obtain complete set of time synchronized data 2 Trend data are obtained from the loop referenced by the MLTP parameter registe
86. 2 Wire Transmitter 7 10 April 2012 UM353 1B Installation External Model 353 MG00604a ource External Devices Rear Terminals 1 5 Vdc VIS Analog Signal 20 4 Wire Transmitter 250 T 4 20 mA Output 118 gt z 1 5 1 Analog Signal 22 EE 4 Wire Transmitter 250 T 5 4 20 mA Output 121 5 5 1 5 Analog Signal 23 vp Ter ANS 4 Wire Transmitter 250 4 F 4 20 mA Output 24 t Station Common 6 lt Common Ground Bus L Earth Or any station common terminal see Table 7 1 Ground for additional station common terminals Figure 7 7 Analog Inputs AIN1 2 and 3 4 Wire Transmitters Model 353 Model 353 Rear Terminals 1 Rear Terminals T 5 Isolated Rower 45 8 x 46 Universal 46 T ET E Millivolt Converter gt 5 niversal Isolated 20 4 20 mA Converter E Source 47 oe p Isolated 4 2 d Source _ l J47 Inputs 2 2 Isolated 18 3 75 p Ground 48 7 Ground Isolated 8 5 ES Ground 48 ae Note See Table 7 1 for AINU2 terminals MG00509a Note See Table 7 1 for AINU2 terminals MG00508a 2 4 20 mA Input Only Select a precision 0 1 2500 for AIN or 3 750
87. 2012 UM353 1B Maintenance Ethernet Connector Ethernet Activity LED 1 34 fa 00 00003 125 D 180 7 2010 J 5 MMC CARD 18007 SOR 0 00005 nnnnnnn D Display Cable MMC Activity LED Figure 10 2 MPU Controller Board 4 C5 C6 LEE R c3 R226 SOCKET MMC CARD MMC 2 UA T rzez MMC Eject Button MMC CARD Activity LED Figure 10 3 MultiMediaCard MMC Inserting and Ejecting April 2012 10 5 UM353 1 10 4 ERROR CODES This section describes off line error codes on line error codes and on line status codes Typically code will point to failed internal assembly or failed peripheral device Note that configuration error can also cause an error code or multiple error codes to be produced For example an error will occur when attempting to run configuration that includes an I
88. 353 Nees Cable Label Entrelec ILPH 084 233 11 UE SD tot RxD TxD NCA 3 RXD 80 K gt E RS232 lt TxD RxD 5485 3 3 120 Cable Cable Note 4 Note 1 zn 2 j RT AL D gt 8 RIS 4 Ga 4 4 SG ae R 5 SG SG 22 aod A J c 7 6 6 Jumper Settings Note 7 G G Ov V R Safety Safety 8 5 26 Vdc um E 1 Ground Ground Common Ground Bus Single Point E Or any station common terminal Earth Ground a A Modbus Communications APACS ACM to Model 353 8 gt Personal Computer RS485 to RS232 Serial Port Isolated Converter M d odel 353 Model 353 od Cable Label Entrelec ILPH 084 233 11 5M gt A v Ro ef RxD TxD NCA TD DK 2 3 TxD TD RUE 3 3 12 io 4 DTRO ae Cable 8 CTS Note 1 gt L gt 4 4 SG DER 5 SG gt RTS lead is not used A J 6 6 Cut back and insulate ERR SE P F Jumper Settings Note 7 G G Rt 1 Case Case 1 Safety Safety 8 5 26Vde v E fy Ground Ground Common Ground Bus Or any station common terminal 1 RS232 cable must be shielded and less than 50 feet 15 meters in length Recommended cable is Belden 9927 24 AWG or equivalent For an assembled cable order Siemens PN 16137 191 WP DB9 socket receptacle gender adapter N Co
89. 4 1 Be sure that the solid conductor is satisfactorily clamped by the terminal screw and pressure plate Two reference junctions RJ are supplied in the I O Expander board installation kit Install as outlined below Model 353 Rear Terminals 4 N Isolated Thermocouple Wire 5 NS Power gt no AA tee BN 8 46 Universal i Converter gt 5 N Isolated KS 5 c 47 Inputs Isolated 48 MN Notes 1 RJ Cold Junction Reference MG00512a 2 See Table 7 1 for AINU2 terminals 3 Grounded junction shown For ungrounded junction connect cable shield to AINUc Analog Input Universal Common Figure 7 13 Universal Analog Input AINU1 Thermocouple Input Thermocouple reference junction RJ installation 1 Slipalength of insulating sleeving over the portion of each reference junction lead that will remain exposed after installation Carefully form the leads as shown in Figure 7 14 0 63 0 06 15 9 1 5 7 9 05 JJ _Y _ 12 7 0 1 10 25 n 1 Insulate leads with sleeving 2 Dimensions are in inches millimeters and are approximate MG00390a Figure 7 14 Reference Junction Lead Formation 2 Loosen the two terminal screws using a straight blade screwdriver with a 1 8 3 mm blade width Insert the reference junction leads into the two openings in the side of the connector adjacent to
90. 4 14 April 2012 UM353 1B Factory Configured Options 4 9 122 Cascade Control w Operator Setpoint Limits Factory Configured Option FCO122 provides two loops configured for Cascade control The block diagram of the configuration of the two loops is shown below along with the changes made to the default parameter values of the configured blocks The process range of the Primary loop can be changed in Analog Input 1 and the range of the Secondary loop in Analog Input 2 Also the output range of the primary PID controller must be changed to match any new range in the secondary loop If the loop tag PRIM or SEC is changed all configured references will automatically be changed to the new tag ot SETPT SPLIM lt Primary Process 4 Pa o A AINt 2 AW TC A M NA ed gt ALARM PP lt ORO lt gt PB2SW por 1 A st Ot A SPLIM s TV E SE LS 2 m EE OR02 LD 1 Secondary Process PB AN2 pt 2 Ac 2 1 EM Valve 7 gt ALARM Rev 2 SEC Secondary Primary Loop SETPT Setpoint Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer INPUT TV Input TV PRIM AIN1 OR PRIM AIN1 01 INPUT TC Input TC PRIM A M NA INPUT LU Input LU PRIM SPLIM
91. 5 15 30 60 1 1 imi 1 1 DL OUT Proc 1 Alarm DeLay OUT 5 0 4 1 2 5 15 30 60 LO compares the process input with the limit setting and trips the ecco piedi ease 0 1 1 imi 2 DL OUT Proc2 Alarm A DeLay OUT 0 4 1 2 5 15 30 60 alarm status high 1 when the process is equal to or less than the limit 5 cerca setting The alarm status will clear 0 when the process is greater than Proc s Alarm A DeLay OUT 3 0 4 1 2 5 15 30 80 DL OUT Proc3 Alarm B DeLay OUT s 0 4 1 2 5 15 30 60 0 the limit setting plus the deadband 4 DL OUT Proc4 Alarm A DeLay OUT s 0 4 1 2 5 15 30 60 0 4B DL OUT Proc4 Alarm B DeLay OUT s 0 4 1 2 5 15 30 60 Process 1 Alarm A RinG BaCK 5 NO YES o 1B Process 1 Alarm RING BaCK 9 NO YES No OR compares the process input with the range limits referenced by the 2 RGB Process 2 Alarm RinG BaCK 5 NO YES i 2 2 Process 2 Alarm B RING BaCK 5 NO YES range pointer parameter It will trip the alarm status high 1 when the CK process 3 Alarm RING BACK NO YES 4 3B process 3 Alarm RING BaCK s NO YES process is equal to or greater than the high limit or equal to or less EE roten RNG BACK NOVES an Process 4 Alarm B RinG BaCK 5 NO YES than the low lim
92. 7 18 Modbus Communications 353 to APACSTM or Personal Computer eese 7 19 7 19 Model 353 to Siemens SIREC D Recorder Analog Input Wiring eese 7 20 7 20 Controller Power een tele iter bri ee ed ee bere ttes et ai 7 20 7 21 Suggested Power Wirng ioter ge teet e Tee e en Rates 7 21 7 22 Daisy Chaimed Power Winne iio eerta eed iH ev vende dets 7 21 Sel Chart T Autotun e utet Rer RI E TORRE EAE E BER 8 5 April 2012 y Contents UM353 1B 9 22 Ch rt 2 AULCOLUTIes zeit o eerta rater tekst kratere ene EE 8 6 10 1 Siemens 353 Exploded View Design Level 2202 16 0000000000000000 nennen nennen rennen enne 10 3 10 2 MPU Controller tee t SIR eed de re ER I UTE eo NEP 10 5 10 3 MultiMediaCard MMC Inserting and Ejecting 10 5 10 4 Display Assembly Repair oho bete itr tei De Hee ete teri eet 10 11 10 5 Expander Bo rd ubere hime e hee IE Ge ER eiie eee t se 10 13 106 Ethernet Cable 10 14 12 1 Siemens 353 Design Level B Block Diagram 12 1 LIST OF TABLES TABLE AND TITLE PAGE 3 1 Security Level vs Accessible Operations ener nennen trennen 3 3 3 2 Modbus Port Baud Rate Parameters 3 5 3 3 Board Description and ID with Example Hardware and Software Rev
93. Ack d W1 Status 1 Not Ack d W2 Status 1 Not Ack d W3 Status 1 Not Ack d 1 Status 1 Not Ack d E2 Status 1 Not Ack d E3 Status 1 Transfer Autotune Parameters PB1SW Input MD PB2SW Input MD Range 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 Coil MB 00296 48 1 00297 48 1 00298 48 1 00299 48 t 1 00300 48 1 00301 48 1 00302 48 1 00303 48 1 00304 48 t 1 00305 48 1 00306 48 1 00307 48 1 00308 48 1 00309 48 1 00310 48 1 00311 48 1 00312 48 1 00313 48 1 00314 48 1 00315 48 1 00316 48 1 00317 48 1 0318 48 1 00319 48 1 00320 48 1 00321 48 1 00322 48 1 00323 48 1 00324 48 1 00325 48 1 00326 48 1 00327 48 1 00328 48 1 00329 48 1 00330 48 1 00331 48 1 00332 48 1 00333 48 1 00334 48 1 00335 48 1 00336 48 1 00337 48 1 00338 48 1 00339 48 1 00340 48 1 00341 48 1 00342 48 1 00343 48 1 These bits indicate the status of the switch input MD A write of a 1 will have the same effect as pressing and releasing the button on the faceplate If the action of the switch is sustained the switch will change position If the action is momentary the switch will close fo
94. As shipped REAL TIME CLOCK the clock is set to Greenwich Mean Time When the Step Down Button is pressed to view the parameter CLOCK value the current TIME or DATE at that instant is displayed The value can be changed using the pulser 11 00 00 and the lt and gt arrow buttons to enter new value 12251999 new value will initialize the clock when the STORE button is pressed To accommodate scheduled local time changes such as Daylight Savings Time which varies from country to country the clock is either manually changed as described above or synchronized to master SET T SET TIME 00 00 00 to 23 59 59 0 as described below S E T DIA T E SET DATE 01011970 to 12313099 0 00 source ADDress 0 The time and date cannot be changed locally if the SRCE ADD parameter has been configured to a value other than 0 to have the time synchronized with a master station on the Ethernet network Using the IP MASK of 255 255 255 0 the first three octets of the IP address e g 192 168 1 xxx must be the same for all controllers The SRCE ADD parameter is used to set the last octet of the master controller on the network When the SRCE ADD parameter has been configured to synchronize the time with a master controller on the Ethernet network the controller will query the master controller at 12 midnight and sync
95. Char 6 ASCII Char 6 ASCII Char 6 ASCII Char 6 ASCII Char 6 ASCII Char Register MB 45451 100 1 45457 100 1 45460 100 1 45463 100 1 45466 100 1 45469 100 1 45472 100 1 45475 100 1 45478 100 1 45481 100 1 45485 100 1 45488 100 1 45492 100 1 45495 100 1 45499 100 1 45502 100 1 45506 100 1 45509 45550 100 1 Register 45451 100 1 45457 100 1 45460 100 1 45463 100 1 45466 100 1 45469 100 1 45472 100 1 45475 100 1 45478 100 1 45481 100 1 45484 100 1 45487 100 1 45490 100 1 45493 100 1 45496 100 1 45499 100 1 45502 100 1 45505 45550 100 1 Register 45451 100 1 45457 100 1 45460 100 1 45463 100 1 45466 100 1 45469 100 1 45472 100 1 45475 100 1 45478 100 1 45481 100 1 45484 100 1 45487 100 1 45490 100 1 45493 100 1 45496 100 1 Code R W Description L TAG R Loop Tag L G1Tag R Group 1 Tag R Group 1 PB1 Tag L G1P2T R Group 1 PB2 Tag L G1SAT R Group 1 Switch Position A Tag L G1SMT R Group 1 Switch Position Tag L G1F1T R Group 1 Feedback 1 Tag L G1F0T R Group 1 Feedback 0 Tag L G2Tag R Group 2 Tag L G2P1T R Group 2 PB1 Tag L G2P2T R Group 2 PB2 Tag L G2SAT R Group 2 Switch Position A Tag L G2SMT R Group 2 Switch Position M Tag L G2F1T R Group 2 Feedback 1 Tag L G2F0T R Group 2 Feedback 0 Tag 6 14 April 2012
96. Coil Loop Data 1 bit Controller ODC Code R W LHA R W LHL R W LHSS R LHE R W L CN R W L CM R W L RS R W L OR R L EM R L CH R L HL R L LL R L OS R W LHUIS R L U2S L AT R W L A1 R L N1 R W R W LHA2 R L N2 R W L E2 R W L A3 R LHN3 R W LHE3 R W LHA4 R L N4 R W L E4 R W LHOS2 R W L CC R R W LHAE R LHNSS R W L NOR R W L NHL L NLL L NU1 R W L NU2 R W L NW1 L NW2 R W L NW3 L NE1 2 L NE3 L XAT W L PB1C 2 R W Description 1 0 Manual 1 Local 1 AM block in STANDBY 1 External Set 1 Console 1 Computer 1 Ramping Setpoint 1 Override 1 Emergency Manual 1 Configuration Hold 1 HI Setpoint Limit 1 LO Setpoint Limit 1 Alarms Out of Service 1 Ul Status Active 1 U2 Status Active 1 Autotune 1 Alarm 1 is Active 1 Alarm 1 is Not Acknowledged 1 Alarm 1 is Enabled 1 Alarm 2 is Active 1 Alarm 2 is Not Acknowledged 1 Alarm 2 is Enabled 1 Alarm 3 is Active 1 Alarm 3 is Not Acknowledged 1 Alarm 3 is Enabled 1 Alarm 4 is Active 1 Alarm 4 is Not Acknowledged 1 Alarm 4 is Enabled 1 Alarms Out of Service 1 Configuration has Changed 1 Unacknowledged Loop Event 1 Active Loop Event 1 Not Ack d STANDBY 1 Not Ack d Override 1 Not Ack d Emergency Man 1 Not Ack d HI Setpoint Limit 1 Not Ack d LO Setpoint Limit 1 Not Ack d U1 Status 1 Not Ack d U2 Status 1 Not
97. Connection Option Board Needed Modbus Standard Rear Terminals NCA and NCB None Modbus TCP Ethernet Standard Rear Panel RJ 45 case option 4 None Ethernet supports uploading and downloading of controller configurations over the Ethernet LAN For example if ilconfig Graphical Configuration Utility is loaded on the local client shown in Figure 1 2 controller configurations can be developed on the client or uploaded from the controller for editing and then downloaded to the controller Data can also be acquired from remote servers for the purpose of archiving and or data mining The Ethernet Modbus Bridge in Figure 1 2 accepts an Ethernet data command from the controller and outputs an equivalent Modbus command to a Modbus device at address 1 The returning Modbus data is embedded by the bridge in an Ethernet packet to be sent to the requesting controller Regardless of the selected communication option the RS232 port on the underside of the Display Assembly will communicate using Modbus For small retrofit applications the Siemens 353 with operator faceplate is a replacement for a simple stand alone single loop controller It is easily upgraded with additional local I O for advanced control strategies Ethernet can extend the I O capability of the controller ever further in data acquisition applications Ethernet network with switches hubs routers and gateways as needed for network connections MG00501a Multipl
98. E_ 1 when Loop alarm__ is enabled when the alarm is disabled the E N and A bits are set to 0 L OS 1 indicates that all Loop alarms are identified as Out of Service which means that all alarms function normally but the OS flag indicates to a higher level device that they can be ignored OS cannot be set locally 3 2 11 AND AND Logic AND_ function blocks perform a logical AND on the three inputs Any unused input will be set high 1 AND AND ESN 000 Input A Input B B AND Output 1 P3 Input C ID 0 0 0 0 INPUT INPUT loop tag block tag output null 9 INPUT INPUT B loop tag block tag output null INPUT INPUT C loop tag block tag output 1 5 Exec Seq No 001 to 250 BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 2 12 AOE Analog Output Ethernet AOE_ function blocks are available and assigned in ANALOG OUTPUT ETHERNET sequence with each use station wide Up to 32 AOE _ blocks are available Range ED ANALOG OUTPUT The range pointer parameter Input R enables the block mus ED STERNEN to pass the range scaling to AIE function blocks in other uM Siemens 353 controllers connected over the Ethernet network Ethernet Network RanGe PoinTeR 5 loop tag block tag null PUT 5 INPUTS loop tag block tag output null
99. FFFF 0000 FFFF 0000 FFFF 0000 FFFF 0000 FFFF 0000 FFFF 0000 FFFF 0000 FFFF 0000 FFFF 0000 FFFF 0000 FFFF 40451 30 1 40452 30 1 40453 30 1 40454 30 1 40455 30 1 40456 30 1 40457 30 1 40458 30 1 40476 30 1 40477 30 1 40478 30 1 40479 30 1 40480 30 1 April 2012 UM353 1B Data Mapping Analog Indicator ODA V2 2 Code R W Description Range Register MB LHPIALI R W Process I Alarm A Limit 3 3 to 103 3 0 0FFF 40451 30 1 L PIBLI Process I Alarm B Limit 3 3 to 103 3 0 0FFF 40452 30 1 LHP2ALI Process 2 Alarm A Limit 3 3 to 103 3 0 0FFF 40453 30 1 L P2BLI Process 2 Alarm Limit 3 3 to 103 3 0 0FFF 40454 30 1 LHP3ALI Process 3 Alarm A Limit 3 3 to 103 3 0 0FFF 40455 30 1 L P3BLI Process 3 Alarm B Limit 3 3 to 103 3 0 S0FFF 40456 30 1 LHP4ALI Process 4 Alarm Limit 3 3 to 103 3 0 0FFF 40457 30 1 L P4BLI Process 4 Alarm Limit 3 3 to 103 3 0 0FFF 40458 30 1 R W Process 1 Alarm A 0 3 0000 0003 40459 30 1 L PIBTI R W Process I Alarm Type 0 3 0000 0003 40460 30 1 L P2ATI R W Process 2 Alarm A Type 0 3 0000 0003 4
100. INITial VALue Track Variable es HOLD value Output 1 p 01 0313450 BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 2 90 TOT Totalizer TOT function blocks accept a Boolean input and they will retain a running total of the input transitions as the block output as a real value for interconnection to other blocks in the controller The running total can be reset when input R goes high 1 Input R is executed prior to reading input S on each scan cycle Unconfigured inputs will be set to 0 When the EDGETRIG parameter is set to 1 the total will increment on each 0 to I transition on input S When the EDGETRIG parameter is set to 0 the total will increment on each to 0 transition The total will be retained during a WARM amp HOT start and will be initialized to 0 0 on a COLD start Totalizer Total gt 4 BLOCK DIAGRAM TRACK amp HOLD TH ESN 000 i Track Variable TRACK amp HOLD Track Command fe Output 1 L INITial VALUE 5 Real 0 0 INPUT TV loop tag block tag output INPUT TC H loop tag block tag output null Exec Seq No H 001 to 250 zzz U aca nahe lt ESN 000 Input 5 E Input R Output 1 INPUT S loop tag block
101. INPUT 1 loop tag block tag output 1 T AIG INPUT AG loop tag block tag output null cycle This can be used to prevent bumping the output Exec Seq No 001 to 250 when changes are made to the setpoint using a switch block cssc erc So EY ege va spo wo ih es s nc ien sn censi voies PID Adaptive Gain Controller Process Engineering 1 input units scalin tps Y D I ENG UNITS s 1 P 2 4 IT I Tem Z 2 1 0 gt PG X gt gt gt lt lt 1 Saing gt l Engineering A 1 1 p ut units 7 u pu 5 ger Lag Setpoint R 1 tsa is m 1 inverse scaling Adaptive Gain Feedback lt Y Absolute Value Initialize lt Absolute Error I EE EE ree ene Cree ee eae eae CC RC RERE EE 1 BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 74 April 2012 UM353 1B Function Blocks POWER UP During warm or cold power up the output will be initialized to MINSCALE and all dynamic elements will be initialized at the current input on the first scan Input AG is multiplied by the gain error GE An unconnected AG input will be set to 1 0 The controller output has MINSCALE and MAXSCALE param
102. INSTALLATION 1 Hold the Display Assembly close to the open case and mate the display cable with the connector on the Display Assembly circuit board Check that the locking levers on the connector fully engaged the cable mounted connector The cable is keyed 2 Align the Display Assembly with the case To ensure water tightness use a torque screwdriver set to 6 inch pounds to tighten the two faceplate screws Alternatively use a screwdriver to tighten the screws until a slight resistance is felt then tighten an additional turn DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN 3 Remove the wrist strap NOTE When changing a Display Assembly with the controller powered up and an error code present the displays will light in a random pattern except for the alphanumeric display which will show the error code Clear the error to clear the displays 10 10 April 2012 UM353 1B Maintenance 10 5 2 2 To Replace the Bezel or Circuit Board REMOVAL 1 Place properly grounded wrist strap on your wrist and remove the Display Assembly as described above 4 33 2 Refer to Figure 10 4 Notice that the circuit board is captured by a Fixed Retainer at the top of the bezel and a Flexible Retainer at the bottom Grasp the body of the connector at 1 and at the same time press the Flexible Retainer downward slightly Pull gently on the connector to lift the bottom edge of the board above the Flexible Retainer Note The board is a snug fit Do not squeeze the bezel sid
103. INT BYTE 9 1 2 3 4 4 UD T Update RATE P2P Gt P2P MINSCALE and MAXSCALE parameters Both MLN minimum INTeger i Unsigned Integer Uint and Signed Integer Sint MAX Maximum INTeger 5 see table 2 options are available See Table 3 5 on the next page RANGE 0 Man Aut MINSCAL E MiNimum SCALE 5 Real 0 0 DR 5 AL MAXimum SCALE 9 Real 100 0 When DATA is selected range limits are D P P Decima Pt Position preferred S 0 0 0 0 0 0 000 automatically entered see Table 3 5 This ensures EN GUN I T 5 ENGineering UNITS 65 6 ASCII Char PRCT that the user entered integer values fall within the correct range MIN INT and MAX INT values must be entered whenever a DATA TYP is changed Output OR contains the range scaling for the floating point block output O1 The OR output is a special data type that includes the MINSCALE MAXSCALE DPP and the ENGUNITS and can be connected to other blocks having a Range RG PTR input Range scaling information can be automatically obtained from the source of the data over Ethernet if the device has the scaling information packaged with the data This is a feature provided by AOE function blocks from other Siemens 353 controllers AIE blocks are c
104. Input MD 1 0 08701 16 1 L PB2 R W PB2SW Input MD 1 0 08702 16 1 spares 08703 08716 16 1 L DnS writing a 1 toggles the switch Reading 1 indicates Auto Status reading 0 indicate Man status L PB1 amp L PB2 writing a 1 to the controller will have the same affect as pushing the button on the faceplate of the controller If the action of the switch is sustained the switch will change position If the action is momentary the switch will close for one scan cycle Reading the bits indicates the status of the switch MD input April 2012 6 19 Data Mapping UM353 1B Pushbutton Switch Indicator ODP Code LHG1P1 L G1P2 L G1S3 LZGIFS L G2P1 L G2P2 L G2S3 L G2FS L G3P1 LH G3P2 LHG3S3 LHG3FS L G4P1 L G4P2 L G4S3 L G4FS L GS5P1 L G5P2 L G5S3 L GSFS L G6P1 L G6P2 L G6S3 L GO6FS L G7P1 L G7P2 L G7S3 L G7FS L G8P1 L G8P2 L G8S3 L G8FS 2 Description Group 1 Press 1 Group 1 Press PB2 Group 1 Auto Man Switch Group 1 Feedback Status Group 2 Press 1 Group 2 Press PB2 Group 2 Auto Man Switch Group 2 Feedback Status Group 3 Press PB1 Group 3 Press PB2 Group 3 Auto Man Switch Group 3 Feedback Status Group 4 Press PB1 Group 4 Press PB2 Group 4 Auto Man Switch Group 4 Feedback Status Group 5 Press PB1 Group 5 Press PB2 Group 5 Auto Man Swit
105. LEDs DILO DeLay OUT 0 4 1 2 5 15 30 80 Sec 0 and condition to flash but stops when the alarm clears DIL O A4 DeLay OUT s 0 4 1 2 5 15 30 60 Sec 0 ae k RIGIB Alarm 1 RinGBaCK 5 NO YES NO Priority 5 displays the alarm but does not require that it be RGB Alarm 2 RINGBACK 5 NO YES NO R G B Alarm 3 RinGBaCK s acknowledged RGB Alarm 4 RinGBaCK s INPUT P is INPUT D loop tag block tag output Alarm limits are in engineering units A quickset ALARM cV Ere Sea ath ee feature is also available allowing alarm limits to be set quickly during operation The settings are in engineering units but will also be displayed in of range on the bargraph Alarms are displayed as defined by the range pointer parameter Alarms can be set to any engineering value within 10 to 110 of the range defined by the pointer If a range is changed the current alarm settings will be changed to be the same within the new range For example if a HI alarm is currently set at 100 0 with a range of 0 0 to 100 0 and the range is changed to 300 0 to 400 0 the HI alarm will be moved to 400 0 Each alarm can be enabled or disabled when in the quickset ALARM mode The configuration allows an alarm to be enabled or disabled on a cold start When an alarm is disabled it will not operate but will retain settings for return to the enabled mode Operator faceplate functions
106. MDLOAG lt MD R kkkkk kkkkk MD Input MA NC gt 1 gt 5 PB Switch gt Output Momentary Action Sustained Action 0312750 Basic Operator Display MD Message Display UOD Universal Operator Display BLOCK DIAGRAM POWER UP When the switch is configured for momentary action it will always power up in the NC position For sustained action with the POWER UP parameter set to YES the switch will power up in the last position during hot or warm start and during cold start will power up in the NC position When the POWER UP parameter is set to NO the switch will power up in the last position during hot start During warm or cold start it will power up in the NC position 3 66 April 2012 UM353 1B Function Blocks 3 2 65 PB3SW PB3 Switch PB3SW is one of three general purpose switches available in each loop It can be utilized for switching Boolean signals in such applications as Start Stop controlling the position of a TSW Transfer Switch function block for switching analog signals or other operator initiated actions PB3SW can only be operated from the front panel when the A M function block has not been configured PB3SW can be configured for momentary or sustained operation As momentary the switch will transfer to the NO position when the button is pressed and it will return when released In the sustained mode the switch will alternate positions each time t
107. POINTS ET C 185 C to 1000 300 F to 1830 F RIC ORR arcanme PRC Type Tienes WE OTF WTO OCR IOC DRTD DIN 43760 751 RTD 185 C to 622 C 300 F to 1152 F 1000 0 C amp der er 10 URTD US NBS 126 RTD 185 C to 613 C 300 F to 1135 F 1000 0 amp PET ioner NI REN 11 JRTD JIS C 1604 RTD 185 C to 610 C 300 F to 1130 F 1000 0 C amp 14 14 NMY Narrow Millivolt 19 0 to 19 0 mV 0 mV amp 15 mV Wide Millivolt 30 0 mV to 77 mV 0 mV amp 75 mV Not available in Model 352P us Table 3 9 SEN MIN MAX and MIN MAX SCALE Parameters AINU Block SEN TYPE 1 SEN MIN SEN MAX MIN SCALE MAX SCALE 1 12 14 15 min operating max operating min range scale max range scale value value value value 0 96 100 6 0 0 PRCT 2 100 0 PRCT 2 Note 1 When changing SEN TYPE type number should blink after pressing STORE Use STEP UP and then STEP DOWN to verify that sensor type has changed 2 Range scaling of the AINU output when the Slidewire sensor type is selected be accomplished using a SCL_ Scaler function block connected to the output O1 of the AINU function block 3 18 April 2012 UM353 1B Function Blocks 3 2 10 ALARM Alarm ALARM function blocks can be used on one per loop basis and contain four 4 alarms associated with Input P normally the process input to the controller function b
108. Press the TAG key to select the next digit the tens digit Rotate the pulser knob to select a number for that digit 3 Move to and select the needed number for each remaining digit 4 Press ENTER If the combination entered is incorrect ACCESS DENIED will be displayed and the controller will return to the parameter level Otherwise go to step 14 12 Press the STEP UP button Rotate the Pulser Knob to select the CAL FULL parameter 13 Press the STEP DOWN button to enter the VALUE level CAL appears on upper display 14 Set the voltage source to the full scale input value 4 000 to 5 000 Vdc 15 Press STORE 16 For verification perform the following steps 1 Press STEP UP button Rotate Pulser Knob to select CAL VIEW parameter 2 Press STEP DOWN button to enter VALUE level Set precision voltage source to zero input voltage The display should read the real number at the block output 3 Set source to full scale voltage The display should read the real number at the block output 17 If all points have been calibrated and verified press EXIT button to leave the calibration mode and enter the operation mode If additional function blocks are to be calibrated and verified press the STEP UP button to enter the FUNCTION BLOCK level Perform steps 2 19 for each function block 11 2 April 2012 UM353 1B Calibration If security is enabled exiting the configuration mode will lock out the calibration mode
109. R Group 6 PB1 Tag 6 ASCII Char 41204 30 1 L G6P2T R Group 6 PB2 Tag 6 ASCII Char 41207 30 1 L G6SAT R Group 6 Switch Position A Tag 6 ASCII Char 41210 30 1 L G6SMT R Group 6 Switch Position M Tag 6 ASCII Char 41213 30 1 L G6F1T R Group 6 Feedback 1 Tag 6 ASCII Char 41216 30 1 LHG6FOT R Group 6 Feedback 0 Tag 6 ASCII Char 41219 30 1 spares 41222 41230 Note These Modbus groupings normally used for Static Loop Integer Data with displays other than ODP L G7Tag R Group 7 Tag 6 ASCII Char 42451 60 1 L G7P1T R Group 7 PB1 Tag 6 ASCII Char 42454 60 1 L G7P2T R Group 7 PB2 Tag 6 ASCII Char 42457 60 1 L G7SAT R Group 7 Switch Position A Tag 6 ASCII Char 42460 60 1 L G7SMT R Group 7 Switch Position M Tag 6 ASCII Char 42463 60 1 L G7F1T R Group 7 Feedback 1 Tag 6 ASCII Char 42466 60 1 L G7FOT R Group 7 Feedback 0 Tag 6 ASCII Char 42469 60 1 L G8Tag R Group 8 Tag 6 ASCII Char 42472 60 1 L G8P1T R Group 8 PB1 Tag 6 ASCII Char 42475 60 1 L G8P2T R Group 8 PB2 Tag 6 ASCII Char 42478 60 1 L G8SAT R Group 8 Switch Position A Tag 6 ASCII Char 4248 1 60 1 L G8SMT R Group 8 Switch Position M Tag 6 ASCII Char 42484 60 1 L G8F1T R Group 8 Feedback 1 Tag 6 ASCII Char 42487 60 1 L G8FOT R Group 8 Feedback 0 Tag 6 ASCII Char 42490 60 1 spares 42493 42509 Note These Modbus groupings normally used for Variable Loop Floating Point Data with displays other than ODP April 2012 6 15 Data Mapping UM353 1B 6 3 8
110. Range Pointer PRIM PID OR INPUT A Input A SEC A M AS INPUT A Input A PRIM PID O1 INPUT I Input I SEC E LES INPUT TV Input TV SEC AIN2 01 ESN Exec Seq No 30 INPUT Input TC SEC ORO1 01 ESN Exec Seq No 60 A M Auto Manual Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer SEC PID OR ODC Operator Display for Controllers INPUT Input A SEC PID O1 P RG PTR P Range Pointer PRIM AIN1 OR ESN Exec Seq No 35 V RG PTR V Range Pointer PRIM PID OR INPUT P Input P Process PRIM AINI OI OR01 OR Function Block INPUT S Input S Setpoint PRIM SPLIM O1 INPUT Input SEC A M NA INPUT V Input V Valve PRIM A M O1 INPUT Input SEC E LIS LOOP tt Loop 01 ESN Exec Seq No 40 OR02 OR Function Block Secondary Loop INPUT A Input A SEC A M NA INPUT B Input B SEC E LES SETPT Setpoint Function Block ESN Exec Seq No 45 RG PTR Range Pointer SEC AIN2 OR INPUT TV Input TV SEC AIN2 O1 Analog Output 1 Function Block INPUT TC Input TC SEC OR02 01 RG PTR Range Pointer SEC PID OR INPUT LU Input LU SEC SPLIM HS INPUT S Input S SEC A M O1 INPUT LD Input LD
111. SETPT and INPUT V is configured as the output of function block A M 9 1 4 Auto Manual In FCO101 the A M block is configured to switch Valve control from the PID controller in AUTO to the Pulser Knob in Manual Press the A M button to toggle the display between the Loop01 S setpoint parameter and the Loop01 V valve parameter Turn the pulser knob while displaying the valve parameter in manual to change the value on the numeric display as well as the horizontal bargraph turn the pulser knob while displaying the setpoint parameter in Auto to change the numeric value and the vertical S bargraph 9 1 5 Modifying an FCO In addition to FCO101 Single Loop Control there are several other factory configured options available such as Ratio Set Control FCO105 and Cascade Control FCO121 To download another FCO follow the steps in Section 2 5 Changes to an FCO may be made either by adding and deleting function blocks or by changing the default parameter values A Configuration Road Map is shown in Figure 2 1 Note that an X represents pressing the STEP DOWN or STEP UP button and a lt gt represents turning the pulser knob For example to add a function block you would do the following steps 1 Press ENTER EXIT CONF Press STEP DOWN until VIEW is displayed Turn the pulser knob until ADD FB is displayed Press STEP DOWN for the function block menu hd 19 Turn the pulser knob to scroll through the available function blocks a
112. Total from the BATOT will also be displayed when configured within the BATOT block If a value is greater than allowed by the DPP parameter the decimal point will be shifted to allow the display to show the full number until it exceeds the maximum available digits at which time it will indicate over range When input U1 or U2 goes high 1 the 8 character user status U_STATUS will be displayed as configured by the status priority U_ PRIOR A priority of 0 will disable that status function setting the bits in the status word to 0 See Section 8 Local Faceplate Operation for a description of display actions using priorities to 5 The horizontal bargraph can be selected as direct or reverse acting This feature allows it to always indicate an OPEN valve when fully lit The labels on the basic faceplate are fixed but paste on labels can be used to change the indications The V NET AC parameter allows the Lx VI network parameter to be set for direct or reverse action This enables the valve bar on the HMI to operate similar to the valve bar on the faceplate The left and right bar labels should be set accordingly e g Left OPEN amp Right CLOSE An operator display must be configured to map controller loop data to network data Loop network data is mapped into registers or coils Mappings for Modbus are listed in the tables included in Section 5 Network Communications The LOOP parameter enables configuration of a loop inde
113. Type WW HI compares the process input with the limit EU NS setting and it will trip the alarm status high 1 Input P gt when the process is equal to or higher than the limit setting The alarm status will clear 0 l when the process is less than the limit setting Input P minus deadband LO LIMIT LO compares the process input with the limit setting and it will trip the alarm status high 1 when the process is equal to or less than the Input P N Nea limit setting The alarm status will clear 0 gt when the process is greater than the limit setting DEV Input D x dccem plus the deadband HI DEV compares the difference between the LO LIMIT i process input and the deviation input P D with gt the limit setting and it will trip the alarm status DEV Input D m PD high 1 when P D is equal to or greater than the limit setting The alarm status will clear 0 when P D is less than the limit setting minus Input P ma RED the deadband DEV nA 21 ABS gt Input D LO DEV compares the difference between the deviation input and the process input D P with the limit setting and it will trip the alarm status P MINSCALE gt high 1 when D P is equal to or greater than the limit setting The alarm status will clear 0
114. V X or Y will scroll across the screen To change the tag refer to the Configuration Road Map in Figure 2 1 or the following instructions Note that although 12 characters are available for the tag it is suggested that loop names be limited to 6 characters so that the complete tag name will be displayed during normal operation The additional 6 characters can be displayed by scrolling the tag The last two digits of the alphanumeric displayed during normal operation will be used to identify the variable currently being displayed P S V X or Y 1 Press ENTER EXIT CONF LOOP will be displayed Press STEP DOWN twice until VIEW appears on display Press the right arrow button or the turn pulser knob until EDIT TAG appears on the display Press STEP DOWN LOOPOI will appear on the display with the I digit flashing Use the pulser knob to change the value of the flashing character and press store to save the change Use the arrow buttons to move to another character Try changing the TAG to TC101 5 Press ENTER EXIT CONF to return to normal operation mode Ce tS 6 Press TAG to view tag names longer than 6 characters 9 1 8 QUICK When in normal operation mode the QUICK button can be used to step through the QUICK SET parameters of any function block which has this feature enabled In FCO101 the SETPT function block has the QUICK SET feature enabled as a default Press the QUICK button and note that you can scroll through the following Se
115. a loop or individual block An ESN should be changed when it is important that one loop be executed prior to another e g cascade primary executes prior to the cascade secondary e Function blocks can be added to or deleted from the loop Existing function blocks can be edited Use the step up and step down buttons to move between the function block parameter and value levels within the EDIT FB menu Once all configuration entries have been made and stored press EXIT to exit the configuration mode The configuration will be written to the root directory of the MultiMediaCard with a file name that is the serial number of the controller Each time the configuration is edited and the EXIT CONF button pressed the configuration is again written to the root directory of the card overwriting the stored file The current version of the configuration is always stored on the MMC If an archive copy of a particular configuration version is desired create a new file and save it with a new file name refer to Figure 2 2 Note 6 to create a new file name If no configuration entries are made for about three minutes the mode will time out and the controller will exit the configuration mode The STATN function block has a CONFG TO Configuration Timeout parameter to enable or disable timeout 2 6 OPERATION DURING LOCAL ON LINE CONFIGURATION Changing a controller s configuration parameters while the station is on line can affect its operation and
116. a misconfiguration of the device 3 40 April 2012 UM353 1B Function Blocks 3 2 36 DYT Delay Timer DYT function blocks perform either an or OFF output delay as determined by the TYPE configuration DELAY TIMER parameter DYT _ ESN 000 ON Delay When input P is low 0 output O1 is low P Elapsed Time If P goes high 1 the elapsed timer starts and sets O1 Pulse Input DELAY TIMER gt Remaining Time high upon reaching the DLY TIME provided P is still Output 1 high OFF Delay When input P is high 1 the output is high If P goes low 0 the elapsed timer starts and sets r VM E E 1 low upon reaching the DLY TIME provided is U Power Up LAST 5 ill I P INPUTP H loop tag block tag output still low Exec Seq No 001 to 250 The DLY TIME is adjustable over the full range of the display which is 0 00000 to 999999 If the delay time is set to less than the scan time of the station the delay time will equal the scan time Output ET elapsed time will ramp from 0 0 to the value of DLY TIME and remain there until P resets the output Output RT remaining time equals DLY TIME ET POWER UP During warm or a hot start with PU LAST set to YES the block will initialize with the input output states and elapsed time in effect at the instant power down o
117. action during that scan cycle This INPUT A 4 Jonp tag block tag output nul INPUT INPUT I H loop tag block tag output can be used to prevent bumping the output when changes E S N Exec Seq 001 to 250 are made to the setpoint through a switch block PD Controller Process Engineering INput units scaling tos V ponter 5 1 gt 2 DG ENG UNITS Lead NS p yt Limit 5 gt gt gt gt j gt 38 lt 0 lt 1033 gt scaling I Engineering A 1 01 5 e gt INput units Output scaling Lag Setpoint P R a 4 inverse scaling f LS au Feedback lt Absolute Value 25 Initialize lt Absolute Error I v BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 70 April 2012 UM353 1B Function Blocks The process range pointer parameter should point to another function block that contains range scaling such as an analog input that is the source of the process variable This enables the controller to normalize tuning parameters for the process range If this parameter is not configured the controller will use a range scaling of 0 00 100 00 During warm or cold power up the output will be initialized to MINSCALE and all dynamic elements will be initialized at the current input on the first scan The cont
118. amp Pry e hyisin inches H50 and Pr is in psia 0 lt h 27 707 Pg lt 0 2 The following parameters are configuration entries d orifice plate bore diameter in inches at a reference temperature of 68 F D meter tube internal diameter in inches at a reference temperature of 68 F Py base pressure psia Tp base temperature F The following are analog inputs to the AGA 3 function block hy orifice differential pressure in H20 Pr flowing pressure at upstream tap psia Tr flowing temperature F G real gas relative density specific gravity 3 10 April 2012 UM353 1B Function Blocks Z compressibility at standard conditions compressibility at flowing conditions at upstream tap compressibility at base conditions The specific gravity factor G and the compressibility factors Zs Zf Zp be entered manually using HLD Hold function blocks computed and then downloaded from host device or calculated in the controller using the AG8 AGA 8 Compressibility Factors of Natural Gas function block The following are analog outputs of the AGA 3 function block volume flow rate at base conditions 5 Standard Cubic Feet per Hour composite orifice flow factor SCFH V psia in H20 Pi i hv gt lt Gr Zt 5 b Q Application Diagram April 2012 3 11 Function Blocks U
119. and outputs of these types will be displayed in the VIEW mode when using the local faceplate with the decimal point located to allow greatest resolution between 0 00000 and 999999 or 0 0000 99999 Numbers outside this resolution will blink Analog outputs are typically output 01 for analog I O blocks and math functions Analog outputs may also be specific to a particular function block such as the Analog Output AO Step Number SN Step Time ST Remaining Time RT and Current Recipe CR outputs of the Program Sequencer Arrows with medium shading and black letters but with a white tip are special data structures for range scaling information and will not be displayed in the VIEW mode Range scaling information is used when there is a conversion of units within a function block for example the Alarm block scales the alarm limits into process engineering units when the range pointer is configured to the process analog input block If unconfigured the units default to 0 100 The output range OR typically used on analog input function blocks includes MIN and MAX SCALE the DPP Decimal Point Position and the ENGUNITS Engineering Units The output range is connected to the Range Pointer input R of functions blocks requiring scaling other than the default 0 100 For example an Analog input block could be scaled 0 5000 psig with output 01 connected to the AOUT input S and the AIN OR connected to the AOUT input R The Ana
120. bad quality Bad quality indicates any hardware failure of the input converter uem BIN 24 wv AD gt gt 01 7 DIN Typical External Circuit Quality Test gt as ee eee ae BLOCK DIAGRAM DIGITAL INPUT _ DIN CD 1 DIGITAL INPUT DIN Quality Status April 2012 3 35 Function Blocks UM353 1B 3 2 29 DINU Digital Inputs Universal DINU blocks have multi function capability DIGITAL INPUT UNIVERSAL e sensing a discrete input and providing a high 1 or low 0 output representing the state of the input e totalizing and scaling the count of input pulses Reset ED pe Range Direction DIGITAL input Count Total e converting the rate of input pulses to a scaled analog Track Variable Typ UNIVERSAL scaled Freq frequency output Track Command Input State DINU Quality Status Two DINU blocks are available on the I O expander board The fixed names IDs of these blocks and their terminal designations are listed in Section 7 4 Electrical Installation Z D O Zero Drop Out Engineering Units Real 0 Output CT represents the scaled actual count x K total of F R E Q 1 FREQuency MINimum Hz 4 Real 0 F RIEIQ FREQuency MAXimum Hz Real 1000 input pulses that occurr
121. bezel Use screwdriver to complete screw installation Install the flip down door see Figure 10 4 4 Turn the bezel over April 2012 10 11 UM353 1 5 Install the circuit board in the bezel by slightly inserting the top edge of board under the Fixed Retainer The top edge is nearest the Numeric and Alphanumeric Displays 6 Continue to ease the board under the Fixed Retainer while lowering the bottom edge of the board into the bezel Be sure that the keypad connector mates with the connector on the keypad The board is fully inserted when it snaps under the Flexible Retainer 7 Install the Display Assembly on the case as described above 10 5 3 MPU Controller Board This board has a lithium battery refer to Section 10 2 4 Board Handling Precautions When replacing an MPU Controller board configuration parameters must either be re entered manually read from a MultiMediaCard or downloaded from the PC running ilconfig Refer to Sections 2 and 3 and to Section 11 Calibration as needed Factory repaired controllers must also be configured To replace the MPU Controller board or the station fuse use the following procedure REMOVAL 1 Remove input power from Controller 2 Remove Display Assembly as described in previous section 3 If installed remove the MultiMediaCard See Figures 10 2 and 10 3 4 Disconnect the Ethernet cable from J7 on the MPU Controller board by pressing the locking tab t
122. communication each station has unique network address 1 32 configured as part of the station parameters When using Modbus TCP protocol each station has unique IP address Ethernet enables all 353 controllers on the Ethernet network to be masters thus providing peer to peer network relationships between controllers Data is assigned to either a register 16 bit word or a coil 1 bit An IEEE floating point number Real is assigned to 2 consecutive registers with the first containing the most significant and the second the least significant portion of the floating point number The 353 uses an IEEE reverse format See Table 3 4 in Section 3 2 7 AIE Analog Input Ethernet for more information on floating point formats The station supports Modbus function codes 01 02 03 04 05 06 08 and 16 Section 6 Data Mapping provides listing of available data and specific locations within the Modbus map The following is the overview for the complete 353 series controllers Modbus data mapping Station Cossa rekene 0001 x007 I Eoop Coils a ire ete edere eret x0296 x1495 Extended Loop Coils ODD Pushbuttons eese x8701 x9100 Sequencer Loop I O Coils ref MSLCP pointer x1496 x2263 LonWorks Remote I O Coils 352P 353 A amp 354 354N x2401 x3976 Ubus Discrete I O States amp Forcing 3536 x4001 x5
123. configurable items e g will shift the decimal point right e STORE will store the configuration parameter to memory All configuration changes except for QUICK BIAS RATIO and quickset hold require a store before the change is applied to the configuration However the QUICK functions will also require a store for the value to be placed in permanent memory otherwise it will only remain in battery RAM Values in battery RAM will be used on a hot or warm start A cold start will use the value in permanent memory ALARM TUNE and QUICK are QUICKSET functions April 2012 8 3 Operation UM353 1B 8 3 AUTOTUNE PROCEDURE If the AUTOTUNE parameter in the controller function block is set to YES the autotune procedure can be initiated using the TUNE pushbutton located behind the flip down door The Autotuner will substitute an ON OFF controller for the PD or PID function By making step changes to the valve position the controller will control the process at the current setpoint while it learns about the process dynamics The controller then uses this knowledge to derive recommended P I and D settings Press the TUNE button to step through the following parameters and if desired initiate autotune Proportional Gain setting view or change TIC Ie Integral Time setting PID PIDAG controllers only view or change MR Manual Reset setting PD controller only view or change TD ek Derivative Tim
124. configured When connecting to other Siemens 353 controllers the Modbus address is set to 1 In some cases other Modbus devices may use a different address or when going through a Modbus TCP gateway a Modbus network may have multiple devices each having a unique address COIL INPUTS 16 CHAN ETHERNET CIE Output E COIL INPUTS 16 Output CF i o Output 05 LP AD RIE S IP ADdRESSs nnn nnn nnn nnn 192 168 0 0 AID RIE MB ADGRESs 1 255 1 DATA TYPe H Coil InPut Coi UID UpDate RATE H P2P Ct 2 5 C L STARTing CoiL 1 65535 1 OF CoiLs 1 16 1 The START CL parameter identifies the location of the first Coil Subsequent Coils up to 16 be obtained by setting the NO OF CL parameter to value greater than 1 The DATA parameter enables reading of Coils Modbus Function Code 01 or Inputs Modbus Function Code 02 Both are treated the same but the Coil type is the most common usage The UD RATE parameter configures the rate at which the block will request data The P2P setting will update the data at the rate set by the P2P RATE parameter in the ETHERNET block The Ct setting will update the data at the cycle time of the controller Output QS
125. controllers 7 20 April 2012 UM353 1B Installation Circuit Breaker Model 353 or Fuse FA Black H G External Power Whi 120 240 Vac te IN or 24 Green Earth Ground Terminal on rear of case Green ground screw at top center Case Rear of rear terminal area Terminals Hot or E N Neutral or 8 Ground Figure 7 21 Suggested Power Wiring Where separate wiring is not required power input wiring can daisy chain together a series of controllers Here each controller except for the last controller on the daisy chain will have two wires 18 AWG recommended inserted in terminal H and in terminal N If a larger gauge is to be used the two wires can be inserted in a crimp on connector and the connector inserted in the terminal for a more secure installation Daisy chained wiring is shown in Figure 7 22 Perform the following steps at H N and G terminals at each involved controller Circuit Breaker or Fuse 7 h r Eo i p Black H G G G G External Power g 1 120 240 NO ANSI AN or 24 Green Earth Ground ini Buc Terminal on rear of case G Green ground screw at top j Mead 353 Case Rear Moda 353 center
126. dins Real 0 0 NO YES YES 001 to 250 of ON TIME and remain there until P goes low 0 Output RT remaining time equals ON TIME ET POWER UP During a warm start when PU LAST is set to YES the block will initialize at the input output states and elapsed time in effect at the instant power down occurred A cold start will initialize the input output states and elapsed time to 0 RETRIG YES BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 64 April 2012 UM353 1B Function Blocks 3 2 63 PB1SW PB1 Switch PB1SW is one of three general purpose switches available in each loop It can be utilized for switching Boolean signals in such applications as toggling Console Local operation of the ODC or ODS function blocks Start Stop controlling the position of a TSW Transfer Switch function block for switching analog signals or other operator initiated actions PBISW can be configured for momentary or sustained operation As momentary the switch will transfer to the NO position when the button is pressed and will return when released Momentary action is used in toggle applications such as changing the function of the ODC or ODS function blocks In the sustained mode the switch will alternate positions each time the button is pressed An unconfigured NC input defaults to 0 and an unconfigured NO input to 1 The button can be remotely activated through a command over Modbus or Modb
127. due to process noise Ringback causes a previously acknowledged alarm to require acknowledgment priorities 1 4 when the alarm clears D 5 1 lt loop tag gt 1 gt 2 4 2 3 4 5 lt process 1 digital value gt 12 435 process 1 tag name gt Process 1536 100 00 i e degF 1 T 80 00 0 00 G T P1 ub Process t P Input unis sealing RN UNITS P2 1A 1 gt D Process 1 Alarms 1 2 gt Process 2 Alarms 2B Process 3 Alarms 3B 4A gt Process 4 Alarms 4B gt LE Station amp Loop Error Handling gt ilware Faceplate Display BLOCK DIAGRAM April 2012 3 53 Function Blocks UM353 1B 3 2 55 Operator Display for Controllers ODC blocks are one of five operator displays that are used OPERATOR DISPLAY for CONTROLLERS on one per loop basis to configure the local operator diy display functions and network parameters from a remote process Range ER e operator workstation associated with the loop See the ilware Process P 4 NN PC faceplate on the next page Setpoint NIMM
128. e g NEMA 12 or 4X housing 353s Air Outlet must not contain other equipment that generates Instrument significant heat and must contain a fan to force air to flow around equipment and throughout the cabinet preventing hot spots from developing Forced air conditioning may be required in high density panels or N consoles Periodically change or clean air filters CONTAMINANTS The controller case is slotted to permit circulation of clean cooling air Liquids and corrosive gases must not be allowed to enter the case Whether the controller is in control room or field mounted it must be protected from rain air conditioning condensate and plant and process related fluids and gases Extended exposure to contaminants can result in malfunctions 0310250 Enclosed Panel Industrial environments often contain airborne Air Inlet particulate contaminants Particulate matter usually dust and dirt is abrasive and can cause intermittent connections layer of dust on circuit boards can interfere with component heat dissipation Eg absorb other airborne contaminants Extended gt I exposure to these contaminants may result in malfunctions No of Fans One for each 16 stations or 3 ft of panel width Although 353 boards have a protective coating the Air Inlet 30 for each fan filters are used they must following steps can reduce contaminant related b
129. event LEDs and condition will flash Flashing will stop if ACK or if event clears 3 Event LEDs and condition will flash ACK button must be used to stop flashing 4 Event LEDs and condition will flash Flashing will stop if ACK or event clears 5 Event LEDs and condition will turn on when event is active and off when the event clears 0 No local display action occurs when event is active 3 8 April 2012 UM353 1B Function Blocks 3 2 2 ACS ARCCOSINE ACS function blocks accept an input between 1 0 and 1 0 Each provides an output signal in radians of which the input is the cosine ARCCOSINE Output 1 lt gt X Input X ACOS X Output 1 01 loop tag block tag output E S N Exec Seq 00010250 000 BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 2 3 ADD Addition ADD function blocks perform arithmetic addition on three input signals Any unused input will be set to 0 0 ADDITION and will have no affect on the output D s ADD ESN 000 All inputs should have the same engineering units If Input A AD units are not consistent an SCL Scaler function block B ADDITION gt outputs can be used or an alternative is to
130. filter to a value around 10 follow the Configuration Road Map in Figure 2 1 or do the following steps 1 Press CONF Press STEP DOWN twice to display VIEW Use the right arrow button or the pulser knob to display EDIT FB Press STEP DOWN for Function Block menu Use the right arrow button or the pulser knob to display AIN1 Press STEP DOWN for parameter menu Use the right arrow button or the pulser knob to display DIG FILT and Press STEP DOWN Rotate the pulser knob to set the digital filter to 10 and press STORE Press ENTER EXIT CONF to return to normal operation SOP 190 0 29 009 Before initiating AUTOTUNE bring the process to steady state This be done by placing the instrument manual mode and bringing the valve to approximately mid scale using the pulser knob Display the process and wait minute or two for the process to stabilize To activate the AUTOTUNE feature 1 Press the TUNE Quick Button to display AUTOTUNE 2 Set this parameter to YES press STORE and then press EXIT The controller is now set to AUTO and AUTOTUNE will flash until the AUTOTUNE is finished Tuning warnings may occur refer to Section 8 3 Autotune Procedure Since this is only simulation press to clear any warnings 3 Press the TUNE button to display the default controller parameters and the resulting AUTOTUNE ATUNE parameters After viewing the parameters STORE AT will be displayed Pr
131. group If Step Number SN these parameters are increased after the function block is initially wa OP ER configured the values of all previously entered step parameters will reset ED be retained If however a configuration is downloaded from the PC based Graphical Configuration Utility the parameter values are determined by the download which includes the entire block configuration The PRSEQ can store from 1 to 9 recipes Each recipe will have the same number of steps and groups but all of the parameters can be configured differently Recipes can also be managed from the ilware HMI See application document AD353 133 for additional information Refer to Section 1 3 Customer Product Support for the Siemens Web site URL to download the publication Input RN will accept a recipe number and input LR on a positive transition will select the recipe number which is the RN input The RN input will round the number to the nearest integer value A recipe number that is out of range will have no effect and the current recipe will remain The recipe number set by the RN and LR inputs will be retained during HOT and WARM starts During a COLD Recipe Number AND Load Recipe 8 1 Input Optional S Discrete Inputs Ouputs 16 Groups of 16 Input nF D n 0toF Output Output nF R E C I P E S Number of RECIPES
132. in Section 3 1 3 Additional information on Modbus network communications and data mapping can be found in Section 5 and Section 6 The RS 232 connection uses a DEC MMJ connector with the following six connections RTS Handshaking output from MPU TXD Data output from MPU Common Common RXD Data input to MPU CTS Handshaking input to MPU Ethernet communications is standard It enables peer to peer communications using Modbus RTU protocol with other Siemens controllers Procidia ilpac controllers and other devices having Ethernet functionality Ethernet supports transferring configurations between a 353 and a PC running ilconfig Graphical Configuration Utility The Ethernet Modbus Bridge in Figure 1 2 accepts an Ethernet data command from the controller and outputs an equivalent Modbus command The returning Modbus data is embedded by the bridge in an Ethernet packet to be sent to the requesting controller A short Ethernet cable connects the Controller board to the Connector Socket Assembly at the rear of the case The Connector Assembly has an RJ 45 connector for connecting to the external Ethernet network An Ethernet Activity LED is located on the exposed with the faceplate loosened edge of the Controller board It will flash with received Ethernet communications Compatible with Design Level A Siemens 353 and Moore Products Co 353 controllers that include an Ethernet option board 12 2 April 2012 UM353 1
133. indicates the quality of the received data and will go high 1 when the data is bad This is normally associated with failure to receive data due to a communication failure or a misconfiguration of the source 3 30 April 2012 UM353 1B Function Blocks 3 2 22 CHR Characterizer CHR function blocks provide 10 segments that can be used to characterize the X input signal Individual CHARACTERIZER segments are configured by entering the Xn Yn and Xn 1 Yn 1 points for each segment All Xn 1 points must be 7 ESN 000 greater than the associated Xn points Input X is in X CHARACTERIZER Output Y engineering units and the Y points should be in the engineering units desired for the characterizer output Coordinate S nput Coordinate X1 5 0 0 10 0 CHARACTERIZER Coordinate 2 5 20 0 nput Coordinate 5 30 0 nput Coordinate 4 5 40 0 Output Y Coordinate X5 6 50 0 Ya Coordinate X6 5 600 Input Coordinate X7 S nput Coordinate 8 5 Input Coordinate 9 5 Input Coordinate 10 5 Output Coordinate YO 5 Output Coordinate Y1 S Output Coordinate Y2 9 Output Coordinate 6 Output Coordinate Y4 6 Output Coordinate Y5 S Output Coordinate Y6 S Output Coordinate Y7 5 Output Coordinate Y8 5 Output Coordinate
134. is LO when 1 is the Internal input El Transfer Switch Switch Transfer External Status ST Switch Control Network Command 1 1 SE Switch position E Dm gt Sl Switch position I tr External Eg O1 I po Output 1 Internal gt IS IO Internal Override Internal Status i ES BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 42 April 2012 UM353 1B Function Blocks 3 2 38 ESL Events Sequence Logger ESL function blocks can be used on a one per loop basis to when displaying the loop containing an ESL function block having logged events The alphanumeric display will first step through any active alarms status conditions or errors and then all the logged events that occurred since log events within the loop Each ESL input can be EVENTS SEQUENCE LOGGER assigned a user tag up to 8 ASCII characters that will be displayed when viewing the logged events from the front ESL panel Events once triggered by positive transition 0 gt 1 si o 5 input will remain in the logger until reset Reset be ES SEQUENCE initiated either by setting input R high this input is edge sensitive and will reset the events on the leading edge Input 04 m LOGGER Event Alarm by entering configuration an
135. is done via the SPI The SPI is a full duplex synchronous serial interface for receive and transmit data Communication consists of timing control data and sequencing information The Controller Board has three analog inputs 3 digital inputs 2 analog outputs and 2 digital outputs The configuration in use determines the active inputs and outputs For example Factory Configured Option FCO101 is configured to accept one analog input for the process signal and one analog output for the valve signal The two analog outputs are 4 to 20 mA current sources with shutdown control for use in redundant control systems The two digital outputs are open collector devices with over voltage protection The board also contains a MultiMediaCard interface and a real time clock Two serial ports are available for bi directional asynchronous communications Terminals NCA and NCB provide an RS485 connection for Modbus network communications An MMJ 11 connector on the underside of the Display Assembly provides an RS232 connection for creating and editing configurations using the optional PC Based Graphical Configuration Utility Since both ports are independent UARTs communications with one serial port will not interfere with communications to the other Parameters in the STATN function block allow setting of the Modbus baud rate and transmission characteristic for the Display Assembly MMJ 11 configuration port and Modbus terminals NCA NCB See STATN Station Parameters
136. les op rations suivantes branchment ou d branchement d un circuit de puissance de signalisation ou autre 13 10 April 2012 UM353 1B Model Designation and Specifications 13 9 2 Special Conditions for Safe Use Always refer to the labels on the controller case for approvals and certifications applicable to that instrument FM Enclosure Requirements CE The apparatus must be mounted within an enclosure or assembly to prevent personal injury resulting from accessibility to live parts The enclosure is typically user supplied and therefore was not examined as part of this Approval but shall comply with the requirements of this section Accessibility The system must be installed within the enclosure so that its circuits are accessible by the use of tool only part is accessible when either the IEC articulate accessibility probe applied in every possible position to the exterior or exposed surfaces including the bottom or b the IEC rigid accessibility probe applied with maximum force of 30 Newtons 6 75 Ibs force in every possible position to the exterior or exposed surface including the bottom touches the part Protection from Fire If the enclosure is non metallic it shall have the proper flammability rating Grounding A metallic enclosure must have a protective grounding terminal and be marked as such accessible non current conductive parts must be bonded to the protective grounding terminal Gen
137. locking tab upward and release the connector INSTALLATION 1 Referring to Figure 10 6 perform the steps under Case Connection to install the cable in the case 2 Install the I O Expander board as described in preceding section Partially install the MPU Controller board the Ethernet connector should be accessible The Ethernet cable must lie on the floor of the case between the Expander and Controller boards 3 In Figure 10 6 refer to the steps under MPU Controller Board Connection to mate the free end of the Ethernet cable with the connector on the MPU Controller board Dress the cable so that it will not interfere with the Display Assembly 4 Fully install the MPU Controller board and reassemble the controller as described in preceding sections April 2012 10 13 UM353 1 Supplied Ethernet Cable 12 305 mm m Case Connection MPU Controller Board Connection 1 Orient the connector on this end of the cable 1 Partially install the MPU Controller board as shown above to mate with the RJ 45 in the controller case connector inside the case on the connector Socket assembly 2 Locate the RJ 45 connector on the exposed edge of the Controller board 2 Guide the cable into the case and insert the cable mounted connector into the 3 Orient the cable mounted connector case mounted connector zi a to mate with the board mounted socket and insert the cable
138. mA 30 Vdc Rly out 5A 120V 2 5A Q 240 Vac Max Ambient Temp 50 Table 13 1 shows the controller s model number sequence The model designation is shown on a nameplate on the top of the case The nameplate and other labels carry important information about the controller such as Model Number Bill of Material number P N No Serial Number and Certifications IMPORTANT Confirm a controller s model number and hazardous area certifications before installing applying power or servicing When circuit boards are added to a controller in the field nameplate information will not reflect the current physical configuration April 2012 Model Designation and Specifications UM353 1B Table 13 1 Siemens 353 Model Designation Sample Order Number 353 4 F 1 C N B 4 MPU Controller Board 120 240 Vac 85 264 Vac 47 63 Hz 24 20 15 Mounting Case Case with 52 Terminals and Ethernet Connector High Shock and Vibration Case with Ethernet Connector Operator Display Panel Fixed Analog and Digital Displays Expansion Not Required Local I O Expander e g TC RTD Freq Relay MultiMediaCard Modification Options Not Required Controller modified per order Bill of Material Design Level Design Level Electrical Approval Not Required FM CSA Div 2 Class I Groups A B C amp D suitable for non incendive CE compliant FM CSA Div 2 Class I Groups amp sui
139. mounted connector Insert Ethernet Cable may be necessary to gently press on the clear plastic connector with a long straight blade screwdriver to seat the cable mounted connector MG00516a Figure 10 6 Ethernet Cable Installation 10 6 MULTIMEDIACARD FORMATTING AND FILE NAMES Formatting MultiMediaCard MMC Siemens supplied Multi MediaCards are formatted for use in a 353 A MultiMediaCard from another source can be formatted in Windows based PC that has either built in MMC card slot or user supplied external MMC card reader Current Windows operating systems are capable of formatting card If the formatting program asks you to select a FAT File Allocation Table file system select FAT16 for cards from 48 MB to 2 GB Smaller cards are formatted to FAT 12 by default FAT 32 and cards larger than 2 GB were not supported at the time this manual was produced Configuration File Names A configuration created and saved at 353 faceplate will be stored on the MultiMediaCard with the controller s 8 character serial number and a 3 character extension as the file name This file name can be edited see the notes in Figure 2 2 A configuration designed in ilconfig can be saved to the PC and to the MultiMediaCard with a long file name or an 8 3 short file name in accordance with the Windows file naming convention If a long file name is typed and saved Windows will also save a short 8 3 file name When the card
140. name of the first file or sub directory listed in the directory will be displayed Additional files or sub directories can be displayed by turning the pulser knob clockwise If no files exist OR the pulser is turned counterclockwise NEW FILE or NEW DIR respectively will be displayed 3 This is the default directory or file name unique name of up to 8 characters can be stored 4 When storing a file with the write protect file attribute is set this additional menu option will be presented 5 When loading a file if an error is found an error code will display 6 A directory or file can be renamed before it is stored To change a displayed directory name or file name use the left right arrow keys to select the character to change then rotate the pulser knob to select new character Stored files and directories can be deleted and renamed at PC running Windows Explorer or i config Press STORE to save new or edited configuration to the root directory of the MMC The default file name will be the serial number of the controller 8 characters plus a V3C extension the extension is not displayed at the 353 faceplate A previously saved file will be overwritten Figure 2 2 MultiMediaCard Road Map April 2012 2 7 Configuration Overview UM353 1B 2 8 April 2012 UM353 1B Function Blocks 3 0 FUNCTION BLOCKS This section contains detailed description of each function block FB available for conf
141. of range will have no effect and the sequencer will remain at the current step Output AO analog output will track input TV when input is high 1 If input goes low 0 AO will remain at the tracked values unless either timed step ramps AO to the analog end point for the step or an event completes the step at which time AO will go to the AEP value for the completed step The current sequencer step can be changed by any of the following six events 1 the Reset input R going high 1 moving it to step I a step time expiring advancing to the next step ao m U m advancing to the next step Goto Step input GS going high 1 forcing the sequencer to the step indicated by the whole value of input SN the Step Forward input SF going high 1 moving it to the next higher step unless on the last step the Step Backward input SB going high 1 moving back to the previous step unless on the first step all the discrete inputs nn are True 1 that match the input mask a mask value of 07 is a don t care condition Input H will hold the remaining time of the current step and disable advancing of the sequencer by operations 5 and 6 but will allow operations 1 2 3 and 4 to move the sequencer to the starting position of a new step 3 76 April 2012 UM353 1B Function Blocks When the last sequencer step is completed SC will be set high 1 The sequencer cannot be moved past the last step unless the res
142. of the input P edge triggered and will return to a low 0 output on the succeeding positive transition DIVIDE BY N COUNTER DNO 000 Pulse Input DIVIDE BYN Output 1 Reset KD COUNTER Output 1 l 3 l Counter Divisor N S 2 Divide By 3 P U ILIAIS T Power Up LAST 5 Go ae ST Seay gt 01 P INPUTP block tag output em L NP UT HR INPUT R loop tag block tag output null 2 Exec Seq 001 to 250 Divide By 2 a E T POWER UP During hot or warm start with PU LAST set to YES the block will retain the last count and continue at E the last input output states If set to NO during a warm or a cold start the output and count will be initialized to 0 Pulse Input April 2012 3 37 Function Blocks UM353 1B 3 2 32 DOE Digital Output Ethernet DOE function blocks are assigned in sequence with each use station wide Up to 32 blocks are available Up to 16 digital inputs can be configured The block will pack inputs IO IF into single integer word which can be accessed from another controller having Ethernet communication capability Each DOE block is automatically assigned Modbu
143. output values Configuration parameters are divided into four types HARD SOFT READ and CALIBRATION HARD When a HARD parameter is STORED the controller will suspend execution of all function blocks and will hold all outputs until the EXIT button is pressed A HARD parameter is identified with each H notation in a function block parameter listing in Section 3 Function Blocks When a loop or function block is added or deleted the station enters a HARD configuration mode SOFT A SOFT function block parameter can be changed while the function blocks are executing A SOFT parameter is identified with each 5 notation in a function block parameter listing in Section 3 All QUICKSET changes also fall into this category READ These parameters are not changeable and therefore can be read while the station function blocks are executing A READ parameter is identified with each notation in a function block parameter listing in Section 3 The configuration VIEW mode also falls into this category April 2012 2 5 Configuration Overview UM353 1B CALIBRATION To calibrate parameter enter CONFIGURATION mode navigate to CAL select function block and finally select parameter to calibrate At this point the station will suspend execution of all function blocks and it will hold all outputs until the EXIT button is pressed If an output block is being calibrated its output will be adjusted during the calibration pr
144. priority setting of alarms or events Output PF Pulse ofF will go high for 0 5 sec when the flashing bargraph is stopped e g pressing the ACK button TC5107 2423 45 P 1 Process Process UNITS TC2053 P UNITS 5 Process DPP Process DPP f 5 Process Process gt Engineering Engineering 1 T INput units INput units 1 scaling scaling Process Vale RanGe PoinTeR 1 0 5 Valve DPP Valve Engineering T INput units scaling CLOSE OPEN H BAR LD H BAR RD Valve U1 RanGe PoinTeR User 1 STATUS X i U2 User 2 STATUS PT Input X_ DPP gt X 1 1 Input X Input X RanGe PoinTeR UNITS LE Loop Event Handling 1 Yi gt Input Y DPP gt LY SE Station Error Handling gt Input Y Input Y RanGe PoinTeR UNITS Pulse Alarm Bargraph Flasher Global Alarm Acknowledge gt Pulse ofF gt
145. rate output greater than the scan cycle time of the controller under the maximum input conditions Using the same example if the maximum A input is 60 0 and the cycle time is 0 1 sec the maximum required pulse rate is 0 1 sec The condition is satisfied since the maximum 3 26 April 2012 UM353 1B Function Blocks output requirement is less than the maximum pulse rate of 5 sec available with 0 1 sec cycle time The requirement would also be satisfied if a PUL SCAL of 1 was selected which would have required a maximum pulse rate of 1 POWER UP During a warm start if the configuration parameter PU LAST was set to YES the integrator function will initialize with the last value prior to power down and all outputs will be initialized to the last value prior to power down If set to NO or during a cold start the integrator and all outputs will initialize to 0 Input EC allows the batch totalizer block to be used with another function block such as the DINU that provides a count signal When input A is not configured it will be set to 0 0 The EC input is summed with the initial value for use as the total This value will now be displayed as the total on the operator faceplate and the presets will act on this value to provide outputs Al and A2 BATCH TOTALIZER
146. require that it be acknowledged This is the lowest priority If the event is in the active loop the alphanumeric display will alternate between the loop tag and the unacknowledged condition e g TC2053 P lt gt HI Press the ACK button to acknowledge this condition and stop the flashing The ACK button after all events have been acknowledged can then be used to scroll through any active alarm or status conditions within the Active Loop Pressing the ACK button will scroll through the list of active events and wrap around to the start of the list when more than one event is active This function will time out if the ACK button is not pressed for 3 seconds and return to the normal display mode If an unacknowledged event is not within the active loop press the LOOP button to page through the loops e D Pushbutton changes the variable currently displayed Pressing this pushbutton steps the display one position in the sequence P S V X and Y from any starting point within the display select group e UNITS Pushbutton displays the units of the variable shown in the alphanumeric display When the button is pressed the units that apply to the displayed variable will appear in the alphanumeric e g TC2053 P deg TC2053 V PRCT After 3 seconds the alphanumeric display will return to the variable tag e SBargraph this vertical bargraph displays the scaled range of the controller setpoint in the Act
147. sensor SB step backward SEL Signal Selector FB SETPT Setpoint FB SF step forward SIN Sine SL setpoint limit SLTA Serial Link Talk Adapter SN step number SPLIM Setpoint Limit FB SQ square root SR start ramp SRAM Static Random Access Memory SRF SR Flip Flop FB SRT Square Root FB SS stainless steel standby synchronization ST status STA station STATN station SUB Subtraction FB subtract SW switch TAN Tangent FB TC thermocouple track command TD time derivative TH Track amp Hold FB TI time integral TIM timer TO tracked output TOT totalizer TSW Transfer Switch FB TV track variable 14 2 April 2012 UM353 1B Abbreviations And Acronyms V valve volt s VAL value W watts WD watchdog XMTR transmitter XOR Exclusive OR Logic FB ZDO zero drop out April 2012 14 3 Abbreviations Acronyms UM353 1B 14 4 April 2012 Siemens Industry Inc Software Release Memo SR353 15 Rev 2 September 2012 Model 353 Process Automation Controller Design Level MPU Controller Board Firmware Version 4 03 PRODUCT S INVOLVED Model 353 Design Level B he Process Automation Controller e g TGX 353 B_ INTRODUCTION This Software Release memo discusses the enhancements and operational considerations for version 4 03 of MPU Controller board firmware This fi
148. tag to 1M identify the button function on a HMI display nput 1F e One normally closed pushbutton identified as PB2 on nput 81 Output 81 the local faceplate It can have a 6 character tag for 2 Group 8 Output 82 display on an HMI EY Output 83 nput 8M EJ e One two position selector switch identified as on the local faceplate It can have a 6 character tag for switch position identification on an HMI Gil T A G Grow 2 6 ASCII Char Groupt 1 1 Group1PB1 TAG 5 6 ASCII Char START T Group 1 PB1 Hold In Time 6 0 1 10 sec 1 sec 1 2 Group 1 PB2 TAG 5 6 ASCII Char STOP Each group also has a set of 6 character messages 1 2 HII T Group 1 PB2 Hold In Time s 0 1 10 sec 1 sec associated with the status of a feedback signal 1 0 G 1 S A T A G Group 1 switch Position A TAG 5 6 ASCII Char uro 011 5 T AIG Group 1 Switch Position M S 6 ASCII Char 1 1 Group1 Feedback 1 TAG 5 6 ASCII Char gt 1 0 Group 1 Feedback 0 s 6 ASCII Char OFF Each pushbutton has a configuration parameter that CEAC ups controls how long the button function will be held in the 1 ITIAIG Groups
149. than 0 to cause a high WD output from the loop operator display function block when the station does not receive a read command of the Active Station Event coil 00001 within the timer period A value of 0 disables the watchdog A Modbus communications DELAY time can be entered for both the Display Assembly configuration port and Modbus terminals NCA NCB front and rear ports respectively This may be necessary when the station responds too quickly for the modem Modbus masters may handle IEEE floating point numbers in a different word order The IEEE REV parameter allows matching the station to the Modbus master in use The CONFG LO Configuration Lockout parameter and PARAM LO Parameter Write Lockout parameter provide a method for locking out configuration transfers and parameter read writes from a PC over a Modbus or Ethernet network A 0 allows writes a 1 2 or 3 prevents writes There is no difference in operation in selecting a 1 2 or 3 The 8 digit SERIAL of the station is stored in memory and can be viewed when this parameter is displayed If only seven digits are seen assume a leading zero BAUD rate parameters set the Modbus port characteristics see Table 3 2 The network Modbus port at terminals NCA and NCB the rear port is RS485 and uses the assigned station address The configuration port the front port is RS232 and uses an address of 1 3 4 April 2012 UM353 1B Function Blocks The Cycle Time of the station c
150. that when communicating with a station can auto populate its database with the number and type of loops configured in the station All tag names used in the OPC database will be the same as listed in this manual Ethernet OPC Server The ilware PC Operator Interface software is an OPC Client and can be connected to an OPC server An Ethernet OPC server using the Open Modbus TCP Protocol is available to obtain data from single or multiple controllers and serve the data to OPC clients It also auto populates its database with the number and type of loops configured in the controller Modbus Application Note Refer to application document AD353 108 for information on using Modbus communications with controller products See Section 1 3 Customer Product Support for access to the Siemens Website to download the current versions of publications referenced in this manual April 2012 6 1 Data Mapping UM353 1B 6 2 STATION DATA station contains some data that pertains to the entire station and some to individual loops Station data available over the network is part of the station function block STATN configuration and is mapped to fixed locations in Modbus registers or coils Loop data detailed in the next section be associated with an ODC an ODS Sequencer an ODA Analog Indication an ODD Discrete Indication or an ODP Pushbutton Operation operator display Much of the analog
151. that can be PIDAG CONTROLLER used on one per loop basis It uses external feedback to provide integral action that allows interaction with other rane MD function blocks or external devices such as pneumatic M PD Output Range controllers shutoff switches PIDAG eliminates windup EE PIDAG Setpoint S CONTROLLER Output that can occur with other controller types Derivative action is provided when the parameter TD is non zero The controller includes an autotune feature that can be initiated Feedback LF Auto D Absolute Error Initiaize MER AT Warning from the operator faceplate using the quick TUNE feature Adaptive Gain AG_ When input A is high 1 the controller will operate in the normal auto mode and when low 0 causes reset R to track RIG RanGe PonTeR 6 sloop tag block tag nul DlRect ACTing NO YES NO F GE This forces the controller output to track the Proportional Gain 5 0 001 to 100 0 1 000 feedback within controller limits and allow the controller TL Time Integral 9 0 00110 4000 100 0 Time Derivative S 0 00 to be switched back
152. the input terminals 2500 resistors are supplied with the controller for conversion of 4 20mA inputs Power Up During a hot a warm or a cold start the function block will temporarily by pass the digital filter to enable the output to initialize at the actual hardware input signal xmtr Current Limit 24 4 ENG UNITS Re an Md Digital li AD gt NN Scaling gt 01 C1 C2 XTR Alc Quality Test gt QS BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 16 April 2012 UM353 1B Function Blocks 3 2 9 AINU Analog Inputs Universal AINU_ function blocks are available on the optional I O ANALOG INPUT UNIVERSAL Expander Board These function blocks convert sensor inputs such as T C thermocouple RTD resistance temperature detector millivolt ohm slidewire sources into block ANUa Output Range outputs Current inputs i e 4 20 mA are accommodated by using the WMV type and connecting a 3 750 resistor across the input output bias can be used to nullify any known offset in the sensor circuit and a digital filter time constant ANUd 7 is included to dampen process noise Output QS indicates the ANALOG INPUT AINU_b UNIVERSAL AINU c 97 T C RTD MV OHMS SLIDEWIRE gt Output 1 Quality Status Rev 3
153. the selected terminal numbers Carefully press the reference junction down between the connectors as shown below April 2012 7 15 Installation UM353 1B 3 43 44 45 LE Reference Junction for AINU1 T Reference Junction for AINU2 Note Place Reference Junctions against the connector and as close to the Connector Socket Assembly as possible 4 4 gt Connector Socket 8 9 2 2 Input Universal 1 Input Universal 1 d Input Universal 2 Input Universal 2 d AG00325a Assembly Y Check that all involved components and station wiring are fully inserted Carefully tighten the terminal screws to 5 in Ibs 4 Repeat the above steps if the other AINU function block is to be used as a thermocouple input 7 4 6 RTD Input Wiring Wiring for 2 3 and 4 wire RTDs is shown in Figure 7 15 Make connections as outlined in Section 7 4 1 Note the wire jumper between terminals 47 and 48 when a 2 wire RTD is installed 2 Wire RTD Controller Terminals Note See Table 7 1 for AINU2 terminals NC 45 45 45 Isolated 3 Wire 4 Wire AME XE 46 RID 46 RTD 46 Universal 5 _ 4 Converter gt 5 8 47 47 a7 ue v I Sur 4 1 Isolated o 48 48 48 E NC
154. the table below for the URL of the Process Instrumentation portion of the Siemens public Internet site Once at the site click Support in the right column and then Product Support Next select the type of support desired sales technical see the table below documentation or software Online Support Request http www siemens com automation support request Technical Support 1 800 333 7421 8 a m to 4 45 p m eastern time Monday through Friday except holidays Customer Service amp Returns 1 800 365 8766 warranty and non warranty Public Internet Site http www usa siemens com pi Technical Publications Click the above link to go to the Siemens Internet site and then click Process in PDF Instrumentation In the column to the right click Support gt Manuals In the column to the left select the product line e g Pressure or Temperature or Controllers to open navigation and search panes Note Navigation may change as the site evolves April 2012 1 7 Introduction UM353 1B 1 4 EQUIPMENT DELIVERY AND HANDLING 1 4 1 Factory Shipment Prior to shipment a controller is fully tested and inspected to ensure proper operation Itis then packaged for shipment Most accessories are shipped separately Shown below are some of the items shipped with controller Actual items included in shipment will depend upon controller model number printed copy of the 353 Installation Gui
155. to auto without bumping the output DIG Derivative Gain 5 00 10 00 MINimum SCALE Real 0 0 E E IMAIXISICIAILIE MAXimum SCALE t Real 100 0 The process range pointer parameter input R points to a Decima Point Position preferred 8 0 0 function block that has range scaling such as the analog ENGineering UNITS 9 PRCT s ne A IAIUIT OIT UNIE AUTOTUNE 5 YES input that is providing the process variable This enables V DEViation during Autotune S AUTO 2 5 to 25 0 AUTO the controller to normalize the tuning parameters for the 94 HY S HYSteresis during Autotune 5 AUTO 0 5 to 10 0 AUTO 9 output STEP on first Autotune S 5 1040 10 process range this parameter is not configured the Dy NJalM settings s Fast Medium Slow controller will use a range scaling of 0 00 100 00 ATRESET 5 NO YES YES POST Autotune Transfer 5 NO P INPUT P 9 loop tag block tag output null Input I when changed from low 0 to high 1 or from S INPUTS loop tag blocktag output A Pr T INPUT INPUT F H loop tag block tag output null high to low will cause the controller to initialize Le LIN PLUT Al INPUT A eliminate any proportional gain action during that scan LINIPIU T 11
156. to external environment Refer to Section 7 Installation 0 to 50 C 32 to 122 F 40 to 50 C 40 to 122 F 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F IEC 60654 1 Class B3 IEC 60654 4 Class 2 EN 61000 6 2 Generic Standard Immunity for Industrial Environments TEC 61000 4 3 EM Field EN 61000 6 4 Generic Standard Emissions for Industrial Environments 61000 4 4 EFT Burst IEC 61000 4 5 Surge 61000 3 2 Current Harmonics IEC 61000 4 6 Conducted RF IEC 61000 3 3 Voltage Fluctuation TEC 61000 4 2 ESD IEC 61000 4 11 Voltage Dip Short Interruption ABS Rules for Building and Classing Steel Vessels 2007 Part 4 Chapter 9 April 2012 13 9 Model Designation and Specifications UM353 1B 13 9 AGENCY APPROVALS The Siemens 353 has been designed to meet various agency approvals Contact the factory or your local Siemens Process Instrumentation Business Unit representative for current approvals Labels on each Siemens 353 list the agency approvals that apply to that particular instrument FM CSA Class I Division 2 Groups A B C and D CE see Section 13 10 2 ABS Type Approval meets ABS Rules for Building and Classing Steel Vessels 2007 Part 4 Chapter 9 13 9 1 CSA Hazardous Locations Precautions This section provides CSA hazardous location precautions that should be observed by the user when installing or servicing the equipment descri
157. treated as the smallest number greater than 0 0 i e 1 17 38 and the LN will be computed Input X xD O LNe X gt Output 1 accordingly X Input X Output BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 2 48 LOG LOGARITHM BASE 10 X inputx N Exec Seq loop tag block tag output 000 to 250 null 000 LOG function blocks will output the logarithm to the base 10 of input X When the input is lt 0 0 the input will be treated as the smallest number greater than 0 0 i e 1 17 e 38 and the LOG will be computed accordingly X LOG X O1 LOGARITHM BASE 10 INPUT 2 79 gt ESN 000 Exec Seq Output 1 loop tag block tag output null es 00010250 000 Input X Output 1 BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 48 April 2012 UM353 1B Function Blocks 3 2 49 MTH Math MTH function blocks provide universal arithmetic MATH capability As shown in the block diagram each input has gain and bias scaling The resulting signals are then applied to configurable math operations DIV MUL ADD and input A AD SUB Operation
158. until the security combination is re entered 11 2 ANALOG OUTPUT AOUT1 3 Analog output function blocks have been factory calibrated to 4 20 mAdc outputs If recalibration is necessary use the following procedure 1 At the controller s rear terminals connect an electronic calibrator or digital multimeter capable of displaying 4 00 and 20 00 mAdc to the selected analog output terminals AOUTI or AOUT2 Refer to Section 7 Installation for terminal numbers and wiring guidelines Ensure that terminal screws are tight 2 If security is enabled a level 1 or level 4 security combination will be needed to store the results of a calibration Refer to SECUR Security in Section 3 1 2 for additional information Apply power to the station Press the ENTER CONF button to enter the configuration mode at the MENU level Rotate the Pulser Knob to select STATION on the alphanumeric lower display OD SAP Press the STEP DOWN button to choose options at the station level and rotate the Pulser Knob to select CAL on the alphanumeric display 7 Press the STEP DOWN button to enter the FUNCTION BLOCK level Rotate the Pulser Knob to select the desired output e g AOUT1 8 Press the STEP DOWN button to enter PARAMETER level Rotate the Pulser Knob to select the desired parameter CAL ZERO shown on the alphanumeric display 9 Press the STEP DOWN button to enter the VALUE level CAL appears on display 10 Rotate the Pulser
159. up condition Any unused inputs to the block will be set equal to 0 The TO Tracked Output is normally used in applications where an external device is being used to set a bias in place of the BIAS parameter B is then set to 0 0 When it is desired to have the output of the BIAS block track the TV variable the external device is forced to track TO Input E will then equal TV A 0 0 and therefore the BIAS block output O1 will equal TV T FEE lt 2 Tracked T9 A Output 1 Track Variable 1 BLOCK DIAGRAM Rev 2 When a configuration containing the BIAS function block is edited in ilconfig and then downloaded to an on line controller the controller will ignore a change to the BIAS parameter value and continue to run with the pre download value April 2012 3 29 Function Blocks UM353 1B 3 2 21 CIE Coil Inputs Ethernet CIE function blocks use Modbus command 01 Read Coil Status to enable the controller to obtain Coil data from other stations over the Ethernet network Up to 32 CIE_ blocks are available Blocks are assigned in sequence controller wide with each use Up to 16 Coils can be obtained from a Modbus device Each Coil is assigned to block outputs CO CF The IP ADRES parameter is used to configure the IP address of the source Modbus device The MB ADRES parameter allows a Modbus address to be
160. when the A M switch is in the manual position output ES goes high when the Emergency Manual switch is in the manual position and SS goes high when the standby switch is in the Track Variable position Two LEDs on the display identify the position of the switch POWER UP The A M function block can be configured to power up under various conditions during warm or cold start If PU LAST has been configured as YES during warm start all outputs are initialized at previous values and the block will power up in the same condition i e same switch position When powering up in auto the A M block will execute in the manual mode for the first two scan cycles allowing controller block to track the last value When PU LAST is set to NO the A M block does not power up in last position during warm start and will power up as configured by the POWER UP parameter either AUTO or MAN During cold start the A M block will always power up as configured by the POWER UP parameter When the POWER UP parameter is used and the block powers up in MAN the manual value can be set using the PU MAN parameter Clock Wise MANual configured as YES the default position will cause the manual value to increase with clockwise rotation of the knob This feature is useful when clockwise rotation is desired to always open value whether the valve is direct or reverse acting EMergency MANual allows the position of the A M block Manual Switch switch 1
161. will also create a short file name of 8 characters This short 8 character file name generated from the long file name will be displayed by the 353 The on board Power Supply circuit provides the power sources necessary for system power internal analog output power and transmitter power 12 3 EXPANDER BOARD The I O Expander Board communicates with the Controller Board and contains hardware that increases station capability Additional direct connected I O includes two isolated universal analog inputs with thermocouple RTD resistance slidewire mA and voltage conversions two additional digital inputs that can be used as discrete or frequency inputs an additional analog output and two relay outputs All calibration data for the Expander Board is stored in the board s nonvolatile EEPROM making recalibration unnecessary when interchanging Expander and Controller Boards Expander circuitry operates under the control of the MPU based Controller Board and like the Controller Board it contains both analog and digital circuitry The analog circuitry operates in real time while the digital circuitry operates at high speed under program control Relay 1 and Relay 2 are triggered by the off board MPU to provide relay contact type outputs Each SPDT relay output can be connected in a normally open or normally closed contact state April 2012 12 3 Circuit Description UM353 1B 12 4 April 2012 UM353 1B Model Designation and S
162. 0 1 L Q3MNF R W Quickset 3 MIN SCALE Real 43959 60 1 L Q3MXF R W Quickset 3 MAX SCALE Real 43961 60 1 L Q4MNF R W Quickset 4 MIN SCALE Real 43963 60 1 L Q4MXF R W Quickset 4 MAX SCALE Real 43965 60 1 L P1MNF R Process 1 MIN SCALE Real 43967 60 1 L P1MXF R Process 1 MAX SCALE Real 43969 60 1 L P2MNF R Process 2 MIN SCALE Real 43971 60 1 L P2MXF R Process 2 MAX SCALE Real 43973 60 1 L P3MNF R Process 3 MIN SCALE Real 43975 60 1 L P3MXF R Process 3 MAX SCALE Real 43977 60 1 L P4MNF R Process 4 MIN SCALE Real 43979 60 1 L P4MXF R Process 4 MAX SCALE Real 4398 1 60 1 spares 00000000 43983 44009 60 1 6 12 April 2012 UM353 1B Data Mapping 6 3 7 String Loop Data 8 bit ASCII Char 2 Word Controller ODC Code R W R L PUR R W L PU R W L VU R W L XU R W L YU R W L TLU R W L QIN R L Q1U R W L Q2N R L Q2U R W L LHM R W L RHM R W Sequencer ODS Code R W L TAG R L PMSG R L SMSG R L CMSGa R L CMSGb R L CMSGc R L CMSGd R L CMSGe R L CMSGf R L CMSGg R L CMSGh R L CMSGi R L RMSG R Description Loop Tag Process Units Reduced Process Units Valve Units X Variable Units Y Variable Units Totalizer Units Quickset Hold 1 Name Quickset Hold 1 Units Quickset Hold 2 Name Quickset Hold 2 Units Left Horizontal Bar Message Right Horizontal Bar Message spares Description Loop Tag Primary Message Secondary Message Conditional Message a Conditiona
163. 0 XOR ESN 000 Input cD Input B PD XOR Output 1 Input B gt gt XR gt 01 4 INPUT A H loop tag block tag output nulh 0313650 INPUT INPUT B loop tag block tag output INPUT C loop tag block tag output XOR TRUTH TABLE Exec Seq No 001 to 250 TT 0 0 0 April 2012 3 91 Function Blocks UM353 1B 3 92 April 2012 UM353 1B Factory Configured Options 4 0 FACTORY CONFIGURED OPTIONS Factory Configured Options provide an easy way to configure Model 353 In most cases Factory Configured Option FCO will provide complete functional loop controller once the proper I O connections are made Changes can be made to an FCO to meet individual requirements The FCO listings on the following pages document the parameters that are different than the default values listed in Section 3 Function Blocks Some things to keep in mind when making changes are a b 9 analog signals been configured for engineering range of 0 00 to 100 00 In most cases converting to other engineering units will require changing only the range at the source e g Analog Input function block other blocks 1 Controller Operator Display Alarm and Setpoint that require knowledge of the range have range pointers that poi
164. 0 100 128 3968 48017 A1D2 R ATDO1 Data 2 0 100 128 3968 48018 A1D3 R ATDO1 Data 3 0 100 128 3968 48019 A1D168 R ATDO1 Data 168 0 100 128 3968 48184 A1D169 R ATDO1 Data 169 0 100 128 3968 48185 A1D170 R ATDO1 Data 170 0 100 128 3968 48186 Writing to the sample time will reset all data points A1D1 through A1D170 to 0 A2RMN R ATD02 MIN SCALE Real 48201 A2RMX R ATD02 MAX SCALE Real 48203 A2DPP R ATD02 Decimal Point Position 0 5 48205 A2EU R ATD02 Engineering Units 6 ASCII Char 48206 A2YR R ATD02 Year V2 0 5 1997 48209 A2MT R ATD02 Month V2 0 5 1 12 48210 A2DY R ATD02 Day V2 0 5 1 31 48211 A2HR R ATD02 Hour V2 0 5 0 23 48212 A2MN R ATD02 Minute V2 0 5 0 59 48213 A2SC R ATD02 Second V2 0 5 0 59 48214 A2ST R W ATDO2 Sample Time x0 01 min 1 48000 48215 A2STC R ATD02 Sample Time Complete 0 1000 1 48216 A2DI R ATD02 Data 1 latest 0 100 128 3968 48217 A2D2 R ATD02 Data 2 0 100 128 3968 48218 A2D3 R ATD02 Data 3 0 100 128 3968 48219 2 168 R ATD02 Data 168 0 100 128 3968 48384 A2D169 R ATD02 Data 169 0 100 128 3968 48385 A2D170 R ATD02 Data 170 0 100 128 3968 48386 Writing to the sample time will reset all data points A2D1 through A2D170 to 0 April 2012 6 23 Data Mapping UM353 1B Code R W Description Range Register MB A3RMN R ATD03 MIN SCALE Real 48401 A3RMX R ATD03 MAX SCALE Real 48403 A3DPP R ATD03 Decimal Point Position 0 5 48405 A3EU R ATD03 Engineering Units 6 ASCII Char 48406 A3YR R AT
165. 0 20 000000000000000000000000 000 enne nee peoaos i nene 6 23 6 3 12 Configuration Data Sequencer Loop essent nennen reete nennen 6 26 PUnn 7 1 T INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS 4 3 nre peti HERE Fe EP nte 7 1 7 2 ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS eese nennen nennen trennt nn enne E teens 7 1 T 3 MBCHANICAE INSTALLATION 4 ec itte re e o Dre e 7 3 7 3 1 Removable Connectors and Covers 7 3 7 3 2 Panel and Rack Mounting Guidelines eese ener ener nennen nee nr enne enne 7 4 7 3 3 Mountings a uri aa Pe Ht e RC D ERR Ue RO ERE EEUU 7 5 T 4ABEECTRICALE INSTALELXTION 5 4 or rte ee dedo ede mte es 7 6 7 4 1 Waring Guidelines iui SE pd Ree dul ease 7 6 April 2012 iii Contents UM353 1B 7 4 2 Analog Signal Input Wiring 4 20 mA 1 5 and 7 10 7 4 3 Analog Output Wiring 4 20 mA 1 5 7 12 7 4 4 Digital Input and Output Wiring 7 13 7 45 Thermocouple Input atant apa eet aped epe D e ER ERR 7 15 74 6 REDInput Wiii t ne tei 7 16 7 4 7 Ohms and Slidewire Input Wiring 7 17 7 4 8 Relay Output Wines nae ba A e Ple isha aiid 7 17 749 Modbus Wirmg cnin ec
166. 0461 30 1 L P2BTI R W Process 2 Alarm 0 3 0000 0003 40462 30 1 L P3ATI R W Process 3 Alarm A 0 3 0000 0003 40463 30 1 L P3BTI R W Process 3 Alarm B Type 0 3 0000 0003 40464 30 1 L P4ATI R W Process 4 Alarm A Type 0 3 0000 0003 40465 30 1 L P4BTI R W Process 4 Alarm B Type 0 3 0000 0003 40466 30 1 R W Process 1 Alarm A Priority 1 5 0001 0005 40467 30 1 Process 1 Alarm B Priority 1 5 0001 0005 40468 30 1 L P2API R W Process 2 Alarm Priority 1 5 0001 0005 40469 30 1 L P2BPI R W Process 2 Alarm Priority 1 5 0001 0005 40470 30 1 L P3API Process 3 Alarm Priority 1 5 0001 0005 40471 30 1 L P3BPI Process 3 Alarm Priority 1 5 0001 0005 40472 30 1 L P4API Process 4 Alarm A Priority 1 5 0001 0005 40473 30 1 L P4BPI R W Process 4 Alarm Priority 1 5 0001 0005 40474 30 1 0 0000 40480 30 1 April 2012 6 7 Data Mapping UM353 1B 6 3 3 Static Loop Integer Data Controller ODC Code R W Description Range Register MB R W Proportional Gain 9 99 to 0 01 1419 17FF 0 01 to 9 99 1801 1BE7 100 0 to 10 0 2418 279C 10 0 to 100 0 2864 2BE8 41201 30 1 Integral Time min 0 01 to 9 99 2081 2467 10 0 to 99 9 10E4 1467 100 to 3
167. 0989 AOE23 31005 AOE31 31021 AOEO08 30975 AOE16 30991 AOE24 31007 AOE32 31023 Note Registers listed in Table 3 6 are Extended Modbus Registers and are not supported by all Modbus devices April 2012 3 15 Function Blocks UM353 1B 3 2 8 AIN Analog Inputs AIN function blocks convert voltage input having range defined during calibration into block output signal that is scaled in engineering units The output is then lt interconnected to other function blocks within the 4 controller ans ANALOG INPUT _ gt Output Range ANALOG INPUT gt Output 1 EXTRACTOR 6 character ASCII value can be entered to identify the Quality Statys engineering units of the output signal The scaled output range is configurable and has a factory default of 0 0 to Finsen MINimum SCALE Real 0 0 100 0 PRCT Ranges such as 300 0 to 500 0 representing MIA XISICIAIL maximum SCALE Real 100 0 engineering units in degrees C can also be configured Decimal Pt Position preferred 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 The Output Range is a special data type that includes the EN GUN LTS ENGineering UNITS 5 6 Char ASCII PRCT MIN and MAX SCALE the DPP d the ENGUNITS ID LG DiGital FILTer 5 180 sec 0 sec an the an ti e Square ROOT extractor 5
168. 1 1 Siemens 353 Exploded View At the heart of the 353 is powerful MPU Controller board that uses the latest in microprocessor technology It includes on board I O and reusable function blocks and it is capable of solving a vast array of control implementations including single loop cascade and dual loop Available MPU board I O is listed in the table below Modbus and Modbus TCP Ethernet are standard networking communication options that are used to connect multiple controllers to an operator workstation Human Machine Interface HMI or DCS enabling integration of controllers into a plant wide system A popular HMI is the Procidia ilstation running ilware PC operator interface software A communication port RS232 on the underside of the Display Assembly is available for configuration and or debugging when using ilconfig the optional PC based Graphical Configuration Utility An optional I O Expander Board can be added to the base Siemens 353 It includes direct thermocouple RTD and frequency inputs and additional I O for direct process measurement of temperature and frequency variables improving accuracy and control Available Expander board I O is listed below on MPU Controller Board on Expander Board Analog Inputs 1 2 and 3 Analog Input 4 Analog Outputs 1 and 2 Analog Output 3 Digital Inputs 1 and 2 Digital Inputs 3 and 4 Digital Outputs and 2 Analog Inputs Universal 1 and 2
169. 2 1 0 n a CC3 R W Config Change Bit 3 1 0 n a SEB R 1 Station Error Bit 1 0 00015 spare 0 00016 spares 0 0000 00017 00071 6 4 April 2012 UM353 1B Data Mapping 6 3 LOOP DATA Loop data is grouped into several categories When using Modbus the groupings enable single data requests up to 60 Words Registers or 48 Coils to obtain similar data with single command The loop will have different data if assigned as controller type i e using the block sequencer type 1 using the ODS block an Analog Indicator Display i e using the ODA block or a Discrete Indicator Display i e using the ODD block Pushbutton S witch Operation i e using the ODP block a Dynamic data may change value on each controller scan and or is not identified as being changed by the data base change bit coil This category of data usually needs to be updated by a workstation every few seconds b Variable data changes periodically It is usually associated with on line operation at a workstation but may only need to be updated on a lower periodic basis or when a data base change is indicated c Static data is similar to variable data but has a lower update requirement The data may only need updating when a change is indicated or to verify a previous change made to a parameter d String data contains tag names units and messages 6 3 1 Dynamic Loop Integer Data
170. 2 Units L P3T R Process 3 Tag L P3U R W Process 3 Units L P4T R Process 4 Tag L P4U R W Process 4 Units L QIN R Quickset Hold 1 Name L Q1U R W Quickset Hold 1 Units L Q2N R Quickset Hold 2 Name L Q2U R W Quickset Hold 2 Units L Q3N R Quickset Hold 3 Name L Q3U R W Quickset Hold 3 Units L Q4N R Quickset Hold 4 Name L Q4U R W Quickset Hold 4 Units spares Discrete Indicator ODD Code R W Description L TAG R Loop Tag LHOT R Input 0 Tag LAIT R Input 1 Tag L I2T R Input 2 Tag Input 3 Tag LHI4T R Input 4Tag LHST R Input 5 Tag L I6T R Input 6 Tag LHITT R Input 7 Tag L I8T R Input 8 Tag LHOT R Input 9 Tag L IAT R Input A Tag L IBT R Input B Tag L ICT R Input C Tag L IDT R Input D Tag L IET R Input E Tag L IFT R Input F Tag spares Discrete Indicator ODP V2 2 Range 12 ASCII Char 6 ASCII Char 6 ASCII Char 6 ASCII Char 6 ASCII Char 6 ASCII Char 6 ASCII Char 6 ASCII Char 6 ASCII Char 8 ASCII Char 6 ASCII Char 8 ASCII Char 6 ASCII Char 8 ASCII Char 6 ASCII Char 8 ASCII Char 6 ASCII Char 0000 Range 12 ASCII Char 6 ASCII Char 6 ASCII Char 6 ASCII Char 6 ASCII Char 6 ASCII Char 6 ASCII Char 6 ASCII Char 6 ASCII Char 6 ASCII Char 6 ASCII Char 6 ASCII Char 6 ASCII Char 6 ASCII Char 6 ASCII Char 6 ASCII Char 6 ASCII Char 0000 Range 12 ASCII Char 6 ASCII Char 6 ASCII Char 6 ASCII Char 6 ASCII Char 6 ASCII Char 6 ASCII Char 6 ASCII Char 6 ASCII Char 6 ASCII
171. 3 AOUT Analog Outputs Verify mode description and block parameters drawing revised Twelve function blocks and block diagrams amended 8 Local Faceplate Operation Section 8 3 Autotune Procedure Charts 1 and 2 and associated text revised 11 Calibration Section 11 1 Analog Input Verification steps revised Addendum SR353 15 Rev 2 replaces SR353 15 Rev 1 Procidia ilpac ilconfig ilstation ilware PC APACS PAC 353 and 352Plus are trademarks of Siemens Industry Inc Other trademarks are the property of their respective owners All product designations may be trademarks or product names of Siemens Industry Inc or other supplier companies whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owners Siemens Industry Inc assumes no liability for errors or omissions in this document or for the application and use of information included in this document The information herein is subject to change without notice Procedures in this document have been reviewed for compliance with applicable approval agency requirements and are considered sound practice Neither Siemens Industry Inc nor these agencies are responsible for product uses not included in the approval certification s or for repairs or modifications made by the user vi April 2012 UM353 1B Contents PREFACE Conventions and Symbols The following symbols may appear in this manual and may be applied to the equi
172. 353 1B 11 4 April 2012 UM353 1B Circuit Description 12 0 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This section provides block diagram level circuit description of the Siemens 353 Controller 12 1 OVERVIEW Controller hardware architecture is shown in Figure 12 1 An exploded view of the controller showing individual assemblies is provided in Figure 1 1 The Display Assembly is used for operation and configuration The MPU based Controller Board performs many of the controller s signal processing and process control functions in addition to overseeing internal operations The Controller Board s on board power supply furnishes DC operating voltages to all plug in assemblies and to external process transmitters connected to the rear terminals The I O Expander board provides additional I O Ethernet communications is standard Power y gt MPU Controller Board Display Input Assembly f RS232 lt gt with MMJ 11 MPU gt Operator Faceplate 26 Vdc to 2 lt Transmitters Supply Ethernet 4 gt Network x MMC RJ 45 Socket Modbus lt gt lt 4 20 mA Analog Analog Outputs nputs gt gt 182 1 3 Digital Digital Inputs gt gt gt Outputs 1 3 1 amp 2 Rear Rear Universal Connectors Connectors Analog 26 Vdc to Inputs l vo Expander Board gt gt Transmit
173. 5 Controller and System Test UM353 1B 11 Press STEP DOWN to display ramp TIME 12 Turn the pulser knob to set the desired Ramp TIME and press STORE 13 Press EXIT to return to normal operation mode Now press the QUICK button Note that the RTIME parameter will now be displayed instead of the RRATE parameter Setting R ON OFF parameter to ON will now ramp the setpoint to the TARGET setpoint in the specified time rather that at particular rate See the SETPT description in Section 3 2 82 for more details on setpoint functions Quickset parameters for other function blocks such as RATIO and BIAS may be changed in similar fashion See specific function block descriptions in Section 3 Function Blocks for more details 9 1 9 TUNE When in normal operation mode pressing the TUNE button will scroll through the controller tuning parameters and allow activating the AUTOTUNE algorithm FCO101 is configured for PID control with the AUTOTUNE feature enabled Press the TUNE button and note that the default values for Proportional Gain PG Time Integral Time Derivative TD and the Derivative Gain DG will be displayed In addition the AUTOTUNE parameters Deviation Hysteresis and Autotune YES NO will be displayed It is difficult to simulate the autotune feature without simulating process signal but increasing the digital filter parameter on the AINI will help make the process seem more realistic To change the digital
174. 50 SloBlo fuse 24 Vdc MPU Controller board Install a 2A 250V SloBlo fuse Reassemble the controller Refer to the above referenced sections as necessary Apply power to the controller Operate the controller off line for several minutes to be sure that condition does not exist that will cause the replacement fuse to fail 10 5 2 Display Assembly To replace Display Assembly see Section 10 5 2 1 To replace the bezel or the circuit board perform the procedures in Sections 10 5 2 1 and 10 5 2 2 10 5 2 1 To Replace Display Assembly REMOVAL 1 Ina hazardous area remove power from the Controller 2 Protect the station s electronic components from electrostatic discharge Fasten a conductive wrist strap around your wrist and ground the strap to the ground screw on the Controller s case an unpainted area on the panel or a grounded static dissipative work mat 3 Loosen the Display Assembly s two faceplate screws One is above the numeric display and one behind the flip down door at the bottom of the faceplate 4 Pullthe Assembly from the panel about 1 5 38 mm 5 Look behind the Assembly and locate the display cable from the MPU Controller board Open the connector locking levers on the Assembly mounted connector to eject the cable mounted connector 6 Place the Display Assembly in a static shielding bag and set it aside 7 Go to the following sections to remove a circuit board or replace the power input fuse
175. 500 EJ Le EN ILE x5501 x9100 Loop PCOM Block x9101 x9999 Station Data 16 bit x0001 x0100 Station String Data ASCII seen x0101 x0200 Loop Dynamic Data 16 bit integer esee x0201 x0450 Loop Variable Data 16 bit integer esee x0451 x1200 Loop Static Data 16 bit integer x1201 x1950 Loop Dynamic Data 32 bit floating x1951 x2450 Loop Variable Data 32 bit floating x2451 x3950 Loop Static Data 32 bit floating x3951 x5450 Loop String Data x5451 x7950 Ubus Module Types 353R sse x7951 x8000 Loop Trend Data ref x8001 9000 EJ LE M x9001 x9999 Areas of the map that apply to other 353 products and do not apply to the 353 Design Level B April 2012 5 1 Network Communications UM353 1B EXTENDED MODBUS REGISTERS The traditional addressing of Modbus Holding Registers has been limited to 9999 However since the actual address is contained in 16 bit word addresses above 9999 are available Many Modbus Masters support this extended addressing Configuration data for Sequencer amp Timers contained in single sequencer loop can be accessed in
176. 6 ASCII Char 2 TAG I 3 Input3 TAG 6 6 ASCII Char 3 TAG 14 Input4 TAG 5 6 ASCII Char 4 TAG 15 inputs TAG S 6 ASCII Char 5 TAG 16 Input6 TAG 5 6 ASCII Char 6 TAG 7 Input TAG 5 6 ASCII Char 7 1 8 T AG inputs TAG lt 6 ASCII Char TAG 119 Input9 TAG 5 6 ASCII Char 9 TAG Input A TAG 5 6 I B inputB 5 6 ASCII Char B TAG AG InputC TAG 5 6 ASCII Char TAG T AG InputD TAG 6 ASCII Char 1D TAG T AIG InputE TAG 6 6 ASCII Char TAG T AIG inputF TAG 6 ASCII Char FTAG L OOP LOOP null VII EM VIEW Operator Display YES I NIPUIT 0 1 INPUT loop tag block tag output 2 INPUT 2 loop tag block tag output null 3 INPUT3 loop tag block tag output LIN P U T 4 INPUT 4 loop tag block tag output 5 INPUTS loop tag block tag output 6 INPUT6 loop tag block tag output 7 INPUT7 WH loop tag block tag output null 8 INPUT8 loop tag block tag output 9 INPUT9 loop tag blocktag output LIN P U T A INPUTAq loop tag block tag output INPUT
177. 7 4 Case Mounting Clip April 2012 7 5 Installation UM353 1B 7 4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION These sections contain electrical connection details for wiring Siemens 353 Each case rear connector and terminal is identified Connector cover removal and separation of the removable portion of connector from the fixed portion is described in section 7 3 Section 7 4 1 Wiring Guidelines contains specific information about connector removal for wiring wire size wire stripping and other details that will be needed while wiring Read this section before beginning to wire controller Sections 7 4 2 through 7 4 11 contain wiring diagrams and where needed step by step procedures to describe I O and network wiring Section 7 4 12 provides power input wiring information Single controller and daisy chained power wiring are illustrated A WARNING Electrical shock hazard 9 Explosion hazard VG Can cause death or injury Remove power from all wires and terminals before working on equipment potentially hazardous atmosphere remove power from equipment before connecting or disconnecting power signal or other circuit e Observe all pertinent regulations regarding installation in hazardous area 7 4 1 Wiring Guidelines Electrical Connections Power I O and Modbus network connections to a basic controller are completed through removable connectors with terminals H N and 3 26 When the controller
178. 9 PCOM Block Status Controller Sequencer Code OK L DFAIL L RESET L START L RESTART L HOLD L PCOMP L ABORT L READY L RUN L HELD L DONE L ABORTED spare spare spare Code L EMERG EO L NotAck dEO L INTRLK IK L NotAck d IK L FAILED FD L NotAck dFD spare spare spare spare spare spare spare spare L NotAck dPCOM L ACTIVEPCOM REE Description OK 1 DFAIL 1 RESET 1 START 1 RESTART 1 HOLD 1 PCOMP 1 ABORT 1 READY 1 RUN 1 HELD 1 DONE 1 ABORTED Description 1 Emerg Override 1 EO Not Ack d 1 INTRLK 1 IK Not Ack d 1 FAILED 1 FD Not Ack d 1 0 Range 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 Range 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 PCOM Evnt Not Ack d 1 0 1 PCOM Event is Active 1 0 Coil MB 09101 32 1 09102 32 1 09103 32 1 09104 32 1 09105 32 1 09106 32 1 09107 32 1 09108 32 1 09109 32 1 09110 32 1 09111 32 1 09112 32 1 09113 32 1 09114 32 1 09115 32 1 09116 32 1 Coil MB 09117 32 1 09118 32 1 09119 32 1 09120 32 1 09121 32 1 09122 32 1 09123 32 1 09124 32 1 09125 32 1 09126 32 1 09127 32 1 09128 32 1 09129 32 1 09130 32 1 09131 32 1 09132 32 1 April 2012 6 21 Data Mapping UM353 1B 6 3 10 Sequencer Loop Co
179. 967 30E4 3FFF 41202 30 1 L TDI Derivative Time min 0 00 to 9 99 2080 2467 10 0 to 100 0 10E4 1468 41203 30 1 L DGI Derivative Gain 1 00 to 39 67 20 4 2 41204 30 1 L MRI R W Manual Reset 0 0 to 100 0 0080 0F80 41205 30 1 Range High 1 to 32768 FFFF 8000 41206 30 1 0 to 32767 0000 7FFF L RLI R Range Low 1 to 32768 8000 41207 30 1 0 to 32767 0000 7FFF L DPPI R Decimal Point Position 0 to 5 0000 0005 41208 30 1 L PDPPI Process DPP 0 to 5 0000 0005 41209 30 1 L VDPPI R Valve DPP 0 to 5 0000 0005 41210 30 1 L XDPPI Variable X DPP 0 to 5 0000 0005 41211 30 1 LHYDPPI Variable Y DPP 0 to 5 0000 0005 41212 30 1 0 0000 41213 30 1 0 0000 41230 30 1 Sequencer ODS MASK Configurations Code R W Description Range Register MB L S006GOI Step 6 Group 0 Input Mask 0000 FFFF 41201 30 1 15006600 Step 6 Group 0 Output Mask 0000 FFFF 41202 30 1 LHS006G 11 Step 6 Group 1 Input Mask 0000 FFFF 41203 30 1 145006610 Step 6 Group 1 Output Mask 0000 FFFF 41204 30 1 L S006G2I Step 6 Group 2 Input Mask 0000 FFFF 41205 30 1 L4S006G20
180. A will be performed first on inputs A and MATH gt Output 1 B Operation B will be performed next on the resultant and Em 21 35 input C Unused inputs to a MUL or DIV operation will be set to 1 0 and those to an ADD or SUB operation will be set equal to OUT GA IN output GAIN 2 LNA GAIN input GAIN G 0 0 operation of those inputs will function normally LNB GAIN inputs GANG so it is important to insure that the bias and gain settings are LNC GAIN GANG T BIAS output BIAS set properly BIAS InputA BIAS 6 INput BIAS 5 slid 4 E INput C BIAS 5 Real 0 0 In a DIV operation when a divisor is 0 0 the output will go Operation ney Add Sub Mul Div Add INB BIAS INC BIAS to the maximum Real number with the sign determined by 1 1 0 Add Sub Mul Div Add INPUT LNPUT INPUT INPUT H loop tag block tag output null the numerator If the numerator is 0 the output will be 0 INPUT H loop tag block tag output null ESN Exec Seq H 001 to 250 1 1 1 1 INput GAIN PL i Input A 1 INput BIAS 1 INput B HIN z n gt OPeration A GAIN LP get Sub M
181. B loop tag block tag output null LIN P U T INPUTC loop tag block tag output D INPUTD loop tag blocktag output INPUT loop tag block tag output nuill F INPUTF loop tag block tag output Rev 3 3 56 April 2012 UM353 1B Function Blocks E Block Diagram n m olF F 3 EE ol folnk SV 206 NT 4 gt l Manual 5 PB2 ilware PC Faceplate Display April 2012 3 57 Function Blocks UM353 1B 3 2 57 ODP Operator Display for PushButtons ODP function blocks are one of five operator displays that can be used on one per loop basis to configure local operator display functions as well as network parameters See the ilware PC faceplate example on the next page Operator Display for Pushbuttons ODP_ Operator Display The ODP function block can provide up to 8 groups of for two pushbuttons and one selector switch Each group Pushbuttons includes nput 11 PED Output 11 nput 12 12 12 Hs Group 1 e normally open pushbutton identified as PB1 on 1A 7 ouput 13 the local faceplate It can have a 6 character
182. B Circuit Description MultiMediaCard socket is located on the exposed edge when the display assembly is freed of the Controller board When the controller is configured from the faceplate the configuration is stored to an EEPROM and to the MultiMediaCard using the station serial number as the file name time the configuration is changed and stored the revised configuration is written to EEPROM and to the MMC so copy of the current configuration is always available The MMC can be removed from the controller inserted in another 353 design level B controller and the configuration loaded into that controller The card can also be used to transfer configuration between controller and PC running ilconfig the Graphical Configuration Utility Each MMC has sufficient space for numerous configurations configuration created at the 353 faceplate will be stored in the root directory of the MultiMediaCard with an 8 character file name and a V3C extension Supported MMC file structures are FAT file allocation table 12 and FAT 16 FAT 32 is not supported and MMC FAIL will be displayed on the controller faceplate should an MMC formatted as FAT 32 be inserted in the controller Refer to Section 10 5 MultiMediaCard Formatting and File Names for additional information configuration created on PC running ilconfig can be saved with long file name more than 8 characters When the file is saved at the PC Windows
183. B RemainingTime ag Geto Step CONTROLLER Step Pulse X SN Step Number SP H Hold R Reset Discrete Inputs 300 00 325 00 325 00 340 00 Analog Output 2 45 5 25 0 0 25 0 Group 1 Group 1 Group 1 Input Output Input Output Input Output Mask Mask Mask Mask Mask Mask 2E5B 003E 1302 003E 327A 003E 00 1 00 1 00 0 00 1 00 1 00 1 01 0 01 1 0121 0121 01 0 01 1 02 1 02 1 02 0 02 1 02 1 02 1 DIAGRAM Rev 2 April 2012 3 77 Function Blocks UM353 1B 3 2 71 Quickset Hold QHD function blocks enable a real value to be changed on line using the QUICKSET feature The block is QUICKSET HOLD identified by an 8 character name that will be displayed in a EN the QUICKSET mode The block is configured with a Track Variable Output Range range entered as MIN SCALE and MAX SCALE to set a QUICKSET HOLD i iis Track Command fe gt Output 1 usable range and Decimal Point Position parameter can set the allowed precision The hold value can not be changed beyond the 10 to 110 value of these limits QS auickSet NAME 8 ASCII Char null MINS CAL E MlNimum SCALE Re
184. Ct parameter should normally be used only when the analog input is the process variable in a PID control loop Output QS indicates the quality of the received data and will go high 1 when the data is bad This is normally associated with failure to receive data due to a communication failure or a misconfiguration of the source 3 14 April 2012 UM353 1B Function Blocks Table 3 4 Floating Point Number Formats AIE Block BYTE ORD Type Description Byte Order Comments 1 Big Endian FP Format 4 3 2 1 IEEE 2 Big Endian FP w bytes swapped 3 4 1 2 3 Little Endian FP Format 1 2 3 4 4 Little Endian FP w bytes swapped 2 1 4 3 Model 353 Usage Table 3 5 Integer Default Values Block Selection Parameter Default Value Uint MIN INT 0 Uint MAX INT 65535 Sint MIN INT 32768 Sint MAX INT 32767 Table 3 6 FB Numbers vs Modbus Registers AIE Block FB MB FB MB FB MB FB MB Number Register Number Register Number Register Number Register AOEO1 30961 AOE09 30977 AOE17 30993 AOE25 31009 AOE02 30963 AOE10 30979 AOE18 30995 AOE26 31011 30965 11 30981 AOE19 30997 AOE27 31013 AOE04 30967 AOE12 30983 AOE20 30999 AOE28 31015 AQE05 30969 AOE13 30985 AOE21 31001 AOE29 31017 AOE06 30971 AOE14 30987 AOE22 31003 AOE30 31019 AQE07 30973 15 3
185. D03 Year V2 0 5 1997 48409 A3MT R ATD03 Month V2 0 5 1 12 48410 A3DY R ATD03 Day V2 0 5 1 31 48411 A3HR R ATD03 Hour V2 0 5 0 23 48412 A3MN R ATD03 Minute V2 0 5 0 59 48413 A3SC R ATD03 Second V2 0 5 0 59 48414 A3ST R W ATD03 Sample Time x0 01 min 1 48000 48415 A3STC R ATD03 Sample Time Complete 0 1000 1 48416 A3DI R ATD03 Data 1 latest 0 100 128 3968 48417 A3D2 R ATD03 Data 2 0 100 128 3968 48418 A3D3 R ATD03 Data 3 0 100 128 3968 48419 A3D168 R ATD03 Data 168 0 100 128 3968 48584 A3D169 R ATD03 Data 169 0 100 128 3968 48585 A3D170 R ATD03 Data 170 0 100 128 3968 48586 Writing to the sample time will reset all data points A3D1 through A3D170 to 0 A4RMN R ATD04 MIN SCALE Real 48601 A4RMX R ATD04 MAX SCALE Real 48603 A4DPP R ATD04 Decimal Point Position 0 5 48605 A4EU R ATD04 Engineering Units 6 ASCII Char 48606 A4YR R ATD04 Year V2 0 5 1997 48609 A4MT R ATD04 Month V2 0 5 1 12 48610 A4DY R ATD04 Day V2 0 5 1 31 48611 A4HR R ATD04 Hour V2 0 5 0 23 48612 4 R ATD04 Minute V2 0 5 0 59 48613 45 R ATD04 Second V2 0 5 0 59 48614 A4ST R W ATD04 Sample Time x0 01 min 1 48000 48615 45 R ATD04 Sample Time Complete 0 1000 x 1 48616 A4D1 R ATD04 Data 1 latest 0 100 128 3968 48617 A4D2 R ATD04 Data 2 0 100 128 3968 48618 A4D3 R ATD04 Data 3 0 100 128 3968 48619 A4D168 R ATD04 Data 168 0 100 128 3968 48784 A4D169 R ATD04 Data 169 0 100 128 3968 48785 A4D170 R ATD04 Data 170 0
186. Digital input commons e g DINI are isolated from station common and from case safety ground Model 353 Model 353 Rear Terminals Rear Transmitter Transmitter Supply gt Suppl gt ES 71 9 Common 2240 2 35 Current 11 X i 5 a Limiter S 24V 2s 24V au Y External 8 Suppl Supply 13 Py 37 ej DN pua Limiter Y i 14 18 38 gt 2 Common Ground Bus zo 22 Common Ground Bus Earth Or any station common terminal Earth rud current to 6 mA maximum 8 See Table 7 1 for DIN3 terminals any station common terminal Ground PE or Ground See Table 7 1 for DIN3 terminals DIN1 and 2 B DINU1 and 2 Figure 7 11 Digital Inputs DIN and DINU Digital output wiring is shown in Figure 7 12 Three diagrams are provided showing current and voltage outputs Note the use of transient suppression diodes in Figure 7 12C Always install transient suppression component across reactive component such as relay to protect the semiconductor devices in the Siemens 353 Digital output common DOUTC is connected to station common April 2012 7 13 Installation UM353 1B
187. Ds 8 2 April 2012 UM353 1B Operation 8 2 CONFIGURATION MODE Configuration pushbuttons are located behind the flip down door on the lower quarter of the faceplate Note that many of these buttons are used in both the normal operation mode and configuration mode as described below CONF press to enter configuration when the station is SIEMENS in the normal operation mode or to exit configuration when in the configuration mode ALARM STEP DOWN has a dual purpose When in the normal operation mode pressing the button will scroll through the alarm configuration parameters if the ALARM function block has been S T A configured the Active Loop The alarm setting is displayed in Pop engineering units and the 46 of range value will also be displayed on the setpoint bargraph by flashing single segment equal to the of range 2 5 value If security clearance is satisfied the parameters can also be Om gt changed See the ALARM function block description for details on the 40 parameters Press the ENTER EXIT CONFIG button to return to the on 20 line displays When in the configuration mode this button will step down to the next C configuration level See Section 2 Configuration Overview for details on 0 100 typical levels of the configuration mode CLOSE OPEN
188. HS INPUT LD Input LD PRIM SPLIM LS ESN Exec Seq No 5 SPLIM Setpoint Limit Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer PRIM AIN1 OR INPUT Input PRIM SETPT O1 ESN Exec Seq No 10 April 2012 4 15 Factory Configured Options UM353 1B Primary Loop cont Ext Int Transfer Switch Function Block ALARM Alarm Function Block INPUT ST Input ST SEC PB2SW PS PTR Range Pointer PRIM AINI OR INPUT E Input E PRIM A M O1 INPUT P Input P PRIM AINI OI INPUT I Input I SEC SETPT O1 INPUT D Input D PRIM SPLIM O1 ESN Exec Seq No 20 ESN Exec Seq No 20 SPLIM Setpoint Limit Function Block PID PID Controller Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer SEC AIN2 OR PTR Range Pointer PRIM AINI OR INPUT A Input A SEC E L O1 INPUT P Input P PRIM AINI OI ESN Exec Seq No 25 INPUT S Input PRIM SPLIM O1 INPUT F Input F SEC AIN02 O1 PID PID Controller Function Block INPUT Input PRIM A M AS RG PTR Range Pointer SEC AIN2 OR ESN Exec Seq No 30 INPUT P Input P SEC AIN2 O1 INPUT S Input SEC SPLIM O1 A M Auto Manual Function Block INPUT F Input F SEC A M O1 PTR
189. ID Controller Process 1 Engineering INput units l scaling x p EN s Rani PoinTeR 5224 DG La ENG UNITS Lead 9 To c 1 Limit IS X gt gt ea 33 lt 0 lt 1033 gt 2 1 01 l ngineerin ti Nputunte 4 1 Output 1 5 scaling Setpoint inverse scaling 1 v Feedback Absolute Value Auto lt Abolute Error r3 v AE BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 46 April 2012 UM353 1B Function Blocks 3 2 45 LL Lead Lag LL function blocks provide both lead and lag functions The block can function as lag only by setting the TLEAD time to 0 0 The lag function is always active and has minimum setting of 0 01 minutes Input E asserted high 1 will enable the Lead Lag function When asserted low 0 the Lead Lag function will be bypassed and the output will be set equal to the input If input E is not configured the block will be enabled A p NC JE EEE EEE LE ESSEN EEE SES ES EEK EE SAKENE BLOCK DIAGRAM LEAD LAG Analog Input Enable LA LA LEAD LAG Output 1 Time LAG min S 0 01 10000 0 Time LEAD min 5 0 00 10000 0 0 00 INPUT loop tag block tag output null INPUT
190. IMIT s maximum required range values The default values INPUT A oop tag block tag output have been set to 150 00 and 150 00 which might be the LNP UT JE INPUT E oop tag block tag output nr INPUT TC loop tag blocktag output null normal expected limits when using the default range of 0 0 TIV INPUT TV oop tag blocktag output to 100 0 These values can be set lower but have a IQUILIC KIS E T QUICK SET bias 5 NO YES YES Exec Seq No H 001 to 250 maximum setting of 150 of the range pointer value The default range is 0 00 to 100 00 if the pointer is not configured If for example the BIAS block is used to bias a flow setpoint with a range pointer input R of 0 6 00 GPM the maximum bias adjustments would be 9 00 If limit adjustments of 50 of this range are desired then the BIAS block LO LIMIT should be set at 3 00 and the HI LIMIT at 3 00 If a range change is made the current LIMIT settings and the current BIAS value will be changed to be the same value within the new range The BIAS can be adjusted using the QUICKSET feature if the parameter QUICKSET is set to YES The BIAS value will continuously change as the knob is adjusted but the STORE button must be pressed when the final value is reached to insure that the new BIAS setting will be retained on a Cold power
191. IN1 O1 PTR Range Pointer Loop01 PID OR INPUT D Input D Loop01 SETPT O1 INPUT S Input S 01 1 ESN Exec Seq No 10 ODC Operator Display for Controllers PID PID Controller Function Block P RG PTR P Range Pointer Loop01 AIN1 OR RG PTR Range Pointer Loop01 AIN1 OR V RG PTR V Range Pointer Loop01 PID OR INPUT P Input P LoopO1 AIN1 O1 INPUT P Input P Process LoopO1 AIN1 O1 INPUT S Input Loop01 SETPT O1 INPUT S Input S Setpoint Loop01 SETPT O1 INPUT F Input F Loop01 A M O1 INPUT V Input V Valve Loop01 A M O1 INPUT A Input A Loop01 A M AS LOOP Loop 01 ESN Exec Seq No 15 April 2012 4 3 Factory Configured Options UM353 1B 4 3 FCO103 External Set Controller with Tracking Local Setpoint Factory Configured Option FCO103 provides a single loop controller with external setpoint configured in Loop01 A block diagram of the loop configuration is shown below along with any changes to the default parameter values of the configured blocks This configuration provides setpoint tracking If a fixed setpoint is desired the TC input to the SETPT function block can be set to UNCONFIG If the loop tag LOOPOTI is changed all configured references will automatically be changed to the new tag
192. Knob to set the zero output to 4 00 mA on the digital multimeter or electronic calibrator 11 Press the STORE button to lock in the desired value If ENTER COM appears in the alphanumeric display go to Section 11 1 step 13 for entering a level 1 or level 4 security combination 12 Press the STEP UP button Rotate the Pulser Knob to select the CAL FULL parameter 13 Press the STEP DOWN button to enter the VALUE level CAL appears on display 14 Rotate the Pulser Knob to set the full scale output to 20 00 mA 15 Press STORE 16 For verification perform the following steps 1 Press STEP UP button and rotate Pulser Knob to select CAL VIEW parameter 2 Press STEP DOWN button to enter VALUE level 3 Rotate Pulser Knob to set display to 0 0 Output current should be 4 00 mA 4 Rotate Pulser Knob to set 100 0 Output current should be 20 00 mA 17 If all points have been calibrated and verified press EXIT button to leave calibration mode and enter operation mode If additional function blocks are to be calibrated and verified press STEP UP button to enter FUNCTION BLOCK level Perform steps 2 19 for each function block If security is enabled the exiting the configuration mode will lock out the calibration mode until the security combination is re entered 11 3 UNIVERSAL ANALOG INPUTS AINU1 AND AINU2 For calibration of the universal analog inputs refer to Section 3 2 9 AINU_ April 2012 11 3 Calibration UM
193. LL 100 CAL VIEW Contact factory CAL ZERO 0 Ohms CAL FULL 5000 Ohms CAL VIEW Contact factory Millivolt CAL ZERO 19 0 mV CAL FULL 19 0 mV CAL VIEW 0 TO 100 Section 11 0 provides calibration procedures that may be used to check or change factory calibration 7 22 April 2012 UM353 1B Operation 8 0 LOCAL FACEPLATE OPERATION Controller operation is described in this section Each faceplate display pushbutton and knob will be discussed first in normal operation mode and then in configuration mode This section contains many references to function blocks As necessary refer to Section 3 for details about function block Most operator controls are shown on the faceplate below Several additional pushbuttons are located behind the flip down door at the bottom of the faceplate These will be discussed in the configuration mode portion of this section 8 1 NORMAL OPERATION MODE 6 Digit Numeric Display displays the numeric value of the variable identified by the 8 character alphanumeric display SIEMENS KD Numbers can be displayed from 0 00000 to 999999 or 0 0000 to 99999 Any input exceeding these limits will be shown as the 2 4 2 3 4 5 maximum or minimum displayable value and cause the display to flash 8 Character Alphanumeric Display normally displays the loop tag T C 2 0 5 3 P with the dot suffix of the variable currently showing in the 6 digit
194. LOOP or STATION can be selected 2 4 April 2012 UM353 1B Configuration Overview Atthe STATION level a factory configured option can be loaded station parameters can be configured security passwords can be entered the clock can be set communication parameters can be configured and inputs and outputs can be calibrated e Calibration can also be performed within individual loops containing the input or output function blocks used in the LOOP Atthe LOOP level new loops can be added loops be deleted or an existing loop can be edited When a new loop is created at the controller faceplate the controller will assign a default name e g LOOPO1 The default loop name can be changed to a new name that is up to 12 ASCII characters in length It is suggested that loop names be limited to 6 characters so that the complete loop name will appear in the alphanumeric display during normal operation A loop can be edited by stepping down from the EDIT menu If more than one loop has been configured press the STEP DOWN button and turn the Pulser Knob to step through the list of configured loops From the selected loop stepping down will provide various options within the specific loop e The current value of all configured block outputs can be viewed current tag name of the loop and the ESN Execution Sequence Number can be changed ESNs are automatically assigned by the controller in the order of creation either
195. Loop01 AIN2 01 INPUT S Input S Setpoint Loop01 SPLIM O1 INPUT V Input V Valve 01 1 INPUT X Input X X Variable Loop01 AIN1 01 INPUT Input Y Variable Loop01 DIV01 01 LOOP Loop ft 01 0 Division Function Block INPUT Input Loop01 AIN2 01 INPUT D Input D Loop01 AIN1 01 ESN Exec Seq No 45 SCLO1 Scaler Function Block MINSCALE Output MIN 0 50 MAXSCALE Output MAX 1 50 ENGUNITS ENGineering UNITS CF WF ESN Exec Seq No 50 01 OR Function Block INPUT A Input Loop01 A M NA INPUT B Input B Loop01 E LIS ESN Exec Seq No 55 OR02 OR Function Block INPUT A Input Loop01 A M NA INPUT B Input B 01 5 ESN Exec Seq No 60 April 2012 4 9 Factory Configured Options UM353 1B 4 6 106 Single Loop Controller w Operator Setpoint Limits Factory Configured Option FCO106 provides a single loop controller configured in LoopO1 This is similar to FCO101 but with a SPLIM block added to the output of the SETPT block block diagram of the loop configuration is shown below along with any changes to the default parameter values of the configured blocks This configuration provides setpoint tracking fi
196. M353 1B 3 2 5 AG7 AGA 7 Measurement of Gas by Turbine Meters AG7 function blocks be used one per loop basis This block uses the AGA 7 American Gas Association AGA 7 Report 7 calculation to accurately measure the volume flow of gas at base conditions using turbine meter The basic equations calculated by this block in accordance with Input t AGA Turbine Meter Report No 7 1985 AGA Catalog No nput Pf P gt Output Qb 00585 Tf Tf 271 Qr 7 ie Qh 2 20 where volume flow at standard conditions Qp volume flow rate at base conditions base Pressure psia Real 14 73 Pr flowing pressure psia T base Temperature deg F Real 60 0 E LLINIP UT Q INPUT Qf loop tag block tag output flowing temperature INPUT Pf loop tag block tag output Pere 57 INPUT Tf loop tag block tag output compressibility at flowing conditions 74 INPuTzt loop tag block tag output nulh LLINIPIULTI 7 INPUT Zb loop tag block tag output Pp base pressure psia 5 Exec Seq No 000 to 250 000 Tp base temperature F Zp compressibility at base conditions Block output is updated continuously and is the volume flow rate at
197. MSG Message MTH Math FB MUL Multiplication FB multiply multiplication N number numerator NC normally closed NND NAND Logic FB NO normally open NOR NOR Logic FB NOT NOT Logic FB NUM number NV network variable NVRAM non volatile random access memory ODC Operator Display for Controllers FB ODS Operator Display for Sequencer FB ON OFF On Off Controller FB OP operation OR OR Logic FB override ORSL Override Select FB OST One Shot Timer FB P process PAC Process Automation Controller PARM parameter PB Pushbutton PBHSW Pushbutton Switch FB PC personal computer PCOM Phase Communication FB PD PD Controller FB PG proportional gain PID PID Controller FB proportional integral derivative PIDAG PIDAG Controller FB proportional integral derivative adaptive gain 5 Program Sequencer PTR pointer PU Power Up PUL pulse Q quality QHD Quickset Hold FB QS quick set quality status QSPI Queued Serial Peripheral Interface R reset Rankine RCT Repeat Cycle Timer FB RD received data Rev revision RG range RLM Rate Limiter FB RN recipe number ROT Retentive On Timer FB ROUT Relay Output FB RSF RS Flip Flop FB RT remaining time RTD resistance temperature detector RTG Rising Edge Trigger FB S setpoint set SCL Scaler FB SEN
198. O Read Write States START lr Read States R10 J Each communication state is read as a 1 or 0 Using Modbus a write of a 1 W1 or a 0 W0 will affect the communication state as defined by the associated logic in Figure 3 1 All unconfigured inputs will be treated as low 0 except OK RD RN and HE which will be treated as high 1 Three of the output states EO EMERG IK and FD FAILED can be configured for priorities 0 5 This will affect the flashing etc as previously described for other controller status conditions These states also have unacknowledged bits as detailed in status word 2 Conditions that require acknowledging can be acknowledged by either using the local faceplate ACK button or by writing to the individual not acknowledged bit or the Not Ack d PCOM bit 3 68 April 2012 UM353 1B Function Blocks EMERG EO ED unconfigured 0 INIT OK OK unconfigured 1 DFAIL fe PF unconfigured 0 RESET RD unconfigured 1 RO RO RESTART START w ENS unconfigured 1 RO HOLD jw wo
199. O Expander board hardware I O block i e AINU 1 AINU2 DINUI DINU2 ROUT1 or ROUT2 in a controller that does not have an I O Expander board installed 10 4 1 Off Line Error Codes Off line error messages are displayed while the 353 is powered but not running function block code and therefore not actively controlling a process Depending on the message user intervention will most likely be required Corrective action can be initiated via the Ethernet or Modbus ports as appropriate Parameter SE located at Modbus register 40002 will contain the hexadecimal form of the error number currently displayed e g ERR 213 would be sent as 00D5 An Error message can be acknowledged over the network by writing a 0 to the Modbus register Messages are displayed one at a time in order of occurrence and a message cannot be cleared until the error condition is corrected Table 10 1 Off Line Error Codes DESCRIPTION Board type test CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace Controller board DRAM error Replace Controller board SRAM error Replace Controller board Flash CRC error Press ENTER to reset and retest controller If error remains replace Controller board or reinstall firmware Constant Data CRC Test Controller operation suspended Press ENTER to load Controller board default constant data Calibration Data CRC Test Controller operation suspended Press ENTER to load Controller board default calibration data
200. PB1 TAG 6 ASCII START D GI8 P 1 T Group8 PB1 Hold In Time s 0 1 10 sec 1 sec pressed position The default value is 1 second but can be G 8 P 2 Group 8 PB2 TAG 6 ASCII Char STOP 1 1 G8 P 2 HI T Group 8 PB2 Hold In Time 6 0 1 10 sec 1 sec set from 0 1 or scan time if greater than 0 1 to 10 aroun a Swich Postion ATAG GASCI Char ura seconds GI8 SIM Group 8 Switch Position M TAG 5 6 ASCII Char MAN GI8 F 1 T AIG Groups Feedback 1 s 6 ASCII Char ON GI8 F 0 T AIG Groups Feedback 0 TAG 5 6 ASCII Char 1 100 null The LOOP parameter is used to index reads and writes VIEW opea Display w MES to Modbus parameters See Section 5 for more IINPUT 11 INPUT 11 loop tag block tag output 1 2 INPUT 120 loop tag block tag output information on network parameters 1 JA INPUT 1A loop tag block tag output nul 1 INPUT 1M loop tag block tag output 1 INPUT1F loop tag block tag output The VIEW OD parameter when set to YES enables the 81 meureto loop tag block tag output 8 2 INPUT82 loop tag block tag output operator display to be viewed and accessed locally In 8 input sa loop tag block tag
201. PB3 Switch BATSW Batch Switch Phase Communication 8 Bias umen PD Controller 0 99 Characterizer PID sene PID Controller 1 99 Comparator PIDAG PIDAG Controller 01 99 Cosine Program Sequencer 99 Deviation Amplifier QHDO01 99 Quickset Hold DIVO 99 Division Ratio 99 Divide Counter 99 Repeat Cycle Timer DTM01 99 Dead Time Table 07 99 Delay Timer ID EE External Internal Transfer ESL Events Sequence Logger 99 Natural Exponentiation 701 99 Exponentiation FTG01 99 Falling Edge Trigger GB01 99 Gain amp Bias HLDO 99 Hold ID e ID Controller LL01 99 Lead Lag LMTO01 99 Limit LN 01 99 Natural Logarithm LOG01 99 Logarithm Base 10 99 Math MUL01 99 Multiplication 01 99 NAND Logic NORO 99 NOR Logic 99 NOT Logic 99 Rate Limiter 99 Retentive On Timer RSFO01 99 RS Flip Flop RTG01 99 Rising Edge Trigger RTTO1 99 Real Time clock Trip SCL0I 99 Scaler SELO 99
202. Pointer PRIM AIN1 OR INPUT P Input P PRIM AINI OI INPUT S Input PRIM SETPT O1 INPUT F Input F SEC AIN2 01 INPUT A Input A PRIM A M AS ESN Exec Seq No 15 A M Auto Manual Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer PRIM PID OR INPUT A Input A PRIM PID O1 INPUT TV Input TV SEC AIN2 01 INPUT TC Input TC SEC ORO1 01 ESN Exec Seq No 20 ODC Operator Display for Controllers P RG PTR P Range Pointer PRIM AIN1 OR V RG PTR V Range Pointer PRIM PID OR INPUT P Input P Process PRIM AINI OI INPUT S Input S Setpoint PRIM SETPT O1 INPUT V Input V Valve PRIM A M O1 Loop ft 01 Secondary Loop SETPT Setpoint Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer SEC AIN2 OR INPUT TV Input TV SEC AIN2 O1 INPUT TC Input TC SEC ORO2 01 ESN Exec Seq No 5 ALARM Alarm Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer SEC AIN2 OR INPUT P Input P SEC AIN2 O1 INPUT D Input D SEC E L O1 ESN Exec Seq No 10 PB2SW PB2 Switch Function Block INPUT MD Input MD SEC E I SE ESN Exec Seq No 15 SPLIM Setpoint Limit Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer SEC AIN2 OR INPUT Input PRIM A M O1 ESN Exec Seq No 20 Ext Int Trans
203. R W Description Range Register MB R Process 1 3 3 to 103 3 0 0FFF 40201 10 1 L P2I R Process2 3 3 to 103 3 0 0FFF 40202 10 1 LAP3I R Process 3 3 3 to 103 3 0 0FFF 40203 10 1 L P4I R Process 4 3 3 to 103 3 0 0FFF 40204 10 1 April 2012 Data Mapping UM353 1B 6 3 2 Variable Loop Integer Data Controller ODC Code R W Description Range Register MB LHTSPI Target Setpoint 96 3 3 to 103 3 0 0FFF 40451 30 4 1 L HLI R W Setpoint High Limit 3 3 to 103 3 0 0FFF 40452 30 1 L LLI R W Setpoint Low Limit 3 3 to 103 3 0 0FFF 40453 30 1 L RTI R W Setpoint Ramp Time min 0 3840 0080 0F80 40454 30 1 L RRI R W Setpoint Ramp Rate min 3 3 to 103 3 0 0FFF 40455 30 1 L AILI Alarm 1 Limit 3 3 to 103 3 0 0FFF 40456 30 1 LHA2LI R W Alarm 2 Limit 3 3 to 103 3 0 0FFF 40457 30 1 L A3LI R W Alarm 3 Limit 3 3 to 103 3 0 0FFF 40458 30 1 LHA4LI R W Alarm 4 Limit 3 3 to 103 3 0 0FFF 40459 30 1 L TimI R W Tot Preset 1 3 ms whole digits 0 999 0000 03E7 40460 30 1 1 Tot Preset 1 3 Is whole digits 0 999 0000 03E7 40461 30 1 L T2mI R W Tot Preset 2 3 ms whole digits 0 999 0000 03E7 404621 30 1 1 2 R W Tot Preset 2
204. RROR 3 3 311 3 STATN Station Parameters ioci ien mede or suveren eeepc fe e eee teens 3 4 3 14 CLOCK Real Time Clock nep IER aa pP 3 6 3 1 5 ETHERNET Ethernet Communication Network esee eene nennen 3 6 3 2 VO AND LOOP FUNCTION BLOCKS Getestet EE ee toto E Deo teo 3 7 32 Transfers sind dea etre pri anes ERE EHE REEL neset 3 7 3 22 ACS S ARCCOSINE vekst apen seier fre hte nte reote ea tore 3 9 3 2 3 ADD Addition enn equ es HA qe m petat ies 3 9 3 2 4 AGA 3 Orifice Metering of Natural Gas 3 10 3 2 5 AG7 AGA 7 Measurement of Gas by Turbine Meters eese 3 12 3 2 6 AG8 AGA 8 Compressibility Factors of Natural Gas 3 13 3 2 7 ATE gt Analog Input re ec mne e denti ot de oie 3 14 3 2 8 AUN Analog deter a et entem epi dti 3 16 3 2 9 AINU Analog Inputs Universal ienne enirn R 3 17 32 10 ALARM A lartrii oocyte enh ain nies e T pe REM Be hee bee 3 19 32 ITLAND AND E0gIG iiit dati oS Eta td DER nC to deep andet 3 21 3 2 12 AOE Analog Output Ethernet tet re re phe t ipto 3 21 3 213 AOUT Analog iet et e mE e RE ueteri ale 3 22 32 I4 ASN ARCSINBE 4 1 nnb banane eit hein eio o ER I eR 3 23 3 2 15 An
205. RT Output D gt DeLaY DeLaY TIME minutes 5 Real 0 0 TME PU LAS Power Up LAST 8 NO YES YES gt ND LLINIPIUT INPUT ON loop tag block tag output null i s INPUT loop tag block tag output ON 9 ES Exec Seq 001 to 250 1 ENable Input gt When ON goes high the elapsed time will start Output D will Rede nnnm a go high after ET elapsed time equals or exceeds the DLY TIME Output RT remaining time equals DLY TIME ET If ON goes low the elapsed time will stop at the current value and will continue when ON returns to a high state The elapsed time returns to 0 0 when input EN goes low Output ND will be high 1 if input EN is high and output D is not high The DLY TIME is adjustable over the full range of the display which is 0 00000 to 999999 If the delay time is set to less than the scan time of the station the delay time will equal the scan time POWER UP During a warm start when PU LAST is set to YES the block will initialize at the input output states and elapsed time at the instant power down occurred A cold start will initialize the input output states and elapsed time to 0 3 2 76 ROUT Relay Outputs ROUT function blocks provide SPDT contacts activated by function block input C The relay will turn on when the RELAY O
206. Real 42465 60 1 L A4LF R W Alarm 4 Limit Real 42467 60 1 R W Totalizer Preset 1 Real 42469 60 1 L T2F R W Totalizer Preset 2 Real 42471 60 1 L Q1F R W Quickset Hold 1 Real 42473 60 1 L Q2F R W Quickset Hold 2 Real 42475 60 1 L BHLF R W Batch Switch High Limit Real 42477 60 1 L BLLF R W Batch Switch Low Limit Real 42479 60 1 L BPLF R W Batch Switch Pre Load Real 42481 60 1 L BGF R W Batch Switch Gain Real 42483 60 1 spares 00000000 42485 42509 60 1 Sequencer Timers Running Values ODS Code R W Description Range Register MB L DYTOIET DYTOI Elapsed Time Real 4245 1 60 1 L DYTOIRT R W DYTOI Remaining Time Real 42453 60 1 L OSTOIET 08701 Elapsed Time Real 42455 60 1 L OSTOIRT OSTO1 Remaining Time Real 42457 60 1 L RCTOIET RCTO1 Elapsed Time Real 42459 60 1 L RCTOIRT R W RCTO1 Remaining Time Real 42461 60 1 L ROTOIET ROTO1 Elapsed Time Real 42463 60 1 L ROTOIRT R W ROTO1 Remaining Time Real 42465 60 1 L DYTO2ET DYTO02 Elapsed Time Real 42467 60 1 L DYTO2RT R W DYTO2 Remaining Time Real 42469 60 1 L OSTO2ET 08702 Elapsed Time Real 42471 60 1 L OSTO2RT R W 2 Remaining Time Real 42473 60 1 L RCTO2ET RCTO2 Elapsed Time Real 42475 60 1 L RCTO2RT R W 2 Remaining Time Real 42477 60 1 L ROTO2ET ROTO2 Elapsed Time Real 42479 60 1 L ROTO2RT R W 02 Remaining Time Real 42481 60 1 L DYTO3ET DYTO03 Elapsed Tim
207. S NO YES YES INPUT H loop tag block tag output null EIS Exec Seq No P 001 to 250 HOLD HLD ESN 000 HOLD Output 1 HOLD VAL HOLD VALUE 6 Real null April 2012 3 45 Function Blocks UM353 1B 3 2 44 ID ID Controller ID is an integral only controller and one of five controller types that can be used on a one per loop basis It uses ID CONTROLLER external feedback to provide integral action and therefore allows interaction with other function blocks or external m ESN 000 devices such as pneumatic controllers and shutoff Range R Output Range switches while eliminating windup that can occur with Process ID P output other controller types Derivative action is provided when Setpoint S CONTROLLER Absolute Error the parameter TD is non zero Feedback F_ Auto t When input A is high 1 the controller will operate in the normal auto mode and when low 0 will cause the output of the lag function to track the feedback signal This will RanGe PoinTer ind E D LR DiRect ACTing NO YES NO cause the controller output to track the feedback within the TLL Time Integral 0 001 to 4000 100 0 limits When the controller is switched back to auto the 2 0 00 7 ies 1 1 value at the input of the lag GE FB if the GE is non
208. S 9 6 9 1 10 View modesina HE 9 7 9 2 SYSTEM GCHBCRKOUT ir tea e ter ra Ue atte ec oe eret e ia sei 9 7 10 0 MAINTENANCE s eereovevvevenseneevensenennensenennensnennensnennenssvennennsnennennvennennsvennennsvennennsvennennsvennennsvennennsvennenaseennennre 10 1 10 1 TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT 10 1 10 2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 10 2 10 2 1 Environmental Considerations esee 10 2 10 2 2 Visual Inspection trm t tee ebd ef te ehe 10 2 10 2 3 Cleaning SUP RO repa uu ede aeu tet pete ble sn 10 2 10 2 4 Circuit Board 10 3 10 3 EROUBLESHOOTING 2 2 2 2 6 bread onte nct po enel E Eco aie 10 4 10 4 ERROR CODBS 4 8 ae o3 eC ra HDD ERE PO ad prob n aO ert 10 6 10 4 T Oft Eine Error Melee 10 6 10 4 2 On Line Error Codes and Status Codes essere eene nennen nre nene 10 7 10 4 3 MultiMediaCard Error Codes 10 9 10 5 ASSEMBLY 2 442 1 0 600 6100000000000000 000405000 E E a entia 10 9 10 5 1 nee RE Ee P 10 9 10 5 2 Display As sempli oeie triente d ien te Pt ecd dpt 10 10 10 5 3 MPU Controller Board 22 eate etd tee e ue aberit e etie breue de 10 12 10 54 JO Expander Board eter eee eR E E ree RE Hber 10 12 10 55 Ethernet C
209. S T E P S Number of STEPS GIRIO U P S Number of GROUPS 0 I P E Current RECIPE r 1 L A S T Power Up LAST YES I NIPIUIT T V 7 null loop tag block tag output null S F INPUTSF loop tag block tag output S B INPUT 5 loop tag block tag output 1 GIS INPUTGS loop tag block tag output I NIPIUT INPUT SN loop tag block tag output iNPUTH loop tag block tag output R INPUTR loop tag block tag output null INPUT loop tag block tag output INPUTLR loop tag block tag output null E S N Exec Seq 000 to 250 000 1 nin INPUT mn tag output r Six x x G n Recipe Step xxx Grp n In Mask 0000 to FFFF 0000 r S x x x G n O Recipe Step xxx Grp Mask 0000 to FFFF 0000 r SIX X X T M Recipe Step xxx TIMe Period minutes Real 0 0 r S x X X A E P Recipe r Step xxx Analog End Point Real 0 0 start the recipe will revert to the recipe set by the configuration parameter Input SN will accept step number and input GS on positive transition will select the step number which is the SN input The SN input will round the number to the nearest integer value step number that is out
210. Software Rev see below 40009 RBT R Remote I O Board Type A 1 see below 40010 RBSR Remote I O 1 Software Rev see below 40011 NBT R Network Board Type B 1 see below 40012 5 Network B 1 Software Rev see below 40013 OAT R Option Board A Type A 2 see below 40014 OASR Option A A 2 Software Rev see below 40015 OBT R Option Board B Type B 2 see below 40016 OBSR Option B B 2 Rev see below 40017 OFT R Operator Faceplate Type see below 40018 DRN R Model 353 Database Rev No 0 32767 0000 7FFF 40019 CWT R Computer Watchdog Timer sec 0 1000 0000 03F8 40020 KSR R Kernel Software Rev see below 40021 CT R Cycle Time msec 0 32767 00000 7FFF 40022 LxT R Loop Type 0 5 40023 40047 0 1 controller 2 sequencer 3 analog ind 4 discrete ind 5 pushbuttons MSLCP R W Modbus Seq Loop Config Pt 0 25 0000 0019 40048 SA R W Station Address 0 250 0000 00FA 40049 Station Data that applies to other 353 controllers and does not apply the 353 Design Level 6 2 April 2012 UM353 1B Data Mapping RTS R W R W NLTB AASEL R W STY R W 1 STM R W 1 STD R W 1 STH R W 1 STMN STSC NAL NDL NDP 2 2 2 5 EBD PPR Spares SE ce Front Port Display Assembly RTS reserved Modbus Loop Trend Pointer Number of Loop Trend Blocks Active Ack
211. TATN SECUR ETHERNET blocks and Calibration are retained when a new FCO or a configuration from an MMC is loaded This enables a user to quickly configure the controller without having to re calibrate or re enter the Station parameter values The Time and Date in the CLOCK block are retained and the SRCE ADD Source Address is reset to 0 5 FCO 06 FCO0S FCO W p FCO 0S b R FCO0 N Library Pulser Select MMC Card Upon stepping down to the FCO parameter the last FCO that was loaded in the controller will be displayed Turning the pulser knob will then display other that are available in the FCO library The configuration installed at the factory will be either FCO 101 or a custom configuration that was ordered and defined by the user FCO 101 is a basic single loop PID controller An FCO can be loaded at any time in the field and used as is or modified edited to meet individual requirements The FCO library file is not modified when the FCO selected for controller configuration is edited In a similar manner a configuration on the MultiMediaCard can be loaded as a complete controller configuration Controller configurations can be stored on the MMC either in folders or in the card root directory Pressing ENTER at the controller faceplate and stepping down until MMC appears in the alphanumeric display will provide access to th
212. TR Process 3 RanGe PoinTeR loop tegblockiag nul P4RG 4 PoinTeR 5 loop tag block tag workstation the parameter should be set to NO Pi Process 1 TAG 8 ASCII Char P1 TAG 2 Process 2 TAG 5 8 ASCII Char P2 TAG Process3 TAG 5 8 ASCII Char P3 TAG gt gt 4 4 5 8 ASCII Ch Range pointers i e R1 to R4 for all four process inputs must be TA LIMIT Process 1 Alarm A LIMITS B fer 1B LIMIT P B LIMIT Real configured to define the range of each variable input i e P1 to P4 If Process 2 Alam A LIMITS E 2B LIMIT Al Real these parameters are not configured the bargraphs will be scaled using Proceso Alarm ALIM eal taba 2 LE B LIMIT the engineering range of 0 00 to 100 00 This information also defines teen the scaling of the loop information provided to remote workstation ar 1B DBAND Process 1 Alarm DeadBAND 5 0 1 0 5 1 0 5 0 0 5 network ie Modbus or Modbus TCP Ethernet 2 Process2 Alarm DeadBAND s 0 1 0 5 1 0 5 0 05 2B Process2 Alarm DeadBAND sj 0 1 0 5 1 0 5 0 0 5 Process3 Alam DeadBAND 5 0 1 0 5 1 0 5 0 0 5 1 1 1 SB DBAND Process 3 Alarm DeadBAND 0 1 0 5 1 0 5 0 0 5 Each process variable can be di
213. Time 0 00 100 00 min 43955 60 1 L MRF R W Manual Reset 0 00 100 00 43957 60 1 L ADF R W Autotune Deviation 0 2 5 25 43959 60 1 LHAHF R W Autotune Hysteresis 0 0 5 10 0 43961 60 1 L ASF R W Autotune Step initial 5 40 43963 60 1 L APGF R Autotune Proportional Gain 0 001 1000 0 43965 60 1 L ATIF R Autotune Integral Time 0 001 4000 0 min 43967 60 1 LHATDF R Autotune Derivative Time 0 00 100 00 min 3969 60 1 L HDF R W On Off Controller HI Deviation Real 43971 60 1 L LDF R W On Off Controller LO Deviation Real 43973 60 1 L DBF R W On Off Controller DEADBAND Real 43975 60 1 L PMNF R W Process MIN SCALE Real 43977 60 1 L PMXF R W Process MAX SCALE Real 43979 60 1 L VMNF R W Valve MIN SCALE Real 43981 60 1 L VMXF R W ValveMAX SCALE Real 43983 60 1 L XMNF R W X Variable MIN SCALE Real 43985 60 1 L XMXF R W X Variable MAX SCALE Real 43987 60 1 L YMNF R W Y Variable MIN SCALE Real 43989 60 1 L YMXF R W Y Variable MAX SCALE Real 43991 60 1 Quickset I MIN SCALE Real 43993 60 1 1 1 Quickset I SCALE Real 43995 60 1 L Q2MNF R W Quickset 2 MIN SCALE Real 43997 60 1 L Q2MXF R W Quickset 2 MAX SCALE Real 44009 60 1 L DGF R W Derivative Gain 1 00 30 00 44001 60 1 spares 00000000 44003 44009 60 1 April 2012 6 11 Data Mapping UM353 1B Sequencer ODS Code R W Description Range Register MB
214. U LAST is set to SET Input O1 Output 144 E YES the block will initialize at the input output states at the nt ee instant power down occurred cold start will initialize the BLOCK DIAGRAM input output states to 0 3 2 78 RTG Rising Edge Trigger RTG_ function blocks provide a high 1 output for one scan RISING EDGE TRIGGER cycle each time input P transitions from a low 0 to a high 1 RTG ESN 000 Pulse Input 1 TRIGGER 1 Output 1 gt Races M D ppc 1 Pulse Input gt 1 INPUTP H loop tag block tag output EISIN Exec Seq 001 to 250 1 1 1 BLOCK DIAGRAM April 2012 3 83 Function Blocks UM353 1B 3 2 79 RTT Real Time clock Trip RTT function blocks provide high 1 outputs when time from the CLOCK block coincides with the TIME DATE amp DAYS of the Week TRIP settings The block outputs will remain high while the CLOCK coincides with the settings Output TM will go high when the TIME coincides with the TIME TRP setting It will remain high for 1 second Output DT will go high when the MONTH DAY amp YEAR coincides with the MNTH TRP DAY TRP amp YEAR TRP It will remain high for one day Output DY will go high when the Day o
215. UTPUT _ block input is high 1 and will turn off when low 0 Two relay outputs are available on the Expander Board p ROUT no RELAY output o SPDT Relay ROUT D A gt no 1 1 4 LIN PUIT INPUT loop tag block tag output 1 ACTION H DIR REV DIR 1 Terminal Connections are listed in Section 7 4 Electrical BLOCK DIAGRAM Installation 3 82 April 2012 UM353 1B Function Blocks 3 2 77 RSF_ RS Flip Flop RSF function blocks perform a reset dominant flip flop RS FLIP FLOP function as detailed in the truth table An unused S input will be set high 1 and an unused R input will be set low ASF ESN 000 0 Reset ro E RS FLIP FLOP Output 1 RS FLIP FLOP TRUTH TABLE 1 5 Power Up LAST 5 NO YES YES 6 LO 01 LNPUT loop tag block tag output null R IINPUIT 6 INPUTS loop tag block tag output Reset 1 X x 0 01 EISIN Exec Seq 001 10 250 S 1 X 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 R RESET Input LO Last Output POWER UP During warm start when P
216. Y9 S 70 0 80 0 90 0 100 0 0 0 10 0 20 0 30 0 40 0 50 0 60 0 70 0 80 0 90 0 Output Coordinates X4 Xs Xe X7X8 X10 Input Coordinates Input X 0313150 BLOCK DIAGRAM lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt xxx ZxppbNonkbbkppppkp nkbpbkb Y Output Coordinate Y10 S Real 100 0 INPUT X H loop tag block tag output null ES Exec Seq 001 to 250 3 2 23 CMP Comparator CMP function blocks compare analog input A with an COMPARATOR external or internal limit setting and provide a high 1 output when the limit is exceeded i Analog Input A ACTION the CMP block can be configured as direct or extemal Lima COMPARATOR Output 1 reverse action Direct action will cause the output to go high when input is equal to or greater than the limit Reverse action will cause the output to go high when input A is equal to or less than the limit Comparator LIMIT 8 0 0 Dead BAND 5 2 Real 0 5 DiRect ACTing 5 NO YES YES DiRect ACTing N INPUT A H loop tag block tag output null lt gt EN INPUT EL loop tag block tag output null Analog gt Se A gt N Exec Seq No
217. a INI CoNsole desired with a sequence logic loop where local operation ee CoMputer is not needed but a workstation needs access to force I O or sequence parameters for recipe changes Messages will be available over Modbus and Modbus TCP Refer to Section 5 Network Communications for mapped data points 1 The of Recipe messages can be set to 0 so that a Recipe Message does not appear in the message list 2 Messages will function as follows with the local faceplate display When the local display first enters a loop the convention loop tag and sequence step number will be displayed When the D button is pressed the Numeric display will show MSG and the alphanumeric display will show the first message it comes to in the order shown below e Conditional messages will be displayed in the order in which they occurred e The latest message will be displayed first Anew message will override the current message The ACK button can be used to scroll through active messages It will stay on the last message until a new message overrides it Local Operation Not Local Watch Dog 5 9 Recipe MeSsaGes P M S G of Primary MeSsaGes 20 64 0 56 MIS G of Secondary MeSsaGes t 0 128 0 C Condition MeSsaGes 20 64 0 LOOP 5 2011025
218. a small amount of noise approximately 1 The autotuner was set with fast response the HYS was set to A and the Dev was set to A The autotuner provided recommended settings of P 1 84 I20 38 These settings were entered into the controller and a step change was made to the setpoint to review the response with the new controller settings The autotuner will use the initial valve step size set as STEP in the controller function block during the first 1 1 2 cycles to learn the approximate gain of the process It will then adjust the valve step size during the remainder of the autotuning exercise to maintain the DEV setting When this test concludes the recommended settings are transferred to the controller and a 20 setpoint change is made to illustrate the controller tuning When the autotuner is started for the next autotune exercise it will use the process gain learned during the previous exercise to determine the valve step size unless the parameter AT RESET in the controller block has been stored as YES warnings occurred during the first test or the station has been power cycled 8 4 April 2012 UM353 1B Operation Autotuning Considerations Process MI Setpoint Step Change Start Autotuner Figure 8 1 Chart 1 Autotune Process Noise could have an effect on the autotuner Chart 2 illustrates the same process as C
219. able eter ee sn see 10 13 10 6 MULTIMEDIACARD FORMATTING AND FILE NAMES 10 14 UO UOn 11 1 11 Ve ANALOG INPUT AIN AJ hp iEn e RE ee RD RD Re ke 11 2 11 2 ANALOG OUTPUT AQUTT 3 2 5 tir e tee DR DRE TROU REESE 11 3 11 3 UNIVERSAL ANALOG INPUTS AINUI AND 2 11 3 12 0 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION essoseveevevvevenssveevenssnennenssnennenssnennennsvennennsvennsvennennsvennennsvennennsvennenasvennennenasvennenaseesnee 12 1 iv April 2012 UM353 1B Contents 12 JOVERVIEW nara eoe eiet Ate 12 1 12 2 MPU CONTROLLER BOARD rede 12 2 12 3 0 EXPANDER 12 3 13 0 MODEL DESIGNATION AND SPECIFICATIONS sesseresevevsevvensennvnneenenevenevnnennennennennennvenennveneeneneeeneeneees 13 1 13 1 MODEL teet t eer Gi ee eine ab E 13 1 13 2 ACCESSORIBS iine Eder te te tee OD eR EO ee PR 13 3 13 3 SERVICE PARTS o sia em t e Rd 13 3 13 4 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS desees theses tet esent ane teet 13 5 13 5 POWER INPUT REQUIREMENTS seronorvorerororerrnrnrarenenenssrerenererresnrsnerenenseveneresensnvnranenenensenererensnrnsenenee 13 5 13 6 MPU CONTROLLER BOARD SPECIFICATIONS eese 13 5 13 7 EXPANDER BOARD 5 8
220. ading Minimum Operating Frequency 0 05 Hz Pulse Width teat 20 usec minimum Signal Sine Square Pulse Triangle or Contact Closure contacts require external power 13 8 April 2012 UM353 1B Software Output Types Relay Outputs 2 Type Software Input Type Contact Configuration Contact Rating Minimum Current Model Designation and Specifications a Scaled Frequency Analog b Scaled Count Analog c Current Input State Digital 100 Vde Sealed meets requirements of Division 2 applications Digital 5 115 Vac 2 5A 230 Vac resistive load 100 mA 10 mVdc or 150 mA 50 mVac 13 8 ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS 13 8 1 Standard Mounting Mounting Typical Location Temperature Limits Operating Storage Climatic Conditions Corrosive Conditions 13 8 2 Enclosure Mounting Mounting Typical Location Enclosure Model 353 Case Model 353 Display Installation Requirements Temperature Limits Enclosure Internal Operating Enclosure External Operating Controller Storage 13 8 3 Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Control room or other protected area 0 to 50 32 to 122 F 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F IEC 60654 1 Class B3 IEC 60654 4 Class 2 Out of doors or other area without environmental controls User supplied Installed inside enclosure Exposed through enclosure
221. ag to 3 Process Alam B PRIORIty 1 2345 m 4A PRIOR Process 4 Alarm A PRIORity 6 1 2 3 4 5 return to displaying the loop tag 4 PR I OR process 4 Alarm PRIORIty 5 128415 1 Process 1 Alarm 5 none HVLO or Hi 1B Process 1 Alarm none HI LO or Alarm Types 2A Process 2 Alarm 5 none HVLO or Hi 2B Process2 Alarm B s none Hl LO or 3A Process3 Alarm ATYPE 5 none Hl LO or 3B Process3 Alarm B 5 none HI LO or Sue Process 4 Alarm none HVLO or HI compares the process input with the limit setting and trips the A BI SITIYIP E Process 4 B TYPE cnonaMVLO or 00 l hieh 1 h th 1 higher th h 1A DL I N proc1 Alarm A DeLay IN 0 4 1 2 5 15 30 60 0 alarm status 18 when process 1S equa to or 1g er an the 1B Alarm B DeLay IN 8 0 4 1 2 5 15 30 60 imi 1 1 2 Proc2 Alarm A DeLay IN s 0 4 1 2 5 15 30 60 limit setting The alarm status will clear 0 when the process is less Proc 2 Alam B Delay Nu AMES NED m than the limit setting minus the deadband ic br Pres 3 tome Dalas 4A DL IN Proc4 Alarm A DeLay IN s 0 4 1 2 5 15 30 60 0 4B Proc 4 Alarm DeLay IN 8 0 4 1 2
222. age contacts The arcing associated with an inductive load can be limited by connecting a voltage transient suppressor such as a 1N4005 diode across the load Model 353 Rear Terminals 27 Load s NC 28 ROUTI No 5 Y 29 External 5 Power 9 30 E sj Ka pply en 31 ROUT2 NO 32 Load 0312050 Figure 7 17 Universal Relay Outputs ROUT1 and 2 Resistive Load April 2012 7 17 Installation UM353 1B 7 4 9 Modbus Wiring This section describes the wiring needed to connect a host device to Siemens 35375 Modbus network interface When connected the host can read data from and write data to Siemens 353 in command response format Most host devices communicate using RS232 while the Modbus network interface is RS485 As shown in Figure 7 18 2 wire RS485 to RS232 converter is installed to perform the protocol conversion and adapt the connection hardware shielded RS232 cable with either DB9 or DB25 connectors is installed between the host device and the converter An RS485 shielded twisted pair cable connects the converter to Siemens 353 Up to 32 Siemens 3535 can be connected since RS485 is multi drop network Shown below the jumper locations and identifiers for the Entrelec Isolated Converter shown in Figure 7 18 For access to jumpers carefully remove the side Rt INT1 0 1200 of the module t
223. aged circuitry and heat stressed parts Check for excessive dirt or dust build up which may impede air flow and inhibit proper heat dissipation 10 2 3 Cleaning Circuit boards are conformal coated for protection against contaminants and should not be cleaned unless accumulated foreign material is causing a problem If cleaning becomes necessary Protect the station s electronic components from electrostatic discharge Fasten a conductive wrist strap around your wrist and ground the strap to the station s case the panel or a static dissipative work mat See the next section for circuit board handling guidelines 2 Loosen the Display Assembly s two faceplate screws One screw is above the numeric display the other behind the flip down door at the bottom of the faceplate See Figure 10 1 as needed 3 Pullthe Assembly from the panel about 1 5 38 mm 4 Look behind the Assembly and locate the display cable then open the connector locking levers on the Assembly mounted connector to eject the cable mounted connector 5 Clean the bezel with a mild nonabrasive liquid cleaner and a soft lint free cloth do not use a paper towel Set the Display Assembly aside 6 Pullthe board s from the case by grasping a board by an exposed edge Do not use the display cable to pull the MPU Controller board from the case Since the board edge connector mates with a connector at the back of the case a moderate pull will be needed to extract the board
224. al 0 00 and will change continuously as the pulser is turned The MIAIXISIGIAILIE Maximum scale ke MAX value must always be set greater than the MIN value P Decimal Point Position prefered 5 000020 000 The block can also be forced to track input TV by asserting EINGUN I T S ENGineering UNITS 5 6 ASCII Char PRCT 3 QS ANGE Quick Set CHANGE Continuous Store input TC high 1 PU VALUE Power Up VALUE 9 Real 0 00 PU LAST Power Up LAST 5 No Yes YES INPUT INPUT TV loop tag block tag output null GNAGE INPUT INPUTTC loop tag block tag output null S N Exec Seq 00110250 e TV O gt 01 QSCHANGE enables the block output to either update TC Output 1 2 Track Command STEEN continuously in the Quickset mode as the pulser knob is MINmum SCALE turned or to only update the output with the value in the Frya numeric display when the STORE button is pressed BLOCK DIAGRAM When configuring the DPP Decimal Point Position it is important to keep the resolution to the minimum necessary for operation changes It will take the operator longer turning the pulser if the resolution is too high For example if only 0 1 changes are needed configure 0 100 range as 0 0 100 0 and not 0 000 100 000 During Hot or Warm start the
225. al 100 0 A INPUT A loop tag block tag output loop tag block tag output null I NIPUIT A U INPUT AU t loop tag block tag output null INPUT AD loop tag block tag output Exec Seq 001 to 250 i utput 1 Analog Input UPRATE DOWNRATE i Switch shown in the enabled position with Input connected Enable RL AU Adaptive Rate Up Rising Limit AD FL Adaptive Rate Down Falling Limit Rev 2 BLOCK DIAGRAM April 2012 3 81 Function Blocks UM353 1B 3 2 75 ROT Retentive On Timer ROT function blocks perform an on delay timing function with output states determined by inputs ON and RETENTIVE ON TIMER EN ROT ESN 000 When input EN is low 0 outputs and ND are low and Elapsed Time 1 pa EN is d the A will be determined onnput gt Remaining Time the input and the elapsed time Enable input ON TIMER Sr gt ET Output Not D 7 gt
226. al 420983 S247TIM R W Step 247 Time Period min Real 420985 S247AEP R W Step 247 Analog End Point Real 420987 5248 R W Step 248 Time Period min Real 420989 S2488AEP R W Step24 8 Analog End Point Real 420991 5249 R W Step 249 Time Period min Real 420993 S249AEP R W Step 249 Analog End Point Real 420995 5250 R W Step 250 Time Period min Real 420997 S250AEP R W Step 250 Analog End Point Real 420999 Timer Function Block Configurations Code R W Description Range Register MB DYTOIT R W Delay Timer 01 Time min Real 421001 OSTOIT R W One Shot Timer 01 Time min Real 421003 RCTOINT R W Rept Cy Timer 01 ON Time min Real 421005 RCTOLFT R W Rept Cy Timer 01 OFFTime min Real 421007 ROTOIT R W Retentive On Timer 01 Time min Real 421009 DYT21T R W Delay Timer 21 Time min Real 421201 OST21T R W One Shot Timer 21Time min Real 421203 RCT21NT R W Rept Cy Timer 21 ON Time min Real 421205 RCT21FT R W Rept Cy Timer 21 OFFTime min Real 421207 ROT21T R W Retentive On Timer 21 Time min Real 421209 April 2012 6 27 Data Mapping UM353 1B 6 28 April 2012 UM353 1B Installation 7 0 INSTALLATION This section describes installation of Siemens 353 Process Automation Controller Topics include installation considerations and mechanical and electrical installation IMPORTANT The installation must conform to the National Electrical Code and all other applicable construction and electrical codes Sec
227. al Inputs Dynamic Data x30897 x30928 Reserved Modbus TCP Coil Inputs Dynamic Data x30929 x30960 Reserved Modbus TCP Analog Outputs Dynamic Data x30961 x31024 Refer to the AIE function block in Section 3 Function Blocks for details 5 2 April 2012 UM353 1B Data Mapping 6 0 DATA MAPPING This section provides loop and station data mapping for Modbus and Modbus TCP Ethernet With Ethernet communication data is accessed using Modbus commands embedded within the TCP protocol This is becoming known within the industry as the Open Modbus TCP Protocol The controller has an RS232 port that always communicates via Modbus Itis located on the underside of the operator faceplate The use of network permits data to be uploaded from the station to computer or workstation ilstation This data is typically used for process and alarm monitoring and with additional processing of the data for inventory management and accounting and for process and equipment troubleshooting Data can be downloaded to the station to change setpoint or valve value change control mode and acknowledge alarms Proprietary data transfers associated with configuration upload download or on line monitoring associated with the ilconfig Graphical Configuration Utility are not described 6 1 CONNECTING TO i ware PC Modbus OPC Server The ilware PC Operator Interface software includes a Modbus OPC server
228. alog Trend 1 eene a a i a ss 3 23 32 16 ARCTANGENT niae eletti desee etc ente tuere Hee ei 3 24 32 17 AWE Analog Write Ethernet dee acte 3 25 3 2 IS t pe tecum p redes 3 26 3 219 BATSW ur IER a NI EN URP be ERR 3 28 3 2 20 BIAS Bias E E E EP coi o qeu tr da t e ERREUR ER 3 29 3 2 21 Coil Inputs Ethernet 5 encre tr rette 3 30 3 222 CHR CharactertZer UIS 3 31 April 2012 i Contents UM353 1B 3 223 CMP Comparators ansattes alen 3 31 32 24 COS COSINE Ga E e ere ioe a ee ees 3 32 Coil Write Ethernet o eec tte Ettore O aS 3 32 3 226 DAM Deviation Amplifiers sten eed reto Det 3 33 3 222 DIF Digital Inp t Ethernet 2 D irte teeth et ete HERE kept 3 34 3 2 28 DIN Digital 3 35 3 2 29 DINU Digital Inputs 44 000020 a 3 36 32 30 DIV tii aree eec leitet edi e a EP De tr Pec d ert pe tcu 3 37 32 3 DNC Divide by N Couhter iue eite e rr Han RR E eon 3 37 3 2 32 DOE Digital Output Ethernet edendo trente p
229. along with any changes to the default parameter values of the configured blocks This configuration provides setpoint tracking which will cause the setpoint to track the process when the loop is not in Auto NA If the loop tag Loop01 is changed all configured references within the station will automatically be changed to the new tag Process SETPT Setpoint Function Block PTR Range Pointer Loop01 AIN1 OR INPUT TV Input TV Loop01 AIN1 01 INPUT TC Input TC Loop01 A M NA ESN Exec Seq No 5 ALARM Alarm Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer Loop01 AIN1 OR INPUT P Input P Loop01 AIN1 01 INPUT D Input D Loop01 SETPT O1 ESN Exec Seq No 10 PID PID Controller Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer Loop01 AIN1 OR INPUT P Input P Loop01 AIN1 01 INPUT S Input S Loop01 SETPT O1 INPUT F Input F Loop01 A M O1 INPUT A Input A Loop01 A M AS ESN Exec Seq No 15 LOOPO1 A M Auto Manual Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer Loop01 PID OR INPUT A Input A Loop01 PID O1 ESN Exec Seq No 20 Analog Output 1 Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer Loop01 PID OR INPUT S Input S 01
230. an be downloaded directly from the personal computer or transferred using the MultiMediaCard Nine common controller configurations have been stored in a built in library that can be entered from the CONFIGS function block at the STATION level Simple changes can then be made to accommodate individual needs As an example FCO101 Single Loop Controller includes the setpoint tracking feature but by simply disconnecting the TC input to the SETPT function block it becomes a fixed setpoint Single Loop Controller These FCOs are fully documented in Section 4 Factory Configured Options FCO101 Single Loop Controller w Tracking Setpoint FCO102 Single Loop Controller with Fixed Setpoint FCO103 External Set Controller with Tracking Local Setpoint FCO104 External Set Controller with Non Tracking Local Setpoint FCO105 Ratio Set Controller with Operator Setpoint Limits 106 Single Loop Controller w Operator Setpoint Limits FCO107 Dual Loop Controller FCO121 Cascade Loop Controller FCO122 Cascade Loop Controller with Operator Setpoint Limits Unless otherwise specified on the order FCO101 is installed at the factory Use the following procedure to change the factory configured option Refer to Figure 2 1 Configuration Road Map to move to and then through the selected FCO and to enter or edit parameter values 1 Press the ENTER EXIT CONF button LOOP will appear on the alphanumeric display Rotate the Pulser Knob until STATION app
231. an be viewed as parameter within the STATN block In addition bias can be added to increase the total cycle time of the station This may be necessary when significant communications activities are taking place causing communication overrun errors Adding bias will allow the processor more time during each scan cycle for completing the communication chores The station can be configured to time out of the configuration mode after I minute of no faceplate operations by setting the CONFG TO parameter to YES default Table 3 2 Modbus Port Baud Rate Parameters PARAMETERS SETTINGS 8 bits no parity and 1 stop bit Baud Rate Selections 5 9600 default rear port 6 19200 default front port 7 38400 Handshaking Selections No handshaking is used default The station port will turn on the RTS line when it s ready to send data but will not wait for responding CTS from the receiving device The station port will turn on the RTS line when it s ready to send data and will wait for a responding CTS from the receiving device before transmitting A list of the installed controller hardware and software can be viewed within the STATN block using the HW PRES read only parameter As shown in Table 3 3 each board has an ID and a hardware revision and most also have a software revision The controller s operating Kernel and operating code reside on the MPU Controller board and there is an entry in the table for each The ta
232. ation 5 DEAD BAND 6 I INPUTP I INPUTS I INPUT E Exec Seq Absolute Error High Output Output 1 Low Output loop tag block tag null 0 00 to 100 00 min 0 00 1 00 to 30 00 10 00 Real 5 00 Real 5 00 Real 0 5 loop tag block tag output loop tag block tag output loop tag block tag output BUG 001 to 250 The process range pointer parameter points to another function block that has range scaling such as the analog input that is providing the process variable This enables the controller to normalize the tuning parameters for the range of the process input If this parameter is not configured the controller will use a range scaling of 0 0 100 0 POWER UP During a warm start outputs and comparator functions will be initialized at the state prior to power down and all dynamic elements will be initialized at the current input on the first scan During a cold start all outputs and comparator states will be set to zero to be activated by the block functions All dynamic elements will be initialized at the current input on the first scan Engineering gt input units scaling
233. ay Output I Common Network Communication Relay Output I Normally Open Network Communication B ROUT2nc Relay Output 2 Normally Closed Transmitter Power 26Vdc OUT2c Relay Output 2 Common Transmitter Station Common T2no Relay Output 2 Normally Open Transmitter Power 26Vdc XMTR AOUT3 Analog Output 3 Digital Output I DOUT1 Analog Output 3 Common Digital Outputs 1 2 Common DOUTC Digital Input Universal 1 Digital Output 2 DOUT2 Digital Input Universal 1 Digital Input I DIN1 Digital Input Universal 2 Digital Input I DINI Digital Input Universal 2 Digital Input 2 DIN2 Transmitter Power 26Vdc Digital Input 2 DIN2 Transmitter Station Common Digital Input 3 DIN3 Analog Input 4 Digital Input 3 DIN3 Analog Input Common Analog Output I AOUT1 Digital Input 4 Analog Output 1 2 Common AOUTC Digital Input 4 Analog Output 2 AOUT2 Analog Input Universal 1 Analog Input AINI Analog Input Universal 1 b Analog Input 1 2 Common AINC Analog Input Universal 1 Analog Input 2 AIN2 Analog Input Universal 1 d Analog Input 3 AIN3 Analog Input Universal 2 a Analog Input 3 Common AINC Notes 1 Safety Case Ground Wire to green screw at top center of rear terminal area Ground Bus An external user supplied ground bus can ease connection of multiple grounds particularly when twinaxial cable shields are to be grounde
234. ay also be configured as self clearing Try changing the alarm priority to 4 using the Configuration Road Map in Figure 2 1 or the following steps 1 Press ENTER EXIT CONF LOOP should be displayed Press STEP DOWN twice until VIEW appears on the display Press the right arrow button 3 times or turn the pulser knob until EDIT FB appears on the display Press STEP DOWN A M will be displayed Press the right arrow button 3 times or the turn pulser knob until ALARM appears on the display Press STEP DOWN to display RG PTR Press the right arrow button or turn the pulser knob until A1 PRIOR appears on the display Press STEP DOWN to display 3 on the numeric display Xv 90 Ov OU UI To change the priority of alarm 1 from 3 to 4 rotate the pulser knob until 4 appears on the numeric display emm Press STORE to save the configuration change 11 Press ENTER EXIT CONF to return to normal operation Try adjusting the process above and below 50 300 DEG F Notice that the alarm will clear without pressing the button if the process drops below the alarm limit deadband Use the ALARM QUICK button to return the Alarm Limit Al to the default 110 540 DEG F and press STORE to save Other alarm parameters referenced in the ALARM function block description may be changed in similar manner 9 4 April 2012 UM353 1B Controller and System Test 9 1 7 TAG Press the TAG button Note that Loop01 P S
235. base conditions in the same units as input Qf Tp and Tf are converted within the block from F to R adds 459 67 to the F input value for the actual calculation Compressibility factors Zr Zp can be entered manually using HLD Hold function blocks computed and downloaded from a host device or calculated in the controller using the AG8 AGA 8 Compressibility Factors of Natural Gas function block Pa EE 7 Ztb 5 Application Diagram 3 12 April 2012 UM353 1B Function Blocks 3 2 6 AGA 8 Compressibility Factors of Natural Gas 8 function blocks can be used on one per loop basis This block calculates the compressibility factors of natural AGA 8 gas in accordance with AGA 8 Report No 8 July 1994 AGA Catalog No XQ9212 It computes various ESN 000 compressibility factors and the specific gravity relative Input Pf Pf gt Output Gr Do AGA 8 density using the detailed characterization method Input Tf gt Output Zs described in the report The mole percentage of the gas output zt components and the base temperature and pressure are gt entered in the configuration and the flowing temperature and pressure are provided as block inputs Parameter MOL SUM provides a read only value that is the total base Pressure psia 14 73 of all the gas compounds that ha
236. bed in this Instruction These statements supplement those given in the preceding section A WARNING Explosion Hazard Explosion can cause death or serious injury In a potentially explosive atmosphere remove power from the equipment before connecting or disconnecting power signal or other wiring All pertinent regulations regarding installation in a hazardous area must be observed Precautions English For Class I Division 1 and Class I Division 2 hazardous locations e Use only factory authorized replacement parts Substitution of components can impair the suitability of this equipment for hazardous locations For Division 2 hazardous locations When the equipment described in this Instruction in installed without safety barriers the following precautions should be observed Switch off electrical power at its source in non hazardous location before connecting or disconnecting power signal or other wiring Pr cautions Francais Emplacements dangereux de classe I division I et classe I division 2 e Les pi ces de rechange doivent tre autoris es par l usine Les substitutions peuvent rendre cet appareil impropre l utilisation dans les emplacements dangereux Emplacement dangereux de division 2 Lorsque l appareil d crit dans la notice ci jointe est install sans barri res de s curit on doit couper l alimentation lectrique a la source hors de l emplacement dangereux avant d effectuer
237. ble lists the hardware and software revisions For example in Table 3 3 the MPU Controller board would be shown in the numeric display as 13 4 00 Table 3 3 Board Description and ID with Example Hardware and Software Revisions HARDWARE SOFTWARE REVISION REVISION 0 3 2 00 BOARD DESCRIPTION BOARD ID Check the NVRAM battery condition by reading the BAT OK parameter The NVRAM on the MPU Controller Board uses a sealed lithium battery Typical battery life is 10 20 years depending on the total power off time and operating temperature of the controller The battery powers the Clock and a portion of memory that stores operating data when external power is removed from the controller When external power is next applied the controller will read this data and return to the stored operating conditions when a Hot start condition is encountered The Clock will retain the correct time If the battery fails the station will power up in a Cold start using the controller configuration stored in permanent FLASH memory and the Clock will be reset Battery condition has no effect on normal operation while external power is applied The RTT function block includes a Battery Status output BS that provides a high 1 signal when the battery is low April 2012 3 5 Function Blocks UM353 1B 3 1 4 CLOCK Real Time Clock This function block enables the current time and date to be viewed when using the local faceplate
238. bration is performed the station will not prompt the user for the security combination and anyone will be able to store new calibration values SECURITY LEVel 1 COMbination S 000000 999999 000000 LEVel 2 COMbination S 000000 999999 000000 LEVel 3 COMbination 5 000000 999999 000000 000000 999999 000000 LEVel 4 COMbination S LEVel 5 COMbination 5 000000 999999 000000 If security is desired all 5 levels of security should be set with either the same value or different values when different individuals are granted access to only certain functions The functions that can be accessed at the various security levels are listed in Table 3 1 The security combination will be required when the user attempts to store parameter or attempts to view security combination The faceplate alphanumeric will display COM and allow the user to enter and store the combination combination is entered by selecting one digit at time using the lt and gt keys and setting the number for that digit using the pulser When all digits have been set press STORE If incorrect the alphanumeric will display ACCESS DENIED and then return to the parameter level Once combination has been entered correctly access will be provided for all functions within that level until the user exits configuration If combination is lost contact Siemens techni
239. cal support to obtain method to enter configuration and change the security codes Refer to Section 1 3 Customer Product Support for contact information The PC based ilconfig Graphical Configuration Utility may also have security options similar to the above However there is no security in the download procedure itself At the controller there are parameters in function block STA PARM that will lock out all downloads and all parameter writes from PC Table 3 1 Security Level vs Accessible Operations Station Function Block Edit x xp PJ Loop Function Block Add Delee X X Loop Function BlockEdit X x opo LX j Security does not apply to continuously adjustable quickset parameters that include RATIO BIAS and QHLD April 2012 3 3 Function Blocks UM353 1B 3 1 3 STATN Station Parameters The STATN function block enables entry of station identification and other station related information When the station is networked using Modbus the address 15 used by higher level devices to obtain information from the station Modbus can range from 1 250 but normally 1 32 is used to correspond to the total number of devices that can be installed on single network Once the address has been assigned and higher level devices have been configured to access information from the station changing the address can require reconfiguration
240. ccurred cold start with PU LAST set to NO will initialize the input output states and elapsed time to 0 Mo RT 1 DLY TIME 1 1 22 gt 01 zu _ L1 nv TIME d gt 0 I BLOCK DIAGRAM April 2012 3 41 Function Blocks UM353 1B 3 2 37 External Internal Transfer Switch function blocks can be used on one per loop basis to select an analog signal connected to input E E I TRANSFER SWITCH External or input I Internal as setpoint for the loop controller EN ESN 000 _ Output 1 The position of the E I switch can be changed on each Switch Transfer positive transition of input ST and will normally be connected to the PS output of pushbutton block Internal input i PB2SW configured for momentary action The SE HAPUS D output will normally be connected to the MD input of pushbutton block PB2SW E I switch position will be shown on the operator faceplate by a lighted LED Switch position E External Input E TRANSFER SWITCH Switch position I Internal Status External Status green for red for I POWER UP position 5 EN
241. ch Group 5 Feedback Status Group 6 Press PB1 Group 6 Press PB2 Group 6 Auto Man Switch Group 6 Feedback Status Group 7 Press PB1 Group 7 Press PB2 Group 7 Auto Man Switch Group 7 Feedback Status Group 8 Press 1 Group 8 Press PB2 Group 8 Auto Man Switch Group 8 Feedback Status Range 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 Coil MB 00296 48 1 00297 48 1 00298 48 1 00299 48 1 00300 48 1 00301 48 1 00302 48 1 00303 48 1 00304 48 1 00305 48 1 00306 48 1 00307 48 1 00308 48 1 00309 48 1 00310 48 1 00311 48 1 00312 48 1 00313 48 1 00314 48 1 00315 48 1 00316 48 1 00317 48 1 00318 48 1 00319 48 1 00320 48 1 00321 48 1 00322 48 1 00323 48 1 00324 48 1 00325 48 1 00326 48 1 00327 48 1 L GnS3 reading 1 indicates a switch position of Auto and reading 0 indicates Man Writing a 1 to the controller will toggle the state of the Auto Man switch L GnP1 amp L GnP2 writing 1 to the controller will have the same affect as pushing the button on the faceplate of the controller If the action of the switch is sustained the switch will change position If the action is momentary the switch will close for one scan cycle 6 20 April 2012 UM353 1B Data Mapping 6 3
242. cknowledged 1 Process 3 Alarm A is Enabled 1 Process 3 Alarm B is Active 1 Process 3 Alarm B is Not Acknowledged 1 Process 3 Alarm B is Enabled 1 Process 4 Alarm is Active 1 Process 4 Alarm A is Not Acknowledged 1 Process 4 Alarm A is Enabled 1 Process 4 Alarm B is Active 1 Process 4 Alarm B is Not Acknowledged 1 Process 4 Alarm B is Enabled 1 Alarms Out of Service 1 Configuration has Changed 1 Unacknowledged Loop Event 1 Active Loop Event Range 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 Coil MB 00296 48 1 00297 48 1 00298 48 1 00299 48 1 00300 48 1 00301 48 1 00302 48 1 00303 48 1 00304 48 1 00305 48 1 00306 48 1 00307 48 1 00308 48 1 00309 48 1 00310 48 1 00311 48 1 00312 48 1 00313 48 1 00314 48 1 00315 48 1 00316 48 1 00317 48 1 00318 48 1 00319 48 1 00320 48 1 00321 48 1 00322 48 1 00323 48 1 00324 48 1 00325 48 1 00326 48 1 00327 48 1 These bits indicate the status of the switch input MD write 1 will have the same effect as pressing and releasing the button on the faceplate If the action of the switch is sustained the switch will change position If the action is momentary the switch will close for one scan cycle April 2012 UM353 1B Digital Indicat
243. cold timer Hot Start function block execution continues from the last state prior to a power fail Warm Start Function blocks that have a power up in a last state feature either by design or by configuration selection will power up as defined in the individual block descriptions other function blocks will initialize at cold start conditions Cold Start function block outputs will initialize at 0 unless otherwise stated in individual block descriptions 1 2 3 Configuration The Siemens 353 can be configured either locally or remotely Local configuration is accomplished through the controller faceplate The local faceplate includes buttons located behind a flip down door for complete configuration including the addition deletion of loops and function blocks and the editing of function block parameters The local faceplate is required to enter an address in the controller so network communication can take place Section 2 Configuration Overview includes a road map for stepping through configuration Certain block parameters e g gains constants can be edited while on line but design changes e g block interconnections block additions will put the station in configuration hold which will hold outputs at the current value until the Exit button is pressed This will enable bumpless changes to be made while on line Note that new blocks will be initialized at default values which may affect final outputs Remote conf
244. controller Refer to Controller nameplate for model number and then to Section 13 Model Designation and Specifications for power requirements Refer to Section 7 Installation for connections A WARNING Electrical shock hazard 9 Explosion hazard Y VG Can cause death or injury ow e Remove power from all wires and terminals before working on equipment e potentially hazardous atmosphere remove power from equipment before connecting or disconnecting power signal or other circuit e Observe all pertinent regulations regarding installation in hazardous area 2 Depending upon the configuration connect test equipment to the I O terminals FCO101 This FCO has one 1 5 Volt analog input AIN1 and one 4 20 mA analog output AOUT1 configured To verify both of these outputs and to simulate an analog input for subsequent steps jumper the terminals shown below Connect a 250 ohm range resistor across the terminals shown below to convert the 4 20 mA output to a 1 5 volt input This will tie the valve output horizontal bargraph back in the loop as the process input P bargraph Refer to Section 7 Installation as necessary CONTROLLER JUMPER TERMINAL INSTALL 250Q AT TERMINALS Model 353 17 to 20 From 18 to 20 Custom Configuration Refer to Section 7 Installation as necessary for any additional connections 3 Apply power to the controller Refer to Section 10 3 Troubleshooting for the display sequence during star
245. controller response problem confirmation and corrective action The normal controller power up display sequence 15 DRAMTest appears for several seconds on the alphanumeric display SRAMTest appears in the alphanumeric display ROM Test appears in the alphanumeric display e WAIT may appear in the alphanumeric display display test of the 6 digit display horizontal and vertical bargraphs and individual LEDs is performed followed by a test of the 8 character alphanumeric display e Values determined by the configuration and process state are displayed In the event a malfunction within the controller is suspected troubleshooting by assembly substitution is recommended to get the controller back on line in the shortest possible time The plug in design of controller assemblies permits rapid removal and replacement to isolate a defect Figure 10 1 shows controller assemblies If a problem appears upon initial installation of the controller check the installation wiring and the controller s configuration Also check the wiring and operation of connected external process devices e g process transmitter sensor valve positioner Field servicing experience indicates that most initial service incidents are of this nature Additional troubleshooting avenues are also possible For example a series of test configurations may be created and implemented to exercise various function blocks within the controller Section 3 describe
246. controllers must have the same firmware revision level If the firmware levels differ an error message will be displayed on the alphanumeric display of the receiving controller An error message will be displayed if the receiving controller does not have the correct hardware circuit boards for the new configuration or if the configuration contains function blocks that are not valid for the controller design level See Section 10 4 3 MultiMediaCard Error Codes for details A configuration created at the controller faceplate consists of a database file with a V3C extension A 353 configuration created at PC running ilconfig consists of two files a database file with a V3C extension and graphical file with a 353 extension When a configuration is saved to a MultiMediaCard from ilconfig both files are stored ensuring that both are available for merging by ilconfig should the configuration require editing Downloading a configuration from ilconfig to a controller will transfer only the V3C database file 1 6 April 2012 UM353 1B Introduction 1 3 CUSTOMER PRODUCT SUPPORT Support is available through an online Support Request service a link is provided in the table at the end of this section When contacting Siemens for support e Please provide complete product information e For hardware this information is provided on the product nameplate part number or model number serial number and or version e For most software thi
247. d 3 Terminals 6 9 18 21 24 34 40 and 42 are electrically connected Use the terminals that allow the best wire routing and the least stress on components such as range resistors April 2012 7 9 Installation UM353 1B 7 4 2 Analog Signal Input Wiring 4 20 mA 1 5 Vdc and mV Siemens 353 analog signal input terminals are connected to software function blocks AIN and AINU within the controller Table 7 1 correlates function blocks and input terminals These terminals will accept several input signal types with the appropriate wiring and components 4 20 current input signal to an AIN function block must be converted to 1 5 Vdc signal and 4 20 current input signal to an AINU function block must be converted to a 15 75 mVdc signal INPUT TYPE FUNCTION BLOCKS RANGE RESISTOR FIGURE S RA AINI 2 3 and 4 2500 7 6 4 7 7 AINUI and AINU2 3 75Q 1 5 Vde AIN1 2 3 and 4 Not Required 7 6 and 7 7 Millivolt AINU I and AINU2 Not Required Notes 1 Function blocks AIN4 AINUI and AINU2 are available only when an I O Expander Board is installed 2 Range resistors listed are supplied in Installation Kits For other current values select range resistor that will provide a 1 5 Vdc input For example for 10 50 mA install 1000 range resistor Crimp on connectors are provided for use when a range resistor and a signal input wire are to be inserted in the same connector terminal A connector should also be used
248. d Station Error Log Standard Time in Years Standard Time in Months Standard Time in Days Standard Time in Hours Standard Time in Minutes Standard Time in Seconds No of Analog Ind Loops ODA No of Discrete Ind Loops ODD No of Pushbutton Loops ODP IP Address 2 IP Address 2 IP Gateway Address 4 IP Gateway Address 4 IP Mask 3 IP Mask 3 1 3 0001 0003 0 25 0000 0019 0 5 0000 0005 0 33767 0000 7FFF 2000 2099 1 12 1 31 0 23 0 59 0 59 0 255 0000 00FF 0 255 0000 00FF 0 255 0000 00FF 1 0 255 2 0 255 3 0 255 4 0 255 1 0 255 2 0 255 3 0 255 4 0 255 1 0 255 2 0 255 3 0 255 4 0 255 Ethernet Board Speed 0 1 10 2 100M Ethernet Board Duplex 0 1 half duplex 2 full duplex Ethernet Board Peer to Peer Rate Software Revisions Development Release Major Rev Minor Rev Hardware Type and Revisions Type Rev 0 25 0 5 1 2 5 10 sec MSB 128 to 255 80 FF MSB 1 to 127 00 7F 5 LSB 0 to 255 00 FF MSB1 to 15 01 0F 5 LSB 1 to 15 01 0F 40050 40051 40057 40058 40059 40060 40061 40062 40063 40064 40065 40066 40067 40068 40069 40070 40071 40072 40073 40074 40075 40076 40077 40078 40079 40100 1 controller time should be changed one parameter at time and then verified before writing the next parameter i e for Modbus use command 06 and not command 16 Write the year only i e
249. d setting the parameter Number of Events Input 22 Events logged to the ESL function block be viewed at input 23 the operator faceplate by pressing the ACK pushbutton input 24 ED Reset d LL 0 1 IMISIG INput 01 MeSsaGe 8 Char ASCII null the last reset The configured 8 character name will be LLINI0 2 MISIG Input 02 MeSsaGe 8 Char ASCII shown in the alphanumeric display and the order of 2 MISIG input 23 messaGe en occurrence ESL 1 ESL 2 will appear in the numeric LLIN 2 4 MISIG input 24 MeSsaGe 8 Char ASCII nul display when stepping through the event log Other events NE 7 I 02 D 2 Me such as alarms status conditions or errors can be similarly l T 2 2 INPUT loop tag bloc output viewed if logged to the ESL function block lola meur24 22 LUN PiU T INPUTR loop tag block tag output null NO 02 gt r 23 24 gt _ Block Diagram April 2012 3 43 Function Blocks UM353 1B 3 2 39 EXP NATURAL EXPONENTIATION EXP function blocks perform the natural exponentiation function base The output will be the value raised to the power of NATURAL EXPONENTIATION input X EEE gt Outpu
250. data is available is two formats The first is 16 bit values scaled consistent with previous legacy controller products enabling integration into existing legacy systems This data type also provides Modbus masters unable to handle 32 bit floating point a method for obtaining data from the station The second is the standard 32 bit IEEE floating point format consistent with the actual data in the station This data type is contained in two consecutive registers or parameters e The LSW is first and the MSW second Boolean values are available in coils e String data formatted as 2 ASCII characters per word with the left most character in the most significant byte containing tag units and message information Most Station data is Read Only except as noted in Section 6 2 1 Integer Data 6 2 1 Integer Data 16 bit Integer Code Description Range Register MB GDS R Global Data Size LIL 7 256 0007 0100 n a ST R Station Type 6 0006 40001 SSW R W Station Status Word see Station Status Word see coils SE R W Station Error 0 32767 00000 7FFF 40002 NCL R No of Control Loops of ODC 0 255 0000 00FF 40003 NSL R No of Seq Loops of ODS 0 255 0000 00FF 40004 RAM R RAM Size size in K bytes 0 65535 0000 FFFF 40005 CBT R Controller Board Type see below 40006 CBSR Controller Board Software Rev see below 40007 EBT R Expander I O Board Type see below 40008 EBSR Exp I O Board
251. de IG353 1 is also supplied SIEMENS Terminals Range Resistors Crimp on Connectors Rear Terminal Cover Literature CD Case Mounting Clips 1 4 2 Receipt of Shipment Inspect each carton at the time of delivery for possible external damage Any visible damage should be immediately recorded on the carrier s copy of the delivery slip Carefully unpack each carton and check the contents against the enclosed packing list Inspect each item for any hidden damage that may or may not have been accompanied by exterior carton damage If it is found that some items have been damaged or are missing notify the Process Instrumentation Division of Siemens Energy and Automation immediately and provide full details In addition damages must be reported to the carrier with a request for their on site inspection of the damaged item and its shipping carton 1 4 3 Storage If a controller is to be stored for a period prior to installation review the environmental specifications in Section 13 Model Designation and Specifications 1 4 4 Typical Shipment Contents The items listed below are those typically included in a shipment and are subject to change 1 Siemens 353 Process Automation Controller model number per order qty 1 2 MMC or MMCplus memory card inserted in MMC socket on MPU Controller board qty 1 3 Power Input and Range Resistor Kit PN 16354 30 qty 1 1 8 April 2012 UM353 1B Introducti
252. defined by the range pointer parameter Alarms can be set to any engineering value within 10 to 110 of the range defined by the pointer If a range is changed the current alarm settings will be changed to be the same within the new range For example if a HI alarm is currently set at 100 0 with a range of 0 0 to 100 0 and the range is changed to 300 0 to 400 0 the HI alarm will be moved to 400 0 Each alarm can be enabled or disabled when in the quickset ALARM mode The configuration allows an alarm to be enabled or disabled on a cold start When an alarm is disabled it will not operate but will retain settings for return to the enabled mode Operator faceplate functions relating to alarms are described in the sections describing the specific faceplate controls and displays All alarms have the following features Deadband requires that the signal either drop below or exceed the limit setting by the amount of the deadband before the alarm clears goes low The alarm deadband is set as a fixed of the range pointer scale Delay In Time requires that the input remain above or below the limit setting for the delay time before the alarm trips goes high This can help prevent nuisance alarms that may be tripping due to process noise Delay Out Time requires that the input remain below or above the limit setting plus deadband for the delay time before the alarm will clear goes low This can help prevent inadvertent clearing of alarms
253. der or PC card slot is required e Transfer a configuration from controller to a PC running ilconfig at the a compatible card reader or PC card slot is required e Transfer the operating configuration from a removed controller to the replacement controller e Save an operating configuration prior to making changes to that configuration The operating configuration in the controller is written to the MMC root directory with the station serial number as the file name whenever e The MMC is inserted in the MMC socket The MMC is removed from the MMC socket e The controller is powered up e controller is powered down e configuration is edited and stored from the faceplate i e display assembly Any of the above five actions will cause a previously saved configuration file to be over written by the current configuration IMPORTANT To save a particular version of a configuration prior to making configuration edits select a unique 8 character file name and then press STORE to save the configuration refer to Figure 2 2 MultiMediaCard Road Map to change the file name After saving a configuration with a unique file name subsequent configuration edits will again be saved to the MMC root directory with the controller serial number as the file name unless you save them with a new file name Multiple file directories can be created on the MMC To transfer a configuration from one controller to another the
254. e Output O1 will first go high 1 for a time set by ON TIME and then it will go low 0 for a time set by OFF TIME It will continue to repeat this cycle until input 5 is asserted low 0 which forces O1 low 0 and ends the timing cycle ADAPTIVE ON TIME this feature is active only when input AT is configured It has a valid range of 0 0 to 1 0 and there are two separate modes of adaptive on time depending on the configuration of the OFF TIME parameter OFF TIME 0 0 The time cycle will remain fixed and equal to the value of ON TIME The output will be high for a period equal to ON TIME x AT OFF TIME gt 0 0 The output will be low 0 for a period equal to OFF TIME and will be high for a period equal to ON TIME x AT The time cycle equals ON TIME x AT OFF TIME POWER UP With the PU LAST parameter set to YES during a hot or warm power up the block will initialize the input output states and elapsed time at the last values During a cold start they will be set to 0 With PU LAST set to NO during a hot start the block will initialize the input output states and elapsed time at the last values During a warm or cold start they will be set to 0 Output 1 OFF TIME gt 0 0 ONO 1 ON TIME gt 0 0 ON OFF ON OFF INput AT null gt ON Output 1
255. e Real 42483 60 1 LADYTO3RT R W DYTO03 Remaining Time Real 42485 60 1 L OSTOSET 05703 Elapsed Time Real 42487 60 1 L OSTOSRT R W 05703 Remaining Time Real 42489 60 1 L RCTO3ET RCTO03 Elapsed Time Real 42491 60 1 L RCTO3RT R W Remaining Time Real 42493 60 1 L ROTO3ET Elapsed Time Real 42495 60 1 L ROTO3RT R W Remaining Time Real 42497 60 1 spares 42499 42509 60 1 6 10 April 2012 UM353 1B Data Mapping Analog Indicator ODA Code R W Description Range Register MB L P1ALF R W Process 1 Alarm A Limit Real 42451 60 1 L P1BLF R W Process 1 Alarm Limit Real 42453 60 1 L P2ALF R W Process 2 Alarm A Limit Real 42455 60 1 L P2BLF R W Process 2 Alarm B Limit Real 42457 60 1 L P3ALF R W Process 3 Alarm A Limit Real 42459 60 1 L P3BLF R W Process 3 Alarm B Limit Real 42461 60 1 LHP4ALF R W Process 4 Alarm Limit Real 42463 60 1 L P4BLF R W Process 4 Alarm B Limit Real 42465 60 1 L Q1F R W Quickset Hold 1 Real 42467 60 1 L Q2F R W Quickset Hold 2 Real 42469 60 1 L Q3F R W Quickset Hold 3 Real 42471 60 1 L Q4F R W Quickset Hold 4 Real 42473 60 1 spares 00000000 42475 42509 60 1 6 3 6 Static Loop Floating Point Data 32 bit IEEE Controller ODC Code R W Description Range Register MB R W Proportional Gain 0 001 100 0 43951 60 1 L TIF R W Integral Time 0 001 4000 0 min 43953 60 1 L TDF R W Derivative
256. e Siemens 353 and Procidia 353R Nodes Siemens SIREC Recorder Ethernet Capable I O Modules ilstation ilconfig Ethernet Modbus Foreign Device with Bridge Modbus Communications Modbus Figure 1 2 Ethernet Architecture Example April 2012 1 3 Introduction UM353 1B Often in this publication reference is made to the labels on the controller to ensure that the controller being installed has the correct power input I O communication options and approvals This is particularly important when non incendive requirements are present or critical process is involved where custom configuration or calibration has been created Label locations are shown in Figure 1 1 and typical labels are shown in Section 13 Model Designation and Specifications 1 2 FUNCTION BLOCKS Controller software is built on proven function block designs from previous controller products In many cases the controller has been enhanced with features only now possible with state of the art technology Function blocks are selected for use within a LOOP Multiple loops can be configured and each loop can be associated with an operator faceplate Certain blocks are used once within each loop e g controller setpoint auto manual others can be used as many times as needed Some notable features include Auto Tuning within the PID function blocks an expandable Sequencer that allows configuration of up to 250 s
257. e a word based on 16 discrete inputs to the function block to other stations over the Ethernet network Up to 32 DWE_ blocks are available Blocks are assigned in sequence controller wide with each use Digital data is On Off data packed into a 16 bit word The IP ADRES parameter is used to configure the IP address of the destination Modbus TCP device The MB ADRES parameter allows a Modbus address to be configured When connecting to other Siemens controllers the Modbus address is set to 1 In some cases other Modbus devices may use a different address or when going through a Modbus TCP gateway a Modbus network may have multiple devices each having a unique address The MB REG parameter identifies the location of the register in the Modbus device There are three write update options that can be configured by the UD TYPE parameter 1 oncE will write once to the START CL Modbus Starting Coil The controller will write when any block input value changes state DIGITAL WRITE ETHERNET DWE Input 0 Input T Quality Status lt aN 0 InputF gt DIGITAL WRITE ETHERNET Ethernet Network 2 P2P will update at the controller peer to peer rate set in the ETHERNET block 3 Ct will update at the cycle time of the controller null null null null null null null null null null null null null null n
258. e changed periodically increase inlet to 50 in equipment malfunctions Forced Air Ventilation for Enclosed Panels 7 2 April 2012 UM353 1B Installation 1 Identify contaminants and implement methods to reduce their presence 2 Install protective housing for field mounted controllers 3 When cleaning equipment and surrounding area especially the floor either vacuum away all dust and dirt or use a dampened rag or mop Sweeping or dry dusting recirculates dust and dirt 4 Clean or replace all air conditioning filters room air filters and equipment filters regularly 5 Inform all personnel with access to the equipment of the need for cleanliness 7 3 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION The following subsections provide guidelines and procedures for mounting controllers in a panel or rack The installation should be structurally rigid and the controllers should be squared in the panel or rack 7 3 1 Removable Connectors and Covers To gain access to the case mounted connectors a cover may need to be removed Reinstall the cover when wiring is completed As discussed above each connector has a removable portion that can be separated from the case mounted portion wired and then reattached This section will describe cover removal connector separation and connector installation COVER AND CONNECTOR REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1 Squeeze the cover slightly about 2 5 mm down from the top and push the cover upward See Fig
259. e folders and files stored on the card see the MultiMediaCard Roadmap Figure 2 2 If a file name is displayed stepping down will display either a load or save option File names and folder names are limited to 8 characters 3 2 April 2012 UM353 1B Function Blocks copy of the current configuration running in the controller is stored as file on the MMC This file is updated as changes are made at the local faceplate or as parameter changes are downloaded The file is stored in the root directory of the MMC using the serial number of the controller as the file name The MMC can be used to transfer configuration from controller that may have failed to replacement controller The firmware levels of the two controllers must be the same 3 1 2 SECUR Security The SECUR function block enables a user to lock out portions or all of the faceplate configuration functions SECURITY Five levels of security are available see Table 3 1 Each level is factory set to 000000 no security and can be changed by the user in the field to any number up to 999999 security combination should be assigned to each security level 1 highest 5 lowest level that remains at the default 000000 combination will have no security for the involved function s regardless of the security assigned to the other levels For example assume that level 1 is assigned security combination but level 4 remains at 000000 If controller cali
260. e o 00 00 pne the output when switching to auto This is accomplished by T L AG Manual Reset Time LAG 5 0 001 10 4000 0 010 forcing the reset component R to a value that will keep j ee GE R equal to the feedback value When the controller SIC AA LIE maximum SCALE Real 100 0 DIPIP Decimal Point Position preferred S 0 0 is switched to auto the value of the reset component will 1 T S ENGineering UNITS e Chap acd change back to the manual reset MR value at a rate A UIT OIT U NIE AUTOTUNE NO YES YES 1 9 DE V DEViation during Autotune S AUTO 2 5 to 25 0 AUTO determined by the MR TLAG setting When MRTRCK 1 od HIYIS HYSteresis during Autotune S AUTO 0 5 to 10 0 AUTO set to YES the manual reset MR will also track the S T E P output STEP on first Autotune 5 5 1040 10 4 4 AT DYNAMic settings S Fast Medium Slow feedback signal when input is low ATRESET POST POST Autotune Transfer 5 NO YES NO Input I when changed from low 0 to high 1 or high to INPUTP e loop tag blocktagoutput nul LINIPIUIT 6 INPUTS loop tag block tag output null low will cause the controller to initialize 1 e eliminate F input Fw loop tag block tag output any proportional gain
261. e of manual entry should be considered 8 6 April 2012 UM353 1B Controller and System Test 9 0 CONTROLLER AND SYSTEM TEST This section presents series of steps to verify controller operation and to help user become familiar with the functionality of the controller new controller is shipped factory configured with either Factory Configured Option FCO101 Single Loop Controller or user specified custom configuration The following procedure is for FCO101 with factory set parameter values If custom configuration was installed or if you have configured the controller it may be necessary to modify the procedure to test all function blocks in that configuration To determine the current configuration of controller either e refer to your configuration documentation for that controller e upload the configuration to PC running the Graphical Configuration Utility where the configuration can be viewed enter the configuration mode and step through the configuration recording the configured function blocks and entered parameter values In the following steps press indicates a faceplate button key 9 1 CONTROLLER CONFIGURATION AND TEST The purpose of this section is to configure and test the controller and to familiarize the user with the controller s faceplate pushbuttons pulser and displays This section also introduces several configuration topics 9 1 1 Connections and Power 1 Connect power to the
262. e setting view or change DEV peak peak process deviation that the autotuner will maintain during test HYS The process change needed before the valve output will switch AUTOTUNE Setto YES and STORE to start autotune Press EXIT CONF to return to normal operator faceplate operation AT PG Proportional Gain setting recommended by the autotuner ATTI uses Integral Time setting recommended by the autotuner AT TD Derivative Time setting recommended by the autotuner STORE Pressing STORE transfers autotuner recommended settings to controller While autotuning the controller will continue normal operation Pressing the A M button to switch the controller to Manual will terminate autotune While in autotune the alphanumeric display will alternate between AUTOTUNE and the loop tag name and will stop alternating when the autotune program has been completed Once completed the controller will return to the mode prior to autotune initiation When the POST AT in the controller block is set to auto transfer the recommended tuning parameters will automatically be transferred to the controller and it will return to automatic control To review the AT parameters before initiating autotune press TUNE and then press STORE at the STORE AT prompt to transfer the recommended settings Chart 1 0 100406 range illustrates a typical autotune exercise The process has
263. e the difference between inputs A and B amplify the difference signal and sum the resultant with an internal BIAS and an external signal at input C Unused inputs are set to 0 0 1 GAIN x A B BAS C BIAS Input 4 X P Gan xr 01 Nr Output 1 I Input B c Input C BLOCK DIAGRAM DEVIATION AMPLIFIER DAM ESN 000 DEVIATION AMPLIFIER Input cD GIA I GAIN S Real BIAS INPUT 8 loop tag block tag output 1 INPUT B loop tag block tag output INPUT INPUT H loop tag block tag output E s Exec Seq H 001 to 250 1 0 0 0 null null null April 2012 3 33 Function Blocks UM353 1B 3 2 27 DIE Digital Input Ethernet DIE function blocks use Modbus command 04 Read Input Registers to enable the controller to read digital data from other stations over the Ethernet network DIGITAL INPUTS 16 CHAN ETHERNET DIE Up to 32 DIE_ blocks are available Blocks are assigned in sequence controller wide with each use Digital data is On Off data packed into a 16 bit word This data is fanned out to block outputs DO Output DO DIGITAL INPUTS BU 16 CHAN ETHERNET DF Ou
264. ears on alphanumeric display Press the STEP DOWN button to display CONFIGS Press the STEP DOWN button to display FCO in the lower display Press the STEP DOWN button until the FCO number appears in numeric display Rotate the Pulser Knob to display the desired FCO number in the upper display Press the STORE button to load the new FCO JON 90 103 SES Edit the as needed In addition to the material in this section refer to e Section 3 Function Blocks for details about configurable parameters e Section 4 Factory Configured Options for FCO diagrams and parameters e Sections 5 and 6 for Modbus also Modbus TCP mapping e Section 8 Local Faceplate Operation for operating controls and displays Where an FCO is not suitable a complete configuration can be designed to suit individual needs Section 4 can be used as a guide for documenting a user created or used edited configuration ilconfig the PC based Graphical Configuration Utility can be used to design document and save configurations as well as download them to the controller through either the configuration port or using a Modbus or Modbus TCP Ethernet network connection The above steps are illustrated in Figure 2 1 Configuration Road Map The map also provides a broad overview of the configuration procedure e Press the ENTER CONF button to enter the configuration mode Press the button again to exit configuration e After entering the configuration mode
265. eat e ie npe d e ect ee Hee e pede Dre De reed 7 18 7 4 10 Ethernet Wiring iret IP Ht e Hte o ep UTERE 7 18 7 4 11 Wiring to a Siemens SIREC D Recorder esee nennen rennen nre nnne 7 20 7 42 Power WADE sino e ettet d i eee tt 7 20 ko FACTORY CALIBRATION eb E M 7 22 8 0 LOCAL FACEPLATE 80004400010 0000 tn seta suse ta statuas en 8 1 8 NORMAL OPERATION io nasi acne RR ire 8 1 82 CONFIGURATION hg t Be eee te De le be 8 3 8 3 AUTOTUNE PROCEDUBRE 1955 ai othe ri bote eret npa Pete Peri ep eti od eden 8 4 9 0 CONTROLLER AND SYSTEM TEST seereovevvevensevverenseneenenseneenensneesenensensnensensenennenssnennenssnennenssnensenssnennenssnees 9 1 9 1 CONTROLLER CONFIGURATION AND TEST esee nee 9 9 11 Connections and POWE se tos d bet e Ope EU tO AREE PR SA 9 1 9 1 2 Confisurat nn me oerte br ire let ini 9 2 9 Iput Output ret Hr Drei 9 2 9 1 4 Auto Manual 2 th EU ee em dq e peo 9 2 9 1 5 Moditymg an niece pea tee edet be ecco dete ariete testi 9 2 9 1 6 Alarms eei bte o Certa ope ee EU HE E Le EHE 9 4 9 1 7 TAG unges 9 5 9 18 QUICK itt id eet eara e d i ese e 9 5 REMI
266. ection 7 Installation for terminal numbers and wiring guidelines Ensure that terminal screws are tight 2 If security is enabled a level 1 or level 4 security combination will be needed to store the results of a calibration Refer to SECUR Security in Section 3 1 2 for additional information 3 Apply power to the station 4 Press the ENTER CONF button to enter the configuration mode at the MENU level Rotate the Pulser Knob to select STATION on the alphanumeric lower display 5 Press the STEP DOWN button to choose options at the station level and rotate the Pulser Knob to select CAL on the alphanumeric display 6 Press the STEP DOWN button to enter the FUNCTION BLOCK level Rotate the Pulser Knob to select the desired input e g AIN1 or AIN2 7 Press the STEP DOWN button to enter the PARAMETER level 8 Rotate the Pulser Knob to select the desired parameter CAL ZERO shown on the alphanumeric display 9 Press the STEP DOWN button to enter the VALUE level CAL appears on upper display 10 Set the precision voltage source to the zero input value 0 000 to 1 000 Vdc 11 Press STORE to lock in the desired value If ENTER COM appears in the alphanumeric display security is enabled and steps 1 through 5 must be performed to store the calibration Otherwise go to step 14 1 The numeric display shows 000000 with the right most digit flashing Rotate the pulser knob to set the units digit to the correct number 2
267. ectors and plug mating connectors Connector Cover Case Mounting Clip and 8 32 x 1 Fillister Hd Screw qty 2 each Ground Screw Green qty 1 Replacement Ethernet Cable Kit for an Option 4 case 15720 368 Notes to Kits e Refer to User s Manual UM353 1B for accessory part numbers and for servicing a controller e Seedrawing s on previous page for disassembly and item reference numbers e Identifies a recommended on hand spare part for the indicated model Include nameplate information when ordering e Sample model number TGX 353 A4F1CNB4 e NS Not Shown 13 4 April 2012 UM353 1B Model Designation and Specifications 13 4 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS Panel Cutout Dimensions See Figure 7 2 Controller 5 See Figures 7 3 13 5 POWER INPUT REQUIREMENTS Voltage Input Model 353 A ansikt 85 264 Vac 47 63 Hz AC power ride through time 25 msec minimum Model 353195 eere s 24 Vdc 20 15 luni p 25 Watts 40 VA maximum Wire Size Recommended sss 18 AWG 0 96 mm Rear Terminals eese erento H Hot N Neutral G Ground Green Screw Over current Protection eese User supplied 20A maximum fuse or circuit breaker 13 6 MPU CONTROLLER BOARD SPECIFICATIONS Analog Inputs 3 Input one eene 0 5 Vdc standard calibration 1 5 Vdc 0 1 Vde SPA cssc ee
268. ed NOTE When power is applied to the controller an installed hardware list can be viewed in the STATN function block Refer to Section 3 1 3 for board description and ID Check all wiring between the controller and external equipment e g transmitters recorders power supplies Check for correct and secure connections correct wire gauge and insulation adequate support ties raceways conduit and protection from damage sharp edges moving equipment chemicals abrasion Test all equipment connected to the controller for proper operation Refer to the equipment manufacturer s literature as necessary Apply power to the controller and note the faceplate displays during power up See Section 10 3 for a list of the faceplate displays during power up Based on the controller hardware present the current configuration in the controller and the external equipment exercise the system in a systematic manner to ensure proper operation April 2012 9 7 Controller and System Test UM353 1B 9 8 April 2012 UM353 1B Maintenance 10 0 MAINTENANCE Controller maintenance requirements are minimal Activities such as cleaning and visual inspections should be performed at regular intervals The severity of the controller s operating environment will determine the frequency of maintenance Additional topics including troubleshooting assembly replacement and software compatibility are also covered Figure 10 1 shows an exploded vi
269. ed should additional force be applied to seat the board 10 12 April 2012 UM353 1B Maintenance 3 4 Disconnect wrist strap Install MPU Controller board and Display Assembly as described in previous sections IMPORTANT After replacing an I O Expander board in controller whose configuration includes an AINU function block assemble the controller apply power ENTER configuration and STORE the SEN TYPE parameter This must be done even if the SEN TYPE displays the desired type This will ensure that the function block loads the correct calibration from the new Expander board If desired a FIELD CAL can then be performed 2 m 7 16305 1 Serial 36 Firmware U18 038 EPROMs 27 i U37 g 3 E U33 Figure 10 5 Expander Board 10 5 5 Ethernet Cable Figure 10 6 shows the Ethernet cable REMOVAL 1 At the Ethernet connection on the MPU Controller board press the locking tab on the cable mounted RJ 45 connector toward the circuit board and withdraw the connector from the board mounted connector 2 Remove the Controller board and I O Expander board if present as described in preceding sections 3 Inside the case at the rear panel press the locking tab on the cable mounted connector upward and withdraw the connector from the rear panel mounted connector long flat blade screwdriver may be needed to press the
270. ed since the last reset This output is lt K factor SCALE t Real 40 real number and can be used in number of applications F I L T Dicital FILTer 9 0 180 0 sec A SCALE Real 0 0 such direct count input to batch totalizer MIA XISICJAIL maximum SCALE Real 1000 function block or in math operations such as computing the D P P Decimal Point Postion preferred 5 00 0 200 000 EINIGUINII TI S ENGineering UNITS 6 Char ASCII PRCT difference between counts in a ratio trim circuit 1 Power Up LAST 9 YES loop tag block tag output F LIN P U T D INPUT D loop tag block tag output Output IS is the current state of the input at the time the I NP U T INPUTTV loop tag block tag output loop tag block tag output null block is executed at the start of each controller scan cycle It will be low 0 when the input is low and high 1 when the input is high Output SF is scaled frequency using the FREQ MIN and MAX parameters that can represent flow rate speed or other transmitter variable that has frequency signal When the FREQ MAX parameter is set to 25 or less 20 msec contact debounce is used When contact debounce is used a p
271. efault has been selected If an override input is not configured the individual selector will output the other input When no inputs are configured the block will output 0 0 and the OS status will be set low 0 1 2 P gt seLector seLECTOR gt 01 Output 1 i HI LO HI LO 1 Override Input 1 gt OS P Override Status i 2 Override Input 2 Ee 22 5 555255550 0520 0 7 EE ANAE A 001 BLOCK DIAGRAM April 2012 3 63 Function Blocks UM353 1B 3 2 62 OST One Shot Timer OST function blocks provide high 1 output for predetermined time set by ON TIME when input P goes high 1 If input P goes low 0 the output will remain high until the time expires If input P goes high during the on time the elapsed timer will be re triggered if RETRIG is set to YES ON TIME is adjustable over the full range of the display which is 0 00000 to 999999 If the delay time is set to less than the scan time of the station the delay time will equal the scan time Output ET elapsed time will ramp from 0 0 to the value ONE SHOT TIMER LAST RETRIG LNPUT P EISIN Exec Seq No ON TIME minutes 5 Power Up LAST 5 RETRIGger on new pulse S NO YES YES INPUT P loop tag block tag output Elapsed Time RemainingTime Output 1
272. ene 5 1 5 1 neni onm REC P RR ERE PEU ERROR Ganske 5 1 6 0 DATA n 6 1 6L CONNECTING TO anil ata 6 1 62 STATION DAT Anti nep qaippe iic qe pn ep As EA 6 2 6 2 1 Integer D t 16 bit Integer 4 5 oet err e reri tto CR eh ook 6 2 6 2 2 Station String Data 8 bit ASCII Char 2 Word sese 6 4 6 2 3 Station Coil Data 1 bit ete oni bete ERE rer idee e eser aene d 6 4 6 3 OOP eee us E n ph 6 5 6 3 1 Dynamic Loop Integer Data scindere edet dte ee ters 6 5 6 32 Variable Loop Integer e det edis 6 6 6 3 3 Static Loop Integer Data Lura Saeras Rute ebd ele aa ae eins 6 8 6 3 4 Dynamic Loop Floating Point Data 32 bit IEBE eese 6 9 6 3 5 Variable Loop Floating Point Data 32 bit 6 10 6 3 6 Static Loop Floating Point Data 32 bit 6 11 6 3 7 String Loop Data 8 bit ASCII Char 2 6 13 6 3 8 Coil Loop Data e n non n d E RR CER CREE D LEE 6 16 6 3 9 PCOM Block Status taire tbe ien p eet e e tap e a ee yes bee etie 6 21 6 3 10 Sequencer Loop I O Coil Data 1 bit sese enne enne ener eene nennen 6 22 6 3 11 Trend Data Loop Defined by 2
273. entage of the range determined by the range pointer input R 2 will update at the controller peer to peer rate set in the ETHERNET block 3 Ct will update at the cycle time of the controller The Ct option is normally only used when writing to I O outputs in a PID control loop Input T can be used to trigger a write This would be used in cases where the oncE option has been selected Input S does not change so as to trigger a write based on the trigger dead band and there may be a concern that the receiving device has lost the value Output QS indicates the quality of the write operation and will go high 1 when the write is not completed successfully This is normally associated with failure of the destination device to receive data due to a communication failure or a misconfiguration of the device April 2012 3 25 Function Blocks UM353 1B 3 2 18 BATOT Batch Totalizer BATOT function blocks can be used on a one per loop BATCH TOTALIZER basis and integrate an analog input Each provides an output signal representing a total integrated value over the BATOT _ in R Total time base selected For example if the time base is Ext Count in Mam N ri minutes and input is 5 0 for 60 minutes output TL Analog Input A BATCH would equal 300 0 total can be displayed on the Stop E
274. er will adjust the step to keep the process within the value of the DEV parameter On subsequent autotune exercises the step will use the value computed from the previous exercise unless the AT RESET parameter is set to YES or the controller has been power cycled The dynamic response recommended by the autotuner can be configured as Fast Medium or Slow The Medium setting will normally provide a response that has no or little overshoot to a setpoint step response When the POST AT parameter is set to YES the control loop will be returned to Auto using the recommended tuning values unless a warning occurred during the test More details on autotuning can be found in Section 8 Local Faceplate Operation April 2012 3 75 Function Blocks UM353 1B 3 2 70 PRSEQ Program Sequencer PRSEQ function blocks are available on one per loop basis They PROGRAM SEQUENCER can be used to generate simple setpoint profile or complex batch EH sequence involving multiple discrete input and output logic PRSEQ ESN 000 Track Variable gt Analog Output operations as well as setpoint profiles i 4 Track Command fe gt Step Number PROGRAM k Step Forward SEQUENCER gt Step Time The number steps is con igurable using the STEPS parameter and step Backward 0 the number of discrete inputs outputs using the GROUPS parameter Goto step FED Sixteen 16 discrete inputs outputs are provided for each
275. eral Construction The equipment enclosure or parts of the enclosure required to be in place to comply with the requirements for protection from electric shock personal injury protection of internal parts and wiring and external cord and cable assembly strain relief shall comply with the following tests for mechanical strength e Impact Tests The equipment shall be held firmly against rigid support and shall be subjected to sets of three blows with 6 6 Joules 4 9 pound force inch from a spring operated impact hammer The hammer shall be applied to any external part that when broken is likely to expose live parts A window of an indicating device shall withstand an impact of 0 085 Newton meter 0 753 pound force inch from a hollow steel impact sphere 50 8 mm 2 inches in diameter and an approximate mass of 113 4 grams 4 ounces e Pressure Tests A force of 90 Newtons 20 pounds shall be applied from a metal rod 12 7 mm 0 50 inch in diameter the end of which is rounded The force shall be applied for one minute to any point on the overall enclosure except the bottom The bottom shall sustain a force of 65 Newtons 15 pounds Stability Test Equipment having a weight of 11 kilograms 24 pounds or more shall not tip over when placed at the center of an inclined plane that makes an angle of 10 degrees with the horizontal and then turned to the position with all doors drawers and other openable and sliding parts in the least
276. es and make removal more difficult 3 Remove the board from the bezel by carefully continuing to lift board while pulling the board out from under to Fixed Retainer at the top of the assembly 4 Ifthe bezel is being replaced 1 Remove the two Display Assembly mounting screws Turn the Assembly face up and lift each mounting screw upward until the threaded portion contacts the bezel Turn each screw counterclockwise to unscrew it from the bezel A screwdriver may be needed once a screw is started 2 Remove the flip down door by pressing on the door near its pivot point to free the door from the bezel Fixed Board Retainer Numeric Display 2 Alphanumeric Display 2 Connector Side View Notes 1 Grasp at this point Tee Keypad when removing board Connector 2 2 On other side of board 3 Press to remove and Part Number install door Serial Number Flexible Board Retainer Mounting Screw 2 Places Flip Down Door ge EG MG00387a Rear View Figure 10 4 Display Assembly Repair INSTALLATION 1 Place an anti static wrist strap on your wrist and connect the ground lead 4 2 Get the replacement bezel or get the replacement circuit board and remove it from the anti static bag 3 If the bezel is being replaced start threading each Faceplate mounting screw into the
277. ess the STORE button 22 Press ENTER EXIT CONF to return to normal operation Try displaying the process and setpoint Notice that these are now displayed in engineering units scaled 100 to 500 DEG or 300 at 50 Press the UNITS button to display the engineering units configured above April 2012 9 3 Controller and System Test UM353 1B 9 1 6 Alarms Upon power up FCO101 has 4 alarms enabled alarm at 110 on AINI e Loalarm at 1096 on AINI e Deviation alarm of 110 between and SETPT e Noalarm 1 Pressthe ALARM STEP DOWN button to step through the Alarm limits and Enable Disable Status Notice all the alarms are enabled and the alarm limits are displayed in engineering units on the numeric display and as a percentage of range by a flashing LED on the S bargraph If security clearance is satisfied the alarm limits can be changed by rotating the pulser knob Try changing the alarm limit A1 to 50 300 DEG F and press STORE to save the new value 2 Press EXIT to return to normal operation mode 3 Enter manual mode to display Loop01 V 4 Turn the pulser knob until both the valve output and process input are greater than 50 Note that the alphanumeric display will flash A1 HI and the L and S LEDs will flash Press the ACK button to acknowledge the alarm Alarms have a default priority of 3 see Alarm block in Section 3 2 10 meaning that the alarms must be acknowledged to clear the flashing Alarms m
278. ess the STORE button to change the controller parameters to the new values or press the ENTER EXIT CONF button to keep the defaults To cancel the AUTOTUNE before the tuning operation is complete press the A M button to enter MANUAL mode Refer to Section 8 3 for more details on the AUTOTUNE feature 9 6 April 2012 UM353 1B Controller and System Test 9 1 10 View mode When troubleshooting configuration it is often helpful to be able to view the intermediate outputs of function blocks that are not configured as display variables during normal operation This can be accomplished via the VIEW mode To enter VIEW mode 1 2 3 4 5 Press ENTER EXIT CONF to display LOOP Press STEP DOWN to display VIEW Press STEP DOWN to display the first output of the first configured function block Use the pulser knob or arrow buttons to scroll through the function block outputs Note that analog outputs are in engineering units and discrete status outputs represented by the black shaded arrows in the Function Block diagrams are either low 0 or high 1 Press EXIT to return to normal operation mode 9 2 SYSTEM CHECKOUT 1 Check that the correct circuit boards are installed and fully seated in the case as follows The controller model number on the P amp I drawing should match the model number on the controller s case Compare the model number to the Model Designation table in Section 13 to be sure the proper boards are install
279. et input R goes high 1 forcing it to position 1 The sequencer can be moved forward only when in position 1 Network communications will allow the sequencer to be moved to new step and the remaining time of the current step to be changed to new value When discrete groups are used and a step is desired as timed only one discrete input should be used to prevent the input mask from moving the sequencer to the next step This can be accomplished by requiring a high 1 input and then not connecting that input since unconnected inputs will be treated as 0 When discrete groups are used and a step is desired as event only TIMe parameter for the step should be set to 0 0 The Analog Output will remain at the AEP value of the previous step or if at step 1 the Analog value will be 0 0 When the sequencer advances to the next step the Analog Output will go to the AEP value for the completed step POWER UP During a warm start if PU LAST is set to YES all outputs step number track variable and remaining step time will be initialized at the last values prior to power fail During a cold start all outputs are initialized to 0 and the PRSEQ is in a reset condition Recipe Number RN Load Reci LR Recipe i Track Variable Analog Output Track Command gt Step Number Step Forward SN SF Step Time Step Backward PROGRAM amp SEQUENCE ST S
280. eters allowing the output signal to be scaled for engineering ranges other than the default of 0 100 PRCT This may be necessary when the controller output is the setpoint to another controller The Autotune feature is accessible using the TUNE pushbutton when AUTOTUNE is set to YES and can be initiated while the loop is in Auto or Manual The autotuner when initiated replaces the PIDAG with an on off control function places the block in Auto if in Man and cycles the control loop through six on off cycles while learning the process dynamics which it uses to provide tuning recommendations for the PIDAG controller The DEV parameter is the maximum amount in that the process should deviate from the setpoint during the on off cycles This parameter can be set manually or can be configured as AUTO When AUTO is configured the autotuner will set the DEV to 4 times the HYS This is the minimum value needed to provide good autotuning results The HYS parameter is the amount that the process must deviate from setpoint before switching the output in the opposite direction This value must be at least equal to or slightly greater than any process noise band If the noise band cannot be determined the autotuner will compute it at the start of an autotuning exercise when the HYS parameter has been configured as AUTO The STEP parameter is the amount that the valve will change on the first on off cycle After the first cycle the autotun
281. etpoint and valve U2 user priority 012345 9 y H Hor BAR ACtion s 2 Rev Dir Dir bargraphs must be configured to define the range of the VI A C valve Bar NETwork actio 2 ReviDir 00 H 1 Left Display 5 5 ASCII CLOSE variable inputs to P S and V these parameters are not Har BAR eee Su configured the bargraphs will be scaled using the oae dj s LIN T H loop tag block tag output nui engineering range of 0 00 to 100 00 The range pointer for LNIPIUIFI V meurvi Sen ie bat EA ulpa cut age X INPUT X loop tag block tag output null X and Y define the displayed decimal point position and the ty meurv m foul Fr 5 INPUT Global alarm acknowledge units code This information also defines the scaling of the INPUT Juli weurus v s tag blocktag output gt x 1 0 2 INPUT U2 loop tag block tag output loop information provided to remote workstation over the CIL eur ct w tag block tag output nul INPUTEL tag block tag output network Rev Input variables 5 V X and Y are shown in the numeric display using the engineering UNITS and the preferred DPP of the range pointer The
282. ew of the controller Before servicing or calibration the equipment note the following statements e Maintenance should be performed only by qualified personnel Failure to properly maintain the equipment can result in death serious injury or product failure This manual should be carefully reviewed understood and followed e The steps in the Preventive Maintenance section below should be performed regularly The procedures in this section do not represent an exhaustive survey of maintenance steps necessary to ensure safe operation of the equipment Particular applications may require further procedures Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser s purposes the matter should be referred to the local Siemens sales office The use of unauthorized parts in the repair of the equipment or tampering by unqualified personnel will result in dangerous conditions that can cause death serious injury or equipment damage Follow all safety instructions contained herein A WARNING Electrical shock hazard 9 Y Can cause death or injury e Remove power from all wires and terminals before working on equipment e n potentially hazardous atmosphere remove power from equipment before connecting or disconnecting power signal or other circuit e Observe all pertinent regulations regarding installation i
283. f the Week calculated by the 353 corresponds to the MONTH DAY amp YEAR The Clock Status output will go high if there is a problem with the clock or the clock has been reset The Battery Status will go high if the battery is low The battery low condition could also cause a clock reset when the power is cycled These REAL TIME TRIP TIME TRIP S lt lt om 3999 TM TiMe Trip DT DaTe Trip DY DaYs Trip cs Clock Status 5 Battery Status 00 00 00 23 59 59 0 1970 3099 1999 outputs can be used to trip User Status alarm condition or in logic to force loop to manual standby hold etc Status outputs could be intermittent and may require configuration of function block logic to latch the status and operator interaction using pushbutton switches to clear 3 84 April 2012 UM353 1B Function Blocks 3 2 80 SCL Scaler SCL function blocks provide means to scale an analog signal It will re range signal by using the range pointer to reference the function block with the original range When the range pointer input R is not configured the function block will not re scale the input signal but will pass it directly to the output The purpose under this situation would be to provide minimum and maximum scale preferred decimal point
284. fer Switch Function Block INPUT ST Input ST SEC PB2SW PS INPUT E Input SEC SPLIM O1 INPUT I Input I SEC SETPT O1 ESN Exec Seq No 25 PID PID Controller Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer SEC AIN2 OR INPUT P Input P SEC AIN2 01 INPUT S Input S SEC E L O1 INPUT Input F SEC A M O1 INPUT Input INPUT I Input I SEC E LES ESN Exec Seq No 30 A M Auto Manual Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer SEC PID OR INPUT P Input A SEC PID O1 ESN Exec Seq No 35 OR01 OR Function Block INPUT A Input A SEC A M NA INPUT Input SEC E LIS ESN Exec Seq No 40 OR02 OR Function Block INPUT A Input A SEC A M NA INPUT B Input SEC E LES ESN Exec Seq No 45 Analog Output 1 Function Block PTR Range Pointer SEC PID OR INPUT S Input S SEC A M OI ODC Operator Display for Controllers P RG PTR P Range Pointer SEC AIN2 OR V RG PTR V Range Pointer SEC PID OR INPUT P Input P Process SEC AIN2 OI INPUT S Input S Setpoint 1 INPUT V Input V Valve SEC A M OI LOOP Loop ft 02
285. ff cycles After the first cycles the autotuner will adjust the step to keep the process within the value of the DEV parameter On subsequent autotune exercises the step will use the value computed from the previous exercise unless the AT RESET parameter is set to YES or the controller has been power cycled The dynamic response recommended by the autotuner can be configured as Fast Medium or Slow The Medium setting will normally provide response that has no or little overshoot to setpoint step response When the POST AT parameter is set to YES the control loop will be returned to Auto using the recommended tuning values unless warning occurred during the test More details on autotuning can be found in Section 8 Local Faceplate Operation April 2012 3 71 Function Blocks UM353 1B 3 2 68 PID PID Controller PID is a proportional integral controller and one of five controller types that can be used on a one per loop basis It PID CONTROLLER uses external feedback to provide integral action The block allows interaction with other function blocks ESN 000 external devices such as pneumatic controllers and shutoff Range R ee g FN utput Range switches to eliminate the windup that can occur with other Process 2 2 R PID Output controller types Derivative action is provided when the Set
286. g Output 1 Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer Loop01 PID OR INPUT S Input S 01 1 4 4 April 2012 UM353 1B Factory Configured Options ODC Operator Display for Controllers P RG PTR P Range Pointer Loop01 AIN1 OR V RG PTR V Range Pointer Loop01 PID OR X RG PTR X Range Pointer Loop01 AIN2 OR INPUT P Input P Process Loop01 AIN1 01 INPUT S Input S Setpoint 01 1 INPUT V Input Valve 01 1 INPUT X Input X X Variable Loop01 AIN2 01 LOOP Loop ft 01 Digital Output 1 Function Block INPUT Input S Loop01 ALARM A1 DOUT2 Digital Output 2 Function Block INPUT Input S Loop01 ALARM A2 April 2012 4 5 Factory Configured Options UM353 1B 4 4 FCO104 External Set Controller with Non Tracking Local Setpoint Factory Configured Option FCO104 provides a single loop controller with external setpoint configured in Loop01 A block diagram of the loop configuration is shown below along with any changes to the default parameter values of the configured blocks If the loop tag LOOPO1 is changed all configured references will automatically be changed to the new tag External Setpoint pour 2 0 00 100 00 PRCT EN 2 gt ALARM gm AN2 7 x pun 2 wf SETPT Process
287. g the ACK button Table 8 1 Autotune Errors ERROR DESCRIPTION A zero crossing did not occur within 120 minutes Most likely caused by the control loop not being in a steady state condition when the autotuner was started E2 Process went out of range twice lt 0 gt 100 The first time an out of range occurs the autotuner will cut the valve step size in half and restart the exercise When autotune algorithm has been set to HYS and it calculates required hysteresis value greater than 10 Process filtering should be added to reduce the noise seen by the autotuner Autotuner Warnings do not terminate the autotune exercise and are normally eliminated by increasing the HYS and or the DEV settings In some cases they may have been caused by load changes that occurred during the autotune exercise The autotuner will still derive recommended tuning values but they will not automatically be transferred to the controller if that feature was requested The warnings can be cleared by pressing the ACK button Table 8 2 Autotune Warnings W2 Indicates that the process deviations during the first one and a half cycles where the autotuner first KE W3 Indicates that the average DEV values during the final phase of the autotuning exercise were not greater than 4 times the HYS setting If this warning occurs while the DEV selection was set to A auto selection of deviation setting the us
288. ge Track Variable SETPOINT Track Command fe stat Ramp ED Limit Pulser Up 80 Limit Pulser Down gt Output 1 P TIR RanGe PoinTeR 5 loop tag block tag Ramp RATE units Real 10 0 1 Ramp TIME min s 3840 0 T A RIG E T TARGET setpoint s Real 0 0 U S E USE ramp RATE 5 I CIK S E T QUICK SET setpoint values 5 NO YES YES S E T PIT Power Up SETPoinT s LIA S T Power Up LAST lt I NIPIUT TIV input TV loop tag block tag output T C input TC loop tag block tag output nulh S R INPUT SR H tag block tag output IN PUI T L U INPUT LU loop tag block tag output nulh L D INPUT LD tag block tag output E S N Exec Seq No H 001 to 250 configured the block will use 0 00 to 100 00 range of the setpoint block will be limited to 10 to 110 of the range parameter If a range change is made the current setpoint ramp rate target setpoint and power up setpoint will be moved to be the same values within the new range The setpoint block also has two inputs LU and LD that can be used to limit pulser changes in one direction This can be used if another function block is limiting the setpoint and it
289. gital Input 1 DIN1 11 Neutral or DC N gt oim Digital Input 1 DIN 12 DO so m DO Digital Input 2 DIN2 13 DO D DO mv Digital Input 2 DINZ 14 L 12 e Digital Input 3 DIN3 15 SP YS Digital Input 3 DIN3 16 O Sil 34 2 Ge Analog Output 1 AOUT1 17 Analog Output 1 2 Common AOUTC 18 11 2 Analog Output 2 AOUT2 19 SU Ethernet 2 52 Analog Input 1 AIN1 20 lt Connector 4 Terminal Function ID and Number D Terminal Number Function and ID Analog Input 1 2 Common AING 21 Z 2 35 Digital Input Universal 1 DINU1 Analog Input 2 AIN2 22 DO 36 Digital Input Universal 1 DINU1 Analog Input 3 AIN3 23 2 37 Digital Input Universal 2 DINU2 Analog Input 3 Common AING 24 eu NS 38 Digital Input Universal 2 DINU2 I O Bus A IOA design level A only 25 15 OS 39 Transmitter Power 26 Vdc XMTR I O Bus IOB design level A only 26 40 Transmitter Station Common Relay Output 1 Normally Closed ROUT1nc 27 SO 11 4 41 Input 4 AIN4 Relay Output 1 Common 1 28 pul 42 Analog Input Common Relay Output 1 Normally Open ROUT1no 29 OF OG 43 Digital Input 4 DIN4 Relay Output 2 Normally Closed ROUT2nc 30 OS 44 Digital Input 4 DIN4 Relay Output 2 Common ROUT2c 31 bu Od 45 Analog Input Universal 1 a AINU1a Relay Output 2 Norma
290. hart 1 but more significant noise The autotuner settings were the same but the results of this test produced warning W3 and recommended settings of P 1 40 amp I 0 42 In most cases with warnings the autotuner will provide tuning recommendations but they may be more conservative Manual settings for the HYS and DEV can be considered as described in the section Autotuner Warnings Steady State Conditions must be established for the process and controller prior to starting an autotune exercise The autotuner can be initiated while in manual or auto Steady state is reached when the present valve signal has brought the process to its present value and the setpoint is equal to the process When not at steady state valve cycles will not be symmetrical as illustrated in the second tuning exercise in chart 2 or as a worse case situation the valve may not cycle at all If the valve is does cycle although not symmetrically adequate tuning results will still be obtained April 2012 8 5 Operation UM353 1B Process L DAA VAVAVAVA E AVR OTA AUAVAVAVATATATAVAVA Process mini Valve VAMAMAMA Py LN A MAN VM TAG Valve Setpoint Step Change Start Autotuner Figure 8 2 Chart 2 Autotune Autotuner Errors terminate the autotune exercise and returns the control loop to the point prior to the start of autotune An Error message can be cleared by pressin
291. hat has the R INT2 7 RS485 link jumper label INT3 one pair AG00336a Entrelec ILPH 084 233 11 Isolated Converter 7 4 10 Ethernet Wiring sample architecture and brief description are Model 353 Industrial Ethernet amp presented in the Introduction section of this manual An with Ethernet Shielded Cable E RJ 45 Ethernet connector is located on the back of the i Model 353 or case Ethernet cables external to the controller must be with Ethernet Switch mr rated Category 5 or better Shielded cable or the use of fiber optic transmission is highly recommended outside Monets Siemens Industrial 51 with Ethernet Ethernet Fast Connect the panel or cabinet as shown at right Many Ethernet Panel or Cabinet PN 66K1901 1FC00 0AAO switches offer fiber optic ports as an option 7 18 April 2012 Modbus Communications Personal Computer to Model 353 Notes Single Point EN Earth Ground UM353 1B Installation To APACS 485 to RS232 Serial Port Isolated Converter M odel 353 Model
292. he button is pressed An unconfigured NC input defaults to 0 and an unconfigured NO input to 1 The button can be remotely activated through a command over Modbus or Modbus TCP where explicitly stated in Section 6 Data Mapping PB3 SWITCH L PB3SW NC Input m NO Input mp Message Display mp HON LAST MD ST MD LO ST INPUT NC HIN PiU JIN PUT MD PB Switch Output PB3 Switch Switch ACTION 9 Power Up LAST E YES MD HI STatus message S 5 ASCII Char GREEN MD LO STatus message 5 5 ASCII Char RED MD HI ACtion message 5 5 ASCII Char RED MD LO ACtion message 5 5 ASCII Char GREEN INPUT NO loop tag blocktag output null INPUT NC loop tag block tag output null INPUT MD loop tag blocktag output Exec Seq No 001 to 250 This block operates with an operator faceplate that includes green and red LEDs that are turned on using input MD A HI 1 input will turn on the Green LED and a LO the Red LED The default connection will be the PS output of the block but should be changed as required to display the correct status The message parameters do not apply to the current product Su
293. his is the minimum value needed to provide good autotuning results The HYS parameter is the amount that the process must deviate from setpoint before switching the output in the opposite direction This value must be at least equal to or slightly greater than any process noise band If the noise band cannot be determined the autotuner will compute it at the start of an autotuning exercise when the HYS parameter has been configured as AUTO The STEP parameter is the amount that the valve will change on the first on off cycle After the first cycle the autotuner will adjust the step to keep the process within the value of the DEV parameter On subsequent autotune exercises the step will use the value computed from the previous exercise unless the AT RESET parameter is set to YES or the controller has been power cycled The dynamic response recommended by the autotuner can be configured as Fast Medium or Slow The Medium setting will normally provide response that has no or little overshoot to setpoint step response When the POST AT parameter is set to YES the control loop will be returned to Auto using the recommended tuning values unless warning occurred during the test More details on autotuning can be found in Section 8 Local Faceplate Operation April 2012 3 73 Function Blocks UM353 1B 3 2 69 PIDAG PIDAG Controller PIDAG is an adaptive gain proportional integral controller and is one of five controller types
294. hronize its time with the master The time is also available in Modbus registers for display on the operator display e g ilware The clock is powered by the controller battery when shut down Battery condition can be checked from the faceplate using the BAT OK parameter in the STATN Station function block In addition the RTT function block has a battery status output that can be used to trip an alarm or force a loop to a desired state e g manual standby hold 3 1 5 ETHERNET Ethernet Communication Network Use this function block to configure Ethernet communication parameters The default IP addresses ETHERNET shown are used for factory testing in a network environment and should be changed to meet individual system requirements 353 controllers that will be ETHERNET communicating with each other or the HMI must reside on the same subnet Consult your company s network administrator for assistance in determining IP addresses Also consider any network security issues that can arise when networking plant areas ETHERNET IP ADdRESs S 1 2 3 4 192 168 0 2 IP MASK 5 1 nnn 2 nnn 3 nnn 4 nnn 255 255 255 0 IP GATEway S 1 2 3 4 192 168 0 1 ETHernet DuPLeX S Auto HALF FULL ETHernet RATE 5 Auto 10 100 A Peer 2 Peer RATE 5 25 5 2 5 10 sec 5 gt 3 gt U gt gt gt I gt lt
295. i Pn 4 5 Vdc E E Single ended AGCUEAaGy seire se ipere eerte 0 10 R solution 1 eie eor en 0 024 Software Output Type Analog configurable default 0 0 100 0 Normal Mode gt 50 60Hz Input gt megohm Maximum Continuous Input Without Crosstalk 7 30 Vdc Without 30 Vdc Analog Outputs 2 Standard 4 20 mAdc Vo tess 4 mAdc trim ee e ene 16 mAdc trim Current Limits retener ette 2 4 mA to 21 6 mA ACCULACY 2e e aec ntes entre 0 196 Resolution see eee ien 0 003 Software Input Analog configurable default 0 0 100 0 Signal Reference seen Neg output tied to station common Output Load oes 800 Ohms Over voltage Protection 30 Vdc Digital Inputs 3 Logic 1 Range eee 15 30 Vdc Logic 0 Range 0 1 Vdc Over voltage eee 30 Vdc Minimum Required ON time gt Scan Time Software Output Type Digital Is olatio aho eoo gne reo 100 Vdc Digital Outputs 2 Type au shore etel en Open Collector Transistor emitter tied to station common Load Voltage
296. iew the sensor input over the full range The signal that is viewed in the calibration verify mode is 0 to 100 of span in basic units of measure e g C for temperature mv for millivolts and is not affected by the temperature units conversion digital filter scaling or the output bias adjustment The full block output in engineering units with these parameters applied can be seen in the VIEW mode within loop configuration This section describes calibration and calibration verification of the following function blocks AINI 4 Analog Input MPU board 3 and I O Expander board 1 AOUTI 3 Analog Output MPU board 2 and I O Expander board 1 When field calibrating a controller for a critical application consider the following e Ifthe input is a current signal e g 4 20 mA use a precision current source The 250 ohm precision range resistor installed across the input terminals for calibration should remain with the station connected across that set of terminals to eliminate the voltage drop variation due to resistor tolerance e Allow the Station to warm up for an hour prior to calibration The ambient temperature should be close to normal operating conditions The controller must be off line during calibration Factory calibration values are listed in Section 7 5 Refer to Table 7 1 and to the installation wiring figures in Section 7 Installation for power input signal input and signal output terminals A WARNING 9 E
297. ifice flow factor base ka E 5 Specific Heat Ratio 5 absolute flowing pressure upstream 5 ifi 1 1 PIL AIT E PLATE Material 5 1 03 2 55 hw orifice differential pressure I NIPUIT loop tag block tag output 1 1 loop tag block tag output Fa numeric conversion factor Tlf loop tag block tag output F orifice calculation factor Gir loop tag block tag output null LIN P U T 2 lt loop tag block tag output orifice slope factor INPUT 714 loop tag block tag output sl P 12 6 INPUTZb loop tag block tag output Y expansion factor upstream tap EISIN Exec Seq 00010250 000 Epp base pressure factor Fp base temperature factor Fr flowing temperature factor Fyr real gas relative density factor supercompressibility factor Output Qy is updated every scan cycle Output C is updated continuously for temperature effects and periodically for other effects The following conditions are considered in the calculations e Standard Conditions are P 14 73 psia T 60 F Zgajr 0 999590 e Nominal pipe size is 2 or larger Beta is 0 1 0 75 and Re Reynolds Number is 4000 or larger e Y expansion factor and absolute flowing pressure Pr are referenced to upstream tap i e Y
298. igh 1 when the station fails to receive Modbus network command within the watchdog period The watchdog time is set in the STATN Station Parameters function block ilware PC Faceplate Display April 2012 3 61 Function Blocks UM353 1B 3 2 59 ON OFF On Off Controller ON OFF is an on off controller with deviation function It is one of five controller types that can be used on one per loop basis When P S Process Setpoint reaches the HDEV limit the Boolean output HO will go high 1 and when S P Setpoint Process reaches the LDEV limit the output LO will go high 1 When the deviation drops to less than the DEADBAND setting the outputs will low 0 Derivative action is added to the process variable when the TD parameter is other than 0 0 When single ended action gap action is desired set the DEADBAND equal to the gap and the HDEV parameter for half the gap For example if DEADBAND 20 0 set HDEV to 10 If the setpoint is 50 0 output HO will go high 1 when P equals 60 0 and HO will go low 0 when P equals 40 0 Input E asserted high 1 will enable the block outputs when low 0 all outputs will be set low 0 ON_OFF CONTROLLER Range R Process P ON OFF Setpoint S CONTROLLER Enable rp RanGe PoinTeR 5 TD Time Derivative 5 DIG Derivative Gain 9 V High DEViation 9 Low DEVi
299. ignation and Specifications UM353 1B SIEMENS EC Declaration of Conformity EG Konformit tserkl rung No Sho011 11 07 Manufacturer Siemens Energy amp Automation Inc Hersteller Address Spring House Pennsylvania 19477 Anschrift USA Product description Multi Loop Controller Produktbezeichnung Typ TGX 353abFcdeBf mit a A D b 4 5 c N 1 dzN C ezN X fz4 W The product described above in the form as delivered is in conformity with the provisions of the following European Directives Das bezeichnete Produkt stimmt in der von uns in Verkehr gebrachten Ausf hrung mit den Vorschriften folgender Europ ischer Richtlinien berein 2004 108 EG Council Directive on the approximation of tha laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility EMC Richtlinie des Rates zur Angleichung der Rechtsvorschriften der Mitgliedstaaten ber die elektromagnetische Vertr glichkeit 2006 95 EG Directive of the European Parliament and of the Council of 12 December 2006 on the harmonization of the laws of Member States relating to electrical equipment designed for use LVD within certain voltage limits Richtlinie des Europ ischen Parlaments des Rates zur Angleichung der Rechtsvorschriften der Mitgliedstaaten betreffend elektrische Betriebsmittel zur Verwendung innerhalb bestimmter Spannungsgrenzen Spring House 16 11 2007 Siemens Energy amp Automation Inc John Sweeney Lawrence Anderson Approva
300. iguration Each function block description is supplemented by 1 drawing of the block showing data inputs and outputs and control lines 2 a block parameter table Most blocks are further described by a block diagram that shows the block s circuitry in a simplified or equivalent circuit form NOTES This User s Manual includes the functionality provided by MPU Controller Board Design Level B and firmware Version 4 0 Keep your controller firmware current by subscribing to updates The latest firmware version will often provide performance options e g additional function blocks parameter selections not available in an earlier version Function blocks have three types of inputs outputs digital analog and special data structure 1 Arrows with dark shading and white letters are digital outputs are displayed as 0 and 1 in the VIEW mode when using the local faceplate Digital outputs are typically used to designate function block status logical outputs and on off function block outputs Some examples are e Function block status E I status IS ES SI A M status AS NA MS ES SS and Quality Status QS e Logical Outputs AND 01 OR 01 NOR 01 or NOT 01 e On Off function blocks One Shot Timer 01 Retentive On Timer 01 Rising Edge Trigger 01 Alarms Al A2 A3 and A4 and Comparator 01 Arrows with medium shading and black letters are analog Internally they are REAL floating point numbers
301. iguration can be accomplished through several methods A configuration can be created on a PC running ilconfig and downloaded to a controller by way of 1 the port on the underside of the local faceplate 2 a network connection at the controller rear terminals either Modbus or Modbus TCP Ethernet or 3 MultiMediaCard MMC During download the controller will hold all outputs and it will retain all intermediate calculations by all blocks it was running prior to the download After the download all function block parameters with the same tag name as those held will be used to initialize the downloaded function block parameters thus Optional PC Based providing a bumpless download under these conditions If a loop tag name is changed Graphical Configuration Utility the tag names of all function blocks within that loop will change and will therefore require re initialization of all of these blocks However the loop tag can be changed from the local faceplate without causing re initialization providing bumpless tag change 0314551 2012 1 5 Introduction UM353 1B The MultiMediaCard MMC mentioned in the preceding paragraph is a small memory card that plugs into an MMC socket on the Controller board A card can be used to e Transfer configurations from a PC running ilconfig to a series of controllers at the PC a compatible card rea
302. il Data 1 bit Sequencer Code Description Range Coil MB SGOKIO Seq Group 0 step masK for Input 0 1 0 01496 SGOKIF Seq Group 0 cur step masK for Input F 1 0 01511 SGOSIO Seq Group 0 cur step State of Input 0 1 0 01512 SGOSIF Seq Group 0 cur step State of Input F 1 0 01527 560500 Group 0 step State of Output 0 1 0 01528 SGOSOF Seq Group 0 cur step State of Output F 1 0 01543 SGFKIO Seq Group cur step masK for Input 0 1 0 02216 SGFKIF Seq Group F cur step masK for Input F 1 0 02231 SGFSIO Seq Group F cur step State of Input 0 1 0 02232 SGFSIF Seq Group F cur step State of Input F 1 0 02247 SGFSOO Seq Group F cur step State of Output 0 1 0 02248 SGFSOF Seq Group F cur step State of Output F 1 0 02263 6 22 April 2012 UM353 1B Data Mapping 6 3 11 Trend Data Loop Defined by MLTP Code R W Description Range Register MB AIRMN R ATDO1 MIN SCALE Real 48001 AIRMX R ATD01 MAX SCALE Real 48003 A1DPP R ATDO1 Decimal Point Position 0 5 48005 A1EU R 01 Engineering Units 6 ASCII Char 48006 A1YR R ATDO1 Year V2 0 5 1997 48009 AIMT R ATDO1 Month V2 0 5 1 12 48010 AIDY R ATDO1 Day V2 0 5 1 31 48011 R ATDO1 Hour V2 0 5 0 23 48012 AIMN R ATDO1 Minute V2 0 5 0 59 48013 R ATDO1 Second V2 0 5 0 59 48014 AIST R W ATDO1 Sample Time x0 01 min 1 48000 48015 R ATDOI Sample Time Complete 0 1000 x 1 48016 AIDI R ATDOI Data 1 latest
303. ile contains one or more function blocks associated with Model 353R or Procidia Remove those function blocks to allow the file to be loaded e FileErr3 The file contains one or more unknown function blocks This is most likely caused by the presence of LIL or LON function blocks in the file the configuration may have been created for design level 353 Remove the unknown function blocks to allow the file to be loaded FileErr4 The file contains function blocks that require hardware that is not present in the station This is most likely caused by the absence of an I O Expander board Either remove the function blocks that require the Expander board from the file or install the Expander board FileErr5 The file contains a database revision that is not supported The file is not usable The database revision must be Rev 4 00 or higher 10 5 ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT The following describes replacement of the controller s assemblies The subsections below are organized in the sequence of controller disassembly and reassembly Most subsections have Removal and Installation paragraphs Controller disassembly is described by the Removal paragraphs and controller assembly is described by the Installation paragraphs Each circuit board assembly has a part number label and a serial number label Label locations shown herein may differ from actual assemblies TOOLS inch pounds is recommended Before handling an assemb
304. in the block diagram and the associated light to be configured When the EM input goes high 1 the Emergency Manual Switch switch 2 switches to manual If EM MAN is configured as YES the Manual Switch switch 1 and the indicator light will switch to the manual position assuming that switch I is in Auto and will remain in the manual position until the operator presses the A M button or command is received from an HMI to switch to Auto The EM Switch switch 2 will remain in the manual position until the EM status clears regardless of the position of the Manual Switch switch 1 If the EM MAN parameter is configured as NO the Manual Switch switch 1 and associated indicator light will not change position when the EM input goes high 1 LOCK MAN can be set to YES to lock the loop in manual when Emergency Manual has been activated The operator can switch the loop to Auto only when the EM condition has cleared This feature is available only when the EM MAN parameter is configured as YES The MAN ACCL parameter enables setting the acceleration rate applied to the pulser knob It can be configured for Slow Medium or Fast Slow is the default PRIORITIES The priority assigned to EM or SB PRIOR will affect the operation as follows the outputs ES and SS will go high with all priority assignments including 0 when event is active 1 Bargraphs event LEDs and condition will flash ACK button must be used to stop flashing 2 Bargraphs
305. includes an I O Expander board connectors with terminals 27 52 are also used The case has an RJ45 connector for use when Ethernet networking is utilized Connector locations are shown in Figure 7 5 Individual terminals functions are also identified in Table 7 1 Connectors Power terminals identified by letter Hot and Neutral The ground connection is made to green case safety ground screw located between connectors Signal I O terminals are identified by number 3 through 52 connector terminal will accept the following wire s e one 14 22 AWG 2 1 0 38 mm e two 16 AWG 1 3 mm e three 18 AWG 0 96 mm Wire Size Recommendations e signal wiring 18 AWG 0 96 mm e power wiring 18 AWG 0 96 mm Wire Stripping Recommendations e connector terminal wiring 1 4 6 mm to 5 16 8 mm e green ground screw wiring 1 8 10 mm to 1 2 13 mm Be careful not to nick the conductor or cut away strands 7 6 April 2012 UM353 1B Installation Wire Selection Stranded wire is recommended for most connections however solid wire is typically used for thermocouple extension wire Carefully select wire size conductor material and insulation Some selection considerations are current and voltage to be carried total length of each wire run whether wire will be bundled or run singly indoor or outdoor installation temperature extremes Use supply wires suitable for 5 10 F above ambient tempe
306. iring and away from AC powered pushbuttons alarms annunciators motors solenoids and similar devices Conduit and raceways are commonly used for routing panel wiring Wiring not installed in conduit or raceway should be clamped or supported approximately every 12 inches 300 mm April 2012 7 7 Installation UM353 1B Terminal Function ID and Number D Network Communications Case Safety Ground gt Network Communications B 4 D 0O e H ES Transmitter Power 26 Vdc XMTR 5 DD ER Transmitter Station Common 6 O DS 2 e 21 127 21 35 Transmitter Power 26 Vdc 7 N L1 N il IN D Te Digital Output 1 DOUT1 8 2 LT SN Digital Outputs 1 2 Common DOUTC 9 Power input 9 Digital Output 2 DOUT2 10 ACGHotorDC H gt E 2 Hg B 2 Di
307. is desired not to allow the operator to adjust the setpoint block to a value beyond the external limit POWER UP The function block can be configured to power up in various conditions during a warm start If the PU LAST parameter is set to YES the block will power up with the last setpoint When SETPT does not power up in last position or on a cold start it will power up using the PU SETPT parameter Output 1 A PU SETPT Pulser L5 LU LD Pulser Limit Track Variabl TV ENE SETPOINT TC I Track Command T Ramp Generator TARGET Setpoint gt RAMP gt S R ON OFF USE Ramp RATE Ramp RATE Ramp TIME Start Ramp BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 86 April 2012 UM353 1B Function Blocks 3 2 83 SIN SINE SIN__ function blocks accept a radian input and output the sine of that angle 01 BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 2 84 SPLIM Setpoint Limit SPLIM function blocks can be used on one per loop basis to limit the setpoint of the loop controller Input A will pass through the function block to output O1 unless it equals or exceeds the High limit setting or exceeds the Low limit setting at which time the block will output the limit value If the HI LIMIT is set lower than the LO LIMIT the block will alwa
308. is equipment is dependent upon proper handling installation operation and maintenance The perfect and safe operation of the equipment is conditional upon proper transport proper storage installation and assembly as well as on careful operation and commissioning The equipment may be used only for the purposes specified in this publication viii April 2012 UM353 1B Contents CAUTION Electrostatic discharge can damage or cause the failure of semiconductor devices such as integrated circuits and transistors The symbol at right may appear on a circuit board or other electronic assembly to indicate that special handling precautions are needed properly grounded conductive wrist strap must be worn whenever an electronics module or circuit board is handled or touched service kit with wrist strap and static dissipative mat is available from mail order and local electronic supply companies Electronic assemblies must be stored in anti static protective bags when not installed in equipment April 2012 ix Contents UM353 1B April 2012 UM353 1B Introduction 1 0 INTRODUCTION This User s Manual contains configuration installation and service information for the Siemens 353 Process Automation Controller It is divided into fourteen sections Section 1 Introduction has general information about the organization of this manual the controller product support and the conte
309. is inserted in a 353 and the file name viewed on the 353 faceplate the 8 3 file name 8 characters and a 3 character extension will be shown Typically a tilde and an incrementing number replace the characters following the initial 6 characters of the file name the 3 character extension is not affected For example if a configuration named Boiler01DraftFanSafety is created in ilconfig and saved to an MMC the short file name may be contracted to for example Boiler 1 If additional similarly named Boiler configurations with long file names are saved to the same MMC the contracted file names may make it difficult to identify a specific configuration The contracted file names may be Boiler 1Boiler 2 Boiler 3 and so on Before saving the configuration to the MMC examine the file name and create a file name that places the characters critical to configuration identification at the beginning of the file name 10 14 April 2012 UM353 1B Calibration 11 0 CALIBRATION A controller is factory calibrated to either the standard values listed in Section 7 5 Factory Calibration or to values specified by the purchaser at time of order Field calibration should not be necessary For those cases where inputs or outputs must be adjusted either to meet local standard or for more critical application a field calibration can be performed The field calibration becomes the default calibration A CAL VIEW meode is available in calibration to v
310. is publication An electronic copy of this publication furnished on CD ROM is shipped with the equipment The current version in Portable Document Format PDF is available at the Siemens Internet site refer to Section 1 3 Customer Product Support for the URL For the purpose of this publication and product labels a qualified person is one who is familiar with the installation construction and operation of the equipment and the involved hazardous In addition he or she has the following qualifications 5 trained and authorized to energize de energize clear ground and tag circuits and equipment in accordance with established safety practices e strained in the proper care and use of protective equipment such as rubber gloves hard hat safety glasses or face shields flash clothing etc in accordance with established safety practices e Is trained in rendering first aid General Warnings and Cautions This equipment contains hazardous voltages and it has been certified for use in the hazardous locations specified on the product nameplate and in Section 13 Model Designation and Specifications Death serious personal injury or property damage can result if safety instructions are not followed Only qualified personnel should work on or around this equipment after becoming thoroughly familiar with all warnings safety notices and maintenance procedures contained herein The successful and safe operation of th
311. isions eee 3 5 3 4 Floating Point Number Formats ATE 402201111 1 2 eren enne enne nennen trennen enne 3 15 3 5 Integer Default Values ATE Block ronrororororrorarnrororonessvnerenenensererenenrtvesnrenenenenreveneresrnsnrnrenensasnresenenenseneverenee 3 15 3 6 FB Numbers vs Modbus Registers AIE 1 eene nennen ennt nennen 3 15 3 7 Input Rte neo ee Re Or e D ertet NE 3 18 3 8 Calibration Input Values AINU 1 nennen nennen nenne a ae trennen enne 3 18 3 9 SEN MIN MAX and MIN MAX SCALE Parameters AINU Block eene 3 18 7 1 Rear Terminal Assignments iin eee ricette bte ect de Te Goit 7 9 7 2 Factory Calibration sssi oree hini 7 22 8 I Autotune BIrOIS 8 6 8 2 Aut tun butten 8 6 10 1 Off Line Error Codes m eR Ge deer E UD Dr dere e tera 10 6 10 2 Qn Eme Error and Status Codes 3 45 oie ode de die dade dtes 10 7 13 1 Siemens 353 Model Designations seniorene n EE 13 2 Changes for Rev 4 April 2012 Section Change Cover Manual Rev number and date updated page dates changed throughout manual 3 Function Blocks Section 3 2 8 AIN Analog Inputs Verify mode description revised Section 3 2 9 AINU Analog Inputs Universal First paragraph revised Section 3 2 1
312. it The alarm status will clear 0 when the process is VIEW view operator Display NO YES ves E exse 5 LOOP gt Loop s 011025 less than the high limit minus the deadband or greater than the low INPUT INPUTPIW looptapHiookiagoupul E INPUT P2 INPUTP2w loop tag block tag output limit plus the deadband INPUT P3 inpuTPs i tag blocktag output INPUT INPUTP4 loop tag block tag output 3 52 April 2012 UM353 1B Function Blocks Alarms have priorities 1 to 5 with 1 the highest Alarms are reported to the operator faceplate in order of priority first and then in order of occurrence Priority I causes the station bargraphs and condition e g 1 HI to flash and requires acknowledgment to stop flashing Priority 2 also flashes the bargraphs and condition but stops flashing when the alarm clears i e Self Clearing Priority 3 causes the event LEDs L and and condition to flash Flashing stops only when the alarm is acknowledged Priority 4 causes the event LEDs and condition to flash but flashing stops when the alarm clears Priority 5 displays the alarm but does not require that it be acknowledged Alarm limits are in engineering units A quickset ALARM feature is also available allowing alarm limits to be set quickly during operation The settings are in engineering units but will also be displayed in of range on the setpoint bargraph when viewing a point Alarms are displayed as
313. ive Loop Bargraph height shows the setpoint as the of range value The setpoint in engineering units can be viewed by pressing the D button to display the dot S parameter e g TC2053 S e P Bargraph this vertical bargraph displays the scaled range of the controller process in the Active Loop Bargraph height shows the process as the of range value The process in engineering units can be viewed by pressing the D button to display the dot P parameter e g TC2053 P e Pulser Knob rotate the Pulser to change the value in the numeric display e g Setpoint Valve or other variable configured for normal operator display changes such as Ratio Bias The Pulser knob is also used in configuration to change values in the alphanumeric display An accelerator is included Turning the knob faster multiplies the rate of change of the displayed parameter Large value changes then require fewer knob rotations Bargraph this horizontal bargraph displays the scaled range of the controller output in the Active Loop The output valve signal is shown as the of range value The value in engineering units can be viewed by pressing the D button to display the dot V parameter e g TC2053 V e STORE Pushbutton behind the flip down door on the lower quarter of the faceplate activates display test lighting all elements in the 6 digit numeric display the 8 charactger alphanumeric display the horizontal and vertical bargraphs and individual LE
314. k diagram of the configuration of the two loops is shown below along with the changes made to the default parameter values of the configured blocks The process range of the Primary loop can be changed in Analog Input 1 and the range of the Secondary loop in Analog Input 2 Also the output range of the primary PID controller must be changed to match any new range in the secondary loop If the loop tag PRIM or SEC is changed all configured references will automatically be changed to the new tag EP Primary Process am H F ALARM PRIM Primary PB2SW SPLIM 5 ORO1 O1 TV E SE e ASETET m ES ORO2 LD Secondary Process o os 2 EN 01 O1 5 CEN 7 Rev 2 Primary Loop SETPT Setpoint Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer PRIM AIN1 OR INPUT TV Input TV PRIM AIN1 01 INPUT TC Input TC PRIM A M NA ESN Exec Seq No 5 SEC Secondary ALARM Alarm Function Block PTR Range Pointer PRIM AIN1 OR INPUT P Input P PRIM AINI OI INPUT D Input D PRIM SETPT O1 ESN Exec Seq No 10 April 2012 4 13 Factory Configured Options UM353 1B Primary Loop cont PID PID Controller Function Block RG PTR Range
315. l Message b Conditional Message c Conditional Message d Conditional Message e Conditional Message f Conditional Message g Conditional Message h Conditional Message I Recipe Message spares Range 12 ASCII Char 4 ASCII Char 6 ASCII Char 6 ASCII Char 6 ASCII Char 6 ASCII Char 6 ASCII Char 8 ASCII Char 6 ASCII Char 8 ASCII Char 6 ASCII Char 5 ASCII Char 5 ASCII Char 0000 Range 12 ASCII Char 8 ASCII Char 12 ASCII Char 16 ASCII Char 16 ASCII Char 16 ASCII Char 16 ASCII Char 16 ASCII Char 16 ASCII Char 16 ASCII Char 16 ASCII Char 16 ASCII Char 12 ASCII Char 0000 Register MB 45451 100 1 45457 100 1 45459 100 1 45462 100 1 45465 100 1 45468 100 1 45471 100 1 45474 100 1 45478 100 1 45481 100 1 45485 100 1 45488 100 1 45491 100 1 45492 45550 100 1 Register MB 45451 100 1 45457 100 1 45461 100 1 45467 100 1 45475 100 1 45483 100 1 45491 100 1 45499 100 1 45507 100 1 45515 100 1 45523 100 1 45531 100 1 45539 100 1 45545 45550 100 1 Conditional messages are stacked in the order of 9 most recent active conditional messages be viewed April 2012 6 13 Data Mapping UM353 1B Analog Indicator ODA Code R W Description L TAG R Loop Tag 1 1 R Process 1 Tag L P1U R W Process 1 Units L P2T R Process 2 Tag L P2U R W Process
316. l phase operations for the batch ReSet and the logic performing the control logic for each HUN IRN ENabled phase The logic performed by the PCOM block is detailed in Boolean form in Figure 3 1 Network communication can be either Modbus or Modbus TCP Details are 73 pone 0 STart HOId listed in Section 5 Network Communications The p 5 R l og 9 on gt ne n i nterlocKe ity 0 1 2 3 4 LOOP configured in the ODC or ODS function block PIRTIOR Device Fail PRIORIN 22210423845 4 for the loop determines the location of the status coils in I NIPU T INPUT EO loop tag block tag output INPUT OK loop tag block tag output null the Modbus Mapping Communication states LIN P U T INPUT PF loop tag block tag output represented in Figure 3 1 on the next page using the INPUT RD tag block tag output symbols shown below Modbus states are mapped in u T IR N INPUT RN loop tag block tag output INP T H INPUT loop tag block tag output coils as defined in Section 6 3 9 PCOM Block Status INPUTDN loop tag block tag output nul 5 Exec Seq 000to 250 000 R
317. lectrical shock hazard Hazardous voltage can cause death or serious injury Remove power from all wires and terminals before working on this equipment Security Calibration of Inputs Outputs If level 1 and level 4 security are enabled the user determined six digit security combination e g 000025 for either level 1 or level 4 must be entered before new calibration parameters can be stored Once the security combination has been entered access will be provided to all functions with that security level until the user exits configuration For additional information refer to function block SECUR Security in Section 3 1 2 Bargraphs The bargraphs on the Display Assembly are not used during the calibration procedure Ignore any bargraph indications during calibration Calibration and calibration verification are described in the following procedures April 2012 11 1 Calibration UM353 1B 11 1 ANALOG INPUT AIN1 4 Analog input function blocks have been factory calibrated for 1 to 5 Vdc inputs Recalibration should not be required unless calibration parameters are to be changed Periodic recalibration should not be necessary To calibrate an analog input use the following procedure 1 Atthe controller s rear terminals connect an electronic calibrator or precision reference source capable of supplying a voltage between 0 000 and 5 000 Vdc to the selected analog input terminals e g AIN1 AIN2 Refer to S
318. ler board 7 2 ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS Operate a controller within its environmental specifications to help ensure reliable trouble free operation with minimum down time Refer to Section 13 Model Designation and Specifications for controller operating temperatures limits operating humidity and maximum moisture content April 2012 7 1 Installation UM353 1B TEMPERATURE Maintain the temperature of the air surrounding an operating controller below 50 C 122 F Check air temperature periodically to ensure that this specification is not being exceeded CAUTION Exceeding the specified operating temperature limits can adversely affect performance and may cause damage to the controller Forced air ventilation is recommended when controllers are mounted in partially or completely enclosed panel or cabinet e g NEMA 1 as shown at right When clean air is present exhaust fans are often mounted across the top of a panel and louvers formed in the panel bottom Air is then drawn upward between the station cases When air contains particulate matter fans and filters are generally located at the panel bottom and louvers at the top Filtered air is now forced upward between the station cases Filters must be serviced periodically Fan with Only high quality quiet running fans should be used Finger Also the fans should not generate electrical noise Guard which could interfere with electronic instruments 3 A sealed cabinet
319. lly Open ROUT2no 32 LI 46 Analog Input Universal 1 b AINU1b Analog Output 3 AOUT3 33 2 47 Analog Input Universal 1 AINU1c Analog Output 3 Common 34 S OG IQ 48 Analog Input Universal 1 d AINU1d 4 e 49 Analog Input Universal 2 AINU2a 17 50 Analog Input Universal 2 b AINU2b E ON 51 Analog Input Universal 2 c AINU2c 52 Analog Input Universal 2 AINU2d Notes 1 Terminal numbers shown each The plug in portions of the connectors packed with case The connectors are keyed 2 Case Safety Ground Connect to green screw at top center of rear terminal area 3 NCB Connect Modbus cable or twisted pair wiring Refer to UM353 1B Section 7 4 9 for additional details 4 IOA and IOB No connection 5 Ground Bus An external user supplied ground bus can ease connection of multiple grounds particularly when twinaxial cable shields are to be grounded 6 Terminals 6 9 18 21 24 34 40 and 42 are electrically connected Use the terminals that allow the best wire routing and the least stress on components such as range resistors Figure 7 5 Rear Terminal Layout and Terminal Assignments 7 8 April 2012 UM353 1B Installation Table 7 1 Rear Terminal Assignments CONTROLLER BOARD EXPANDER BOARD Power AC Hot DC Relay Output 1 Normally Closed Power AC Neutral DC N ROUTIc Rel
320. lock Each alarm can be configured as NONE HI LO HDEV LDEV DEV and OR Alarm 1 Status Alarm 2 Status Alarm 3 Status Alarm 4 Status Deviation type alarms compare Input P with Input D the deviation input normally the loop setpoint i e the setpoint to Alarm 1 PRIORity S 3 Alarms have priorities 1 to 5 with 1 the highest and are Alarm 2 PRIORity S 3 Alarm 3 PRIORity s 3 the controller function block having the same range as Input Bd 4 5 P An Out of Range OR alarm compares the process input LIM Alarm 2 LIMIT 5 10 0 ith th limit ified by th iht t L IIM Alarm 3 LIMIT s 100 0 wi e range limits specified by the range pointer parameter AS A CMT D T 0 0 input This parameter must point to a function block that B A 5 S 0 1 0 5 1 0 5 0 includes MINSCALE MAXSCALE configuration Alarm 3 DeadBAND 5 0 1 0 5 1 0 5 0 0 5 D B A 2 0 1 0 5 1 0 5 0 0 parameters e g Analog Input for proper scaling If not configured 0 0 100 0 will be used default range P Alarm 2 Power Up ENabled s YES P Alarm Power Up ENabled s YES P Alarm 4 Power Up ENabled 5 YES P P P P reported to the operator faceplate in order of priority first and Alarm 4 PRIORity 5 1 2 3 4 5 3
321. log output would then output 4 mA at a minscale of 0 psig and 20 mA at a maxscale of 5000 psig In contrast if AOUT input R were left unconfigured the output would equal 4 mA at a minscale of 0 psig 20 mA at a maxscale of 100 psig and over ranged for any input over 100 psig Some users may prefer to use normalized 0 1 analog inputs for math calculations and scale outputs for display only in this case the Scaler function block may be used to provide an output range OR for the ODC Operator display block Note how the range pointers are used in the following Factory Configured Options FCOs FCOs are described in detail in Section 4 Factory Configured Options e FCO101 Single Loop Controller The process output range AIN1 OR is connected to the range pointer of the SETPT block the PID block the ALARM block and the process variable range of the ODC block As a result these blocks will be automatically rescaled when the minscale and the maxscale or the April 2012 3 1 Function Blocks UM353 1B engineering units of the Process is changed For example if is rescaled from the default of 0 100 to 0 5000 the 0 100 bargraph on the display will now represent 0 5000 when displaying the process The block AOUT I Valve output and the Valve input of the ODC block are scaled based on the output of the PID block e FCO104 External Set PID controller The external setpoint is displayed as variable X in the ODC block
322. lrmA2Low S A2HID None AlamA2HighDevition A2LOD None 2 Low Deviation 000000000000 Alarm 2 Deviation S O Alarm A2 Overrange sd _ AlamA3 High 0 00 AlamA3Low S Alarm A3 High Deviation S O Alarm A3 Low Deviation April 2012 10 7 UM353 1 DISPLAYED LINK MODBUS DESCRIPTION CODE Hex Dec None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None Alarm A3 Deviation Alarm A3 Overrange c AlmmA4High AlammA4Low 2 AlamAd4HighDeviaion S O Alarm A4 Low Deviation 000 025 Alarm A4 Deviation Alarm A4 Overrange 00 2 Pf Alarm BI High fAlammBlOutofRange Alarm B2 High 2 AlmB2Low J AlammB2OQutofRange AlamB3High AlmmB3Low 0 AlamB3OutofRange 20 AlamB4OutofRange 000 EmemgenyManul None Emergency Local o None Standby Syne None ooo None Emergency Override PCOM block 000000 None 7 PCOM block None Device Failed PCOMblok 005 None Maximum Loop Size None Setpoint HI Limit 0 02 None Setpoint LO Limit 0000000000 None UserSatustl s None lUserSatus 0 None Autotuner Warning hys desamp gt 0 2 see Section 8 3 for Wi details None Autotuner Warni
323. ls Coordi PLN Manager Chis _ Name function signatur function signatur Name Funktion Unterschrit Funktion Unterschrift Annex is integral part of this declaration Anhang ist integraler Bestandteil dieser Erkl rung This declaration certifies the conformity to the specified directives but contains no assurance of properties The safety documentation accompanying the product shall be considered in detail Diese Erkl rung bescheinigt die bereinstimmung mit den genannten Richtlinien ist jedoch keine Zusicherung von Eigenschaften Die Sicherheitshinweise der mitgelieferten Produktdokumentation sind zu beschten 1 2 EC Declaration of Conformity 13 12 April 2012 UM353 1B Model Designation and Specifications SIEMENS Annex A to the EC Declaration of Conformity Anhang zur EG Konformit tserkl rung No Sho011 11 07 Product description Multi Loop Controller Produktbezeichnung Type TGX 353abFcdeBf mit a A D b 4 5 1 9 f 4 W Conformity to the Directives indicated on page 1 is assured through the application of the following standards depending on versions Die Konformitat mit den auf Blatt 1 angef hrten Richtlinien wird nachgewiesen durch die Einhaltung folgender Normen variantenabh ngig Richtlinie Norm Referenznummer Ausgabedatum 2004 108 EG EN 61000 6 2 2005 61000 6 4 61010 1 A representative Model 353 controlle
324. ls can be hard limits coming from HOLD blocks or signals coming from other controllers Block override inputs 1 and 2 can be used as HI or LO selector functions Additional override inputs can be accommodated by connecting these inputs to signal selector SEL blocks When the output of the ORSL block is not the primary input the output OS will be high 1 In addition the block can cause the operator faceplate to display OR _ OR EsN 000 Input A Input ID OR Output 1 Input INPUT INPUT loop tag block tag output null I NPUT INPUT B H loop tag block tag output INPUT INPUT C loop tag block tag output EIS Exec Seq No 001 to 250 OVERRIDE SELECTOR ORSL ESN 000 Primary Input P Override Input 1 1 Override Input2 2 OVERRIDE Output 1 SELECTOR Override Status ISIEL E CIT 1 SELECTor 1 S LO CIT 2 SELECTor 2 HI INPUT INPUTP H loop tag block tag output 1 INPUT 1 loop tag block tag output null IN PUT 2 INPUT 2 loop tag block tag output null OverRide PRIORity 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 EISIN Exec Seq No 00110 250 OVERRIDE status when a priority level higher than 0 the d
325. ly refer to Section 10 2 4 for electrostatic discharge prevention procedures See Figure 10 1 for an exploded view of the controller that shows field replaceable assemblies and individual parts Common hand tools for electronic equipment servicing are needed and a torque screwdriver calibrated in FIELD UPGRADES The procedures below are provided for servicing an assembled controller When installing a circuit board in the controller to add or change performance features always refer to the Kit Installation Instruction supplied in the circuit board kit for details specific to the supplied board 10 5 1 Fuse A power input fuse is located on the MPU Controller board as shown in Figure 10 2 This is the controller s power input fuse A replacement fuse can be obtained from a local electronics supplier or can be ordered from the factory See the Parts List for fuse part number and description April 2012 10 9 UM353 1 To replace the fuse 1 2 4 Refer to Section 10 5 2 and remove the Display Assembly Refer to Section 10 5 3 and remove the MPU Controller board While the controller is apart visually inspect the assemblies for overheated or otherwise damaged components Remove the failed fuse and read the fuse ratings Install replacement fuse e 120 240 Vac MPU Controller board 0 5A fuse may be replaced with a 0 4A or 0 5A 250V SloBlo fuse 0 4A fuse must be replaced with 0 4A 2
326. mber indicated Each time a reusable block is selected within a LOOP a new instance number will automatically be assigned i e ADDO1 ADD02 Each LOOP have one operator display block i e ODA ODD ODP or ODS The display block defines how the loop will be displayed on the local faceplate when that loop is selected and also how loop data will be mapped on the Modbus network interface Each LOOP can have one controller function block i e ID ONOFF PD PID or PIDAG Subject to available memory in the controller April 2012 2 1 Configuration Overview UM353 1B Auto Manual Operator Display for Controllers 01 99 ARCCosine Operator Display for Sequencers ADDO1 99 Addition Disp for Analog Ind amp Alarm ODD Op Disp for Discrete Ind amp Control AG7 eus AGA7 Operator Display for Pushbuttons 8 8 ON OFF Controller ALARM Alarm ORO01I 99 OR Logic 01 99 AND Logic ORSL Override Selector ASNOI 99 Arcsine OSTO1I 99 One Shot Timer 99 Arctangent 1 PB1 Switch 99 Analog Trend Display PB2SW PB2 Switch Batch Totalizer PB3SW
327. mn to the right click Support gt Manuals In the column to the left select the product line e g Pressure or Temperature or Controllers to open navigation and search panes All product designations may be trademarks or product names of Siemens Industry Inc or other supplier companies whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owners Siemens Industry Inc assumes no liability for errors or omissions in this document or for the application and use of information included in this document The information herein is subject to change without notice Procedures in this document have been reviewed for compliance with applicable approval agency requirements and are considered sound practice Neither Siemens Industry Inc nor these agencies are responsible for product uses not included in the approval certification s or for repairs or modifications made by the user Copyright 2012 Siemens Industry Inc All rights reserved
328. n hazardous area 10 1 TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT The following tools and equipment are necessary for servicing A Common hand tools for servicing electronic equipment B Digital Multimeter DMM Voltmeter section Accuracy 0 01 of reading Resolution 1 0 millivolt input Impedance 10 Megohms Ammeter section Accuracy 0 1 of reading Resolution 100 microamperes C Maintenance Kit P N 15545 110 containing wrist strap and conductive mat This kit or an equivalent is required when a circuit board assembly is handled for any reason April 2012 10 1 UM353 1 10 2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE The objective for establishing preventive maintenance program Is to provide maximum operating efficiency Every preventive maintenance operation should assist in realizing this objective Unless preventive measure reduces Station s down time it is unnecessary 10 2 1 Environmental Considerations The controller has been designed to operate within specified environmental parameters temperature and humidity These parameters are listed in Section 13 Model Designation and Specifications Additional information concerning environmental contaminants is covered in Section 7 Installation 10 2 2 Visual Inspection As part of a periodic maintenance program the controller should be visually inspected When viewing the station scan for abnormalities such as loose broken or stressed ribbon cables Look for dam
329. nction block can be used or an alternative is to use a MTH function block that has built in scaling functions BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 2 88 TANGENT 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 TAN function blocks accept a radian input and output the tangent of that angle BLOCK DIAGRAM Output 1 01 SUBTRACTION Input AD SUBTRACTION Output 1 B INPUT loop tag block tag output INPUT loop tag block tag output null ES Exec Seq No 001 to 250 TANGENT ESN 000 Input X RD TAN X gt Output 1 I N IP UIT inpurx loop tag block tag output E S N Exec Seq 00010250 000 April 2012 3 89 Function Blocks UM353 1B 3 2 89 TH Track amp Hold TH function blocks can hold an initial value that will transfer to the block output O1 on power up and it can be used to track the TV input when input TC is high 1 The HOLD value can be changed on line using the pulser when the TH O1 block output is directly connected to X or Y inputs in an ODC block The range and resolution used by the pulser making on line changes will be determined by the X Range or Y Range inputs
330. nd press STORE to add the function block to the configuration 6 To make changes to a function block parameter turn the Pulser Knob to EDIT FB 9 2 April 2012 UM353 1B Controller and System Test 7 Press STEP DOWN for the function Block menu 8 Turn the pulser knob to the desired Function Block and Press STEP DOWN 9 The first function block parameter will be displayed For example RG PTR for Transfer Block or MINSCALE for the Analog Input Block Press STEP DOWN to display current parameter value or use the pulser knob to select a different parameter Press STORE to save any changes 10 Press EXIT to return to normal operation mode Notice that the SETPT ALARM PID and ODC function blocks in 101 all refer to AIN1 as the RG PTR range pointer to determine the operating range of the function block Be aware that making changes to configuration may require changing referenced RG PTRs For example in FCO105 Ratio Set Control the PID controller output range is determined by the range of AIN2 Try changing the default 0 100 range of analog input 1 AIN1 to 100 0 500 0 F using the Configuration Road Map in Figure 2 1 or the following steps 1 Press ENTER EXIT CONF to display LOOP Press STEP DOWN twice to display VIEW Turn pulser knob or use arrow button to display EDIT FB Press STEP DOWN to display Function Block menu Turn the pulser knob or use right arrow button to display AINI Press STEP DOWN
331. nd the local operator s changeable range In most cases the Range input range pointer will connect to the controller function block An unconfigured range pointer will default the range to 0 00 100 00 1 1 y AUTO Auto i i l 1 gt 2 Output Track Variable gt P 01 Auto Status gt AS 1 1 Emergency Manual Not Auto Status 11 gt MS 1 2 ES 1 X0312950 zi 55 BLOCK DIAGRAM April 2012 3 7 Function Blocks UM353 1B EMERgency MANual will be asserted when input EM is high 1 This causes the output to hold at the last position and permits the operator to adjust the manual value under the conditions listed for MANual It will also assert an EM MAN status at the configured priority to the operator display STANDBY will be asserted when input TC is high 1 This causes the A M block output to track input TV thus placing the loop in standby condition This feature can be used to enable one loop to track another for either redundancy applications or optional control schemes It will also assert STANDBY status at the configured priority to the operator display STATUS OUTPUTS Output AS Auto Status goes high 1 when output O1 is the Auto input output NA will go high when output 01 is not the Auto input output MS goes high
332. network may ANALOG WRITE ETHERNET AWE_ Range tS ANALOG WRITE 5 ar Sh ETHERNET InptT TP 5 Quality Status lt A DRIESS iP ADGRESs nnn nnn nnn nnn 192 168 0 0 RIG RanGe PoinTeR loop tag block tag null S INPUTS loop tag block tag output null LNPIUT T loop tag block tag output null MB ADGRESS 0 ModBus REGister 1 DIA T A Modbus DATA H FP BYTE ORDer 1 UD UpDate TYPE H TIR I DIB TRIGger Dead Band 0 1 10 0 0 2 MIN MiNimum INTeger 5 see table 9 I NI T maximum INTeger 9 see table Selection Parameter Default Value Uint MIN INT 0 Uint MAX INT 65535 Sint MIN INT 32768 Sint MAX INT 32767 have multiple devices each having unique Modbus address There are three write update options that can be configured by the UD TYPE parameter 1 oncE will write once to the MB REG Modbus Register The controller will write when the input value changes by more than the value set with the TRIG DB parameter This parameter is set based on perc
333. ng Deviation Ratio is see Autotune procedure None Autotuner Warning Avg Deviation is LO see Autotune procedure None Error limit cycle timeout O None Autotuner Error process of range o O None Autotuner Error Only applies when HYS set to A Process too noisy None Insufficient Volatile Memory Available None Insufficient Constant Memory Available None __ Database CRC Checksum Error Z o Z i OO None JjPoorl Oquliy 0 2 None AlEnn Function Block Not Updating None ClEnn Function Block Not Updating O None DlEnnFuncionBlockNotUpda ng px EE Z 5 10 8 April 2012 UM353 1B Maintenance 10 4 3 MultiMediaCard Error Codes If MMC FAIL appears on the alphanumeric display an error has occurred Flashing will continue until the event is acknowledged by pressing the ACK button or the card is removed from the socket Some possible reasons for the error are Card is defective Card is not formatted or format e g FAT32 is not supported Corrupt or missing file structure Card is write protected Card is full The following error codes can be shown on the alphanumeric display The configuration file being read cannot be further processed until the file error corrected FileErr1 The file does not conform to the defined structure of a configuration file and is unusable The file may be corrupted e FileErr2 The f
334. nge Register MB L SSNF R W Sequencer Step No Real 41951 20 1 L SAOF R Sequencer Analog Output Real 41953 20 1 LHSAEPF R Step Analog End Point Real 41955 20 1 L SRTF R W Step Remaining Time Real 41957 20 1 L SSTF R Sequencer Step Time Real 41959 20 1 L SNSF R Sequencer Number of Steps Real 41961 20 1 L SNGF R Sequencer Number of Groups Real 41963 20 1 L SNRF R Sequencer Number of Recipes Real 41965 20 1 L CRNF Current Recipe Number Real 41967 20 1 R W spare 0 00000000 41969 20 1 Analog Indicator ODA Code R W Description Range Register MB 1 1 R Process I Real 41951 20 1 L P2F R Process 2 Real 41953 20 1 L P3F R Process 3 Real 41955 20 1 L P4F R Process 4 Real 41957 20 1 spare 0 00000000 41959 69 20 1 A Write command will force the Step or Remaining Time to the write value The current recipe can be changed if the Sequencer is in the HOLD mode April 2012 6 9 Data Mapping UM353 1B 6 3 5 Variable Loop Floating Point Data 32 bit IEEE Controller ODC Code R W Description Range Register MB L TSPF R W Target Setpoint Real 42451 60 1 L HLF R W Setpoint High Limit Real 42453 60 1 L LLF R W Setpoint Low Limit Real 42455 60 1 L RTF R W Setpoint Ramp Time min Real 42457 60 1 L RRF R W Setpoint Ramp Rate units min Real 42459 60 1 L A1LF R W Alarm 1 Limit Real 42461 60 1 L A2LF R W Alarm 2 Limit Real 42463 60 1 L A3LF R W Alarm 3 Limit
335. nnection between F and J provided Entrelec converter RS485 recommended cable is Belden 9842 24 AWG 120 Ohms or equivalent cable Up to 32 controllers Model 352P Model 353 and Model 353R be connected A user supplied 120 Ohm network termination resistor should be installed on the last device on the network In APACS ACM set SERIAL Function Block Flow Control to 1 Assembled cable above has DB9 plug connector Connection to computer serial port may require a Figure 7 18 Modbus Communications 353 to APACS ACM or Personal Computer April 2012 Installation UM353 1B 7 4 11 Wiring to Siemens SIREC D Recorder Figure 7 19 shows the wiring needed to connect a SIREC D analog input to a Model 353 analog input As shown 1 5 Vdc transmitter input to the Model 353 is also routed the recorder s Analog Input 1 Model 353A Controller Terminals External Hot H Power 120 240 Vac Neutral N 47 63 Hz SIREC D Earth Ground G Recorder Terminals 1 Channel 1 26 5 Analog Input SITRANS P 2 See Note 2 DSIII 2 Wire 1 5 20 Transmitter 5 SITRANS P 4 20 mA Output 72500 Channel 2 DSIII 2 Wire LAN 18 Analog Input Transmitter See Note2 4 6 Station 100 4 20 mA Output Common
336. nput TV LOOPO02 AIN2 O1 INPUT TC Input TC LOOPO2 A M O1 ESN Exec Seq No 5 ALARM Alarm Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer LOOP02 AIN2 OR INPUT P Input P LOOPO02 AIN2 O1 INPUT D Input D LOOPO2 SETPT O1 ESN Exec Seq No 10 PID PID Controller Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer LOOP02 AIN2 OR INPUT P Input P LOOPO02 AIN2 O1 INPUT S Input S LOOPO2 SETPT O1 INPUT F Input F LOOPO02 A M O1 INPUT Input 2 ESN Exec Seq 15 A M Auto Manual Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer LOOP02 PID OR INPUT Input LOOP02 PID O1 ESN Exec Seq No 20 ODC Operator Display for Controllers P RG PTR P Range Pointer LOOPO2 AIN2 OR V RG PTR V Range Pointer LOOPO2 PID OR INPUT P Input P Process LOOPO2 AIN2 OI INPUT S Input S Setpoint LOOPO2 SETPT OI INPUT V Input V Valve LOOPO2 A M OI LOOP Loop 02 AOUT2 Analog Output 2 Function Block Range Pointer LOOP02 PID OR INPUT Input LOOPO02 A M O1 4 12 April 2012 UM353 1B Factory Configured Options 4 8 121 Cascade Control Factory Configured Option FCO121 provides two loops configured for Cascade control The bloc
337. nt to the signal source e g Analog Input block for this information number of function blocks have parameters that may be affected by range pointers The range pointer limits the setting of parameter values to within 10 to 110 of the range If a range is changed the current parameter values will be changed to the same within the new range For example if the range is 0 0 100 0 and the Alarm 1 Limit setting is 90 0 and the range is changed to 400 0 500 0 the alarm setting will be changed to 490 0 controller i e ID PID PD PIDAG outputs have an engineering range of 0 0 100 0 which will be satisfactory in most cases since outputs normally convert to 4 20 mA signal to drive valve 0 100 Open or Closed However when controller is used in cascade configuration the primary controller output must be configured for the same engineering range as the secondary controller process FCOs do not change Station parameters or calibration FCO 0 deletes all loops and sets all parameters in the STATN amp SECUR function blocks to default values Calibration is not affected As new loops and function blocks are added parameters will appear at default values April 2012 4 1 Factory Configured Options UM353 1B 4 1 FCO101 Single Loop Controller w Tracking Setpoint Factory Configured Option FCO101 provides a single loop controller configured in 01 A block diagram of the loop configuration is shown below
338. nts of a typical shipment Section 2 Configuration Overview contains a list of the functions blocks available for use in configuring the controller and a procedure for configuration A configuration road map and a MultiMediaCard road map are included EN Section 3 Function Blocks contains detailed description of each function block Section 4 Factory Configured Options provides graphical presentation of the function blocks used in FCOs and a listing of changes made to default function block parameters Section 5 Network Communications furnishes overviews of Modbus and Modbus TCP Ethernet communication data Section 6 Data Mapping contains network data details for Modbus and Modbus TCP Ethernet Section 7 Installation contains drawings and steps detailing mechanical and electrical installation Electrical connections to the controller are identified and numerous wiring diagrams are included Section 8 Local Faceplate Operation describes and illustrates the Display Assembly s operator controls and displays Use of these for on line operation for configurations and for autotuning is described Section 9 Controller and System Test has procedures for testing the controller and the installation Section 10 Maintenance lists the tools and test equipment to service controller It also has preventive maintenance and servicing procedures including error codes Section 11 Calibration provides step by step proced
339. nual Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer Loop01 PID OR INPUT A Input A Loop01 PID O1 ESN Exec Seq No 25 Analog Output 1 Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer Loop01 PID OR INPUT S Input S 01 1 ODC Operator Display for Controllers P RG PTR P Range Pointer Loop01 AIN1 OR V RG PTR V Range Pointer Loop01 PID OR INPUT P Input P Process Loop01 AIN1 01 INPUT S Input S Setpoint Loop01 SPLIM O1 INPUT V Input V Valve 01 1 LOOP Loop ft 01 4 10 April 2012 UM353 1B Factory Configured Options 4 7 0107 Dual Loop Controller Factory Configured Option 107 provides two independent loops with tracking setpoints The block diagram of the configuration of the two loops is shown below along with the changes made to the default parameter values of the configured blocks This configuration provides setpoint tracking fixed setpoint is desired the input to the SETPT function block can be set to UNCONFIG The process range of the first loop can be changed in Analog Input 1 and the range of the Second loop in Analog Input 2 Process Process Loop 01 SETPT Setpoint Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer LOOPO1 AINL OR INPUT TV Input TV LOOPOI AINI OI INPUT TC Input TC
340. null ODD VIEW Operator Display NO YES YES INPUT SIN INPUT SN loop tag block tag output null INPUT RN loop tag block tag output null InputcLy loop tag block tag output null INPUT INPUT EL loop tag block tag output null M SIG X Recipe MeSsGe x 9 2 12 char ASCII MISIG Primary MeSsGe xx 5 8 char ASCII x x S S Primary Message xx Starting Step 6 0 255 S secondary MeSsGe xxx S 12 char ASCII 5 S S secondary Msg xxx Starting Step 0 255 MISIG Condition MeSsGe xx S 16 char ASCII I NIP UIT INPUT nn loop tag block tag output null Rev 3 lt 0 gt Loop tag gt S lt gt or the ACK button is again pressed When an active message clears the message display will loop back and start at the top and display the first message it comes to Events that require acknowledgment will return the display to the normal mode i e lt loop tag gt S and will flash the message When events have been acknowledged they can be viewed using the ACK button The display can be returned to the MSG mode using the D button and will then display the first message in the Queue Recipe Msg Y Primary Msg Y Secondary Msg Conditional Msg 1 3
341. nying shipment April 2012 1 9 Introduction UM353 1B 1 10 April 2012 UM353 1B Configuration Overview 2 0 CONFIGURATION OVERVIEW Configuration enables a user to select function blocks stored in the controller from an available list and enter appropriate block parameters to implement specific control strategy Although configuration affects the entire station the controller partitions related control implementations into LOOPS maximum of 99 loops can be configured and 25 can have operator displays that are mapped to network communications Each LOOP can contain the function blocks listed in the following paragraphs Signals can be connected between function blocks within the LOOP as well as between loops Also there are several STATION function blocks that are fixed and available in the STATION menu for setting station related values Section 3 Function Blocks fully describes all available function blocks For tuning guidelines refer to Section 8 3 Autotune Procedure or request AD353 119 Digital Controller Tuning NOTE This User s Manual includes the functionality provided by MPU Controller Board Design Level B and firmware Version 4 0 2 1 STATION FUNCTION BLOCKS Function blocks that are permanent and accessible at the STATION menu level CONFIGS Configuration Library includes FCOs and configuration on MultiMediaCard STATN Station Parameters SECUR Securi
342. ocedure calibration parameter is identified with notation in function block parameter listing in Section 3 Function Blocks 325 80 PIDOT ie C LOOP ESN TC2053 Alphanumeric Display 325 80 Numeric Display Configuration Pushbutton Display with changeable value turn Pulser knob lt gt Pulser to select new parameter or value move horizontally across lt gt Turn Pulser to select additional menu items items not shown 8 X Use Step Up or Step Down pushbutton move vertically across map Model 353 Design Level B only Refer to Figure 2 2 MultiMediaCard Road Map for additional selections A formatted MMC must be installed in the socket on the Controller board to access these selections Figure 2 1 Configuration Road Map 2 6 April 2012 UM353 1B Configuration Overview TC2053 Alphanumeric Display lt gt 325 80 Numeric Display STORE STORE Configuration Pushbutton C os Display with changeable value turn Pulser knob lt gt Turn Pulser to select new parameter or value move horizontally across lt gt Turn Pulser to select additional menu items items not shown X Use Step Up or Step Down pushbutton move vertically across map MG00519b Notes 1 MMC will display only when a valid MultiMediaCard is installed in the socket on the Controller board 2 If one or more V3C files or sub directories exist the
343. odbus address to be configured When connecting to other Siemens 353 controllers the Modbus address is set to 1 In some cases other Modbus devices may use a different address or when going through a Modbus TCP gateway a Modbus network may have multiple devices each having a unique address The START CL parameter identifies the location of the first Coil The NO OF CL parameter identifies the total number of coils up to 16 to write There are three write update options that can be configured by the UD TYPE parameter COIL WRITE ETHERNET cowe InputO 0 COIL WRITE InputF E ETHERNET InptT 5 Quality Status lt INPUT 0 tag block tag output null INPUT 1 INPUT 1 loop tag block tag output INPUT 2 INPUT 2 loop tag block tag output null INPUT 3 INPUT3 WH loop tag block tag output null INPUT 4 INPUTA loop tag block tag output null INPUT 5 INPUTSk loop tag block tag output null INPUT 6 loop tag block tag output INPUT 7 INPUT7 tag block tag output null INPUT 8 tag block tag output INPUT 9 NPUT9 9 loop tag block tag output null INPUT NPUTA loop tag block tag output null INPUT INPUTB loop tag block tag output INPUT inputcw loop tag block tag o
344. of rear terminal area in The Row Terminals In The Row H Hot or 3 N Neutral or 3 G Ground gt Figure 7 22 Daisy Chained Power Wiring 1 Strip ground wire s 3 8 10 mm to 1 2 13 mm Clamp the ground wire s under the green square pressure plate and ground screw case safety ground at top center of each rear terminal area Tighten the ground screw to 20 in Ibs 2 Remove 1 4 6 mm to 5 16 8 mm from each Hot and Neutral wire to be inserted a terminal or crimp on connector 3 Crimp On Connector only Insert the wires into the crimp on connector until the wires are visible at the pin end of the connector Use a standard electrical connector crimp tool to crimp the connection Be certain that both power input wires are fully inserted in the connector before crimping 4 Loosen the terminal screw using a straight blade screwdriver with a 1 8 3 mm blade width 5 Insert the striped wire or crimp on connector pin into the terminal and tighten the screw to 5 in 165 April 2012 7 21 Installation UM353 1B 7 5 FACTORY CALIBRATION Unless a special calibration is ordered the factory calibration is as follows Table 7 2 Factory Calibration ANALOG INPUT OR OUTPUT FACTORY CALIBRATION Analog input function blocks l to 5 Vdc Analog output function blocks Thermocouple CAL ZERO 0 CAL FULL 500 CAL VIEW 3 3 to 103 3 Slidewire CAL ZERO 096 CAL FU
345. of the higher level device There may also be higher level devices that will query and assign addressing information based on the station tag name In this case a tag name change will also require reconfiguration of higher level devices Therefore it is important not to change the station identification without being aware of system consequences There are two timers used during power up initialization WARM TIM and COLD TIM The station takes approximately 15 seconds to perform power up initialization before the power up time is evaluated Set a timer to a value of 20 seconds or greater for the timer to be effective timer setting of 0 will be considered as infinite e g to always power up hot set the warm timer to 0 setting of I through 19 will default to 20 Configurations downloaded with STATION PARAMETERS STATN CNJDENTIFICATION TAG RE TAG UNIT NO 3 ADDRESS 24 STATION TIMERS 5 FN PC WRITE LOCKOUT c STATION PARAMETERS Station TAG 5 353 ADDRESS station ADDRESS 0 WARM wARM TiMer sec 5 20 COLD cotptimer sec 9 100 WAT CH D WATCHDOG timer 5 0 1000 0 L O conFiGuration Lock Out 5 0 1 2 3 0 1 PARAM L O parameter Lock Out 9 0 1 2 3 0 SERIAL
346. on DESCRIPTION QUANTITY Resistor 2500 0 1 3W WW Kit Installation Instruction Shunt Not used in Design Level B controller 4 Mounting Clip Kit no part number qty 1 Kit contains 2 Mounting Clips and 2 8 32 x 1 Screws see the Parts List at back of this manual for part numbers 5 Expander Board Crimp On Connector 6 PN16353 52 Expander Board Kit The I O Expander Board is factory installed when Siemens 353 with Expansion Board option 1 is ordered e For field installation of this kit see the supplied Kit Installation Instruction 15900 390 DESCRIPTION QUANTITY Expander Board Do not remove Board from static shielding 1 bag until it is to be installed 1 Range Resistor and Reference Junction Kit see below HE G PN16353 49 Range Resistor and Reference Junction Kit This kit is supplied with the above I O Expander Board Kit and with a factory shipped Siemens 353 with Expansion Board option 1 DESCRIPTION QUANTITY 4 20 mA to 1 5V Range Resistor 2500 0 1 3W WW 4 20 mA to 15 75 mV Range Resistor 3 750 0 1 3W WW Crimp On Connector TC Reference Junction 100Q Kit Installation Instruction Process Instrumentation User Manual CD ROM qty 1 Installation Guide IG353 1 Two warning labels that are to be placed in a highly visible location near the case rear terminals DOG STERN Additional items as required by your order Refer to the packing list accompa
347. on will advance the operator display to the next Active Loop All operator controls now affect the Active Loop that is currently shown in the alphanumeric display e g FC2367 When a loop is first displayed the loop tag will appear in the alphanumeric and the displayed variable will be the same as when the loop was last viewed Pushbutton this button is used together with the and status LEDs to manage events e g alarm status and error conditions within the controller Events have user assigned priorities 1 5 with 1 the highest and will be organized within the controller first by priority and then by order of occurrence e Status LED Indicates that event is active unacknowledged in the Station A flashing LED indicates that the event needs to be acknowledged L Status LED Indicates that event is active in the displayed Loop A flashing LED indicates that the event needs to be acknowledged April 2012 8 1 Operation UM353 1B Priority e Priority 1 causes the station bargraphs and event LEDs to flash and requires acknowledgment to stop flashing This is the highest priority e Priority 2 also flashes the bargraphs but stops flashing when the event clears i e Self Clearing e Priority 3 causes the event LEDs L amp S to flash and stops only when the event is acknowledged Priority 4 also causes the event LEDs to flash but stops when the event clears e Priority 5 displays the event but does not
348. onfigured NO input to 1 The button can be remotely activated through command over Modbus or Modbus TCP PB2 SWITCH NC Input m NO Input m PB2 Switch Message Display MD PB Switch Output LOIN Switch ACTION 5 MOM SUS MOM PU Up LAST 5 NO YES YES MD HI SIT MD HI STatus message 5 5 ASCII Char GREEN IMD S T MD LO STatus message s 5 ASCII Char RED AIC MD HI ACtion message 5 5 ASCII Char RED MD MD LO ACtion message S 5 ASCII Char GREEN LHN PUT ING INPUTNO loop tag block tag output NO INPUTNC loop tag block tag output null LHN PUT MD INPUT MD loop tag block tag output null EISIN Exec Seq 001 to 250 This block operates with an operator faceplate that includes green red LEDs that are turned on using input MD A HI 1 input will turn on the Green LED and a LO the Red LED The default connection will be the PS output of the block but should be changed as required to display the correct status The message parameters do not apply to the current product PB2 Switch Operator Display Interface BOD LEDS UOD MSG S MDHIST MDHIAC x G kkkkk kkkkk PB2 d MDLOST
349. onnected to AOE blocks by using the Modbus Registers from Table 3 6 below If the automatic range scaling feature is not available the default setting of the RANGE parameter MAN should be used In this case range parameters are entered manually When the auto range feature is used the range in the AIE block may be out of sync for several seconds if on line changes are made to the AOE range The IP ADRES parameter is used to configure the IP address of the source device The MB ADRES parameter allows a Modbus address to be configured When connecting to other Siemens controllers the Modbus address is set to 1 In some cases other devices may use a different address or when going through a Modbus TCP IP gateway a Modbus network may have multiple devices each having a unique address The REG TYP parameter allows setting the source register as a Holding Register or an Input Register For many Modbus devices this setting does not matter since the device will treat them as identical registers The DATA TYP parameter will enable the AIE block to acquire floating point or integer data When floating point is selected the controller will request two consecutive registers starting with the MB REG parameter The UD RATE parameter configures the rate at which the block will request data The P2P setting will update the data at the rate set by the P2P RATE parameter in the ETHERNET block The Ct setting will update the data at the cycle time of the controller The
350. ontroller and station are also used to prevent repetition This manual describes the functionality provided by Design Level MPU Controller board firmware version 4 0 e Part numbers are for items ordered from the Process Instrumentation Business Unit PIBU of Siemens Industry except as noted e Date format is Month Day Year except as noted e Time format is 12 hour a m p m except as noted April 2012 Contents UM353 1B Scope This publication does not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment nor to provide for every possible contingency to be met in connection with installation operation or maintenance Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser s purposes the matter should be referred to one of the support groups listed in the Customer Product Support section of this manual The contents of this manual shall not become part of or modify any prior or existing agreement commitment or relationship Warranty The sales contract contains the entire obligation of Siemens The warranty contained in the contract between the parties is the sole warranty of Siemens Any statements continued herein do not create new warranties or modify the existing warranty Qualified Persons The described equipment should be installed configured operated and serviced only by qualified persons thoroughly familiar with th
351. or ODD Code R W Description Range Coil MB LHDOI R Discrete 0 Input 1 ON 0 1 0 00296 48 1 LHD1I R Discrete 1 Input 1 ON 0 1 0 00297 48 1 L D2I R Discrete 2 Input 1 ON 0 OFF 1 0 00298 48 1 R Discrete 3 Input 1 ON 0 1 0 00299 48 1 R Discrete 4 Input 1 ON 0 1 0 00300 48 1 LHDSI R Discrete 5 Input 1 ON 0 1 0 00301 48 1 L D6I R Discrete 6 Input 1 ON 0 OFF 1 0 00302 48 1 L D7I R Discrete 7 Input 1 ON 0 OFF 1 0 00303 48 1 L D8I R Discrete 8 Input 1 ON 0 OFF 1 0 00304 48 1 L D9I R Discrete 9 Input 1 ON 0 OFF 1 0 00305 48 1 LHDAI R Discrete A Input 1 ON 0 OFF 1 0 00306 48 1 L DBI R Discrete B Input 1 ON 0 OFF 1 0 00307 48 1 L DCI R Discrete C Input 1 ON 0 OFF 1 0 00308 48 1 L DDI R Discrete D Input 1 ON 0 OFF 1 0 00309 48 1 L DEI R Discrete E Input 1 ON 0 OFF 1 0 00310 48 1 L DFI R Discrete F Input 1 ON 0 OFF 1 0 00311 48 1 L D0S R W Discrete 0 Status 1 Auto 0 Manual 1 0 00312 48 1 L D1S R W Discrete 1 Status 1 0 Manual 1 0 00313 48 1 L D2S R W Discrete 2 Status 1 0 Manual 1 0 00314 48 1 L D3S R W Discrete 3 Status 1 Auto 0 Manual 1 0 00315 48 1 L D4S R W Discrete 4 Status 1 0 Manual 1 0 00316 48 1 L D5S R W Discrete 5 Status 1 0 Manual 1 0 00317 48 1 L D6S R W Discrete 6 Status 1 0 Manual 1 0 00318 48 1 L D7S R W Discrete 7 Status 1 Auto 0 Manual 1 0 00319 48
352. output 5 8 M INPUT 8M loop tag block tag output cases where it is desired to view display or operation TINPTULTT BF INPUT BF os P eo tad Hokie up uf parameters only from a network workstation the parameter should be set to NO During cold or warm start the A M switch will power up in the Auto position During hot start the A M switch will power up in the position prior to power down Each group can be displayed on the local faceplate using the D button When first stepping into loop using the Loop button the loop tag will be displayed e g PBDisp1 Pressing the D button will scroll through the groups displaying the group tag e g MS1036 in the alphanumeric and the value of the feedback in the digital display e g 1 The feedback message associated with this feedback value can be viewed on the local faceplate using the UNITS button The A M button will display the position of the group selector switch and enable switching the group selector switch between auto and manual 3 58 April 2012 UM353 1B Function Blocks PBDisp1 Group 1 Message Man 1 START Vinee 11 rei ET O 12 STOP 12 1 PB2 O JO 1a 1 LAUTO MAN T XO lo 1M
353. oward the Controller board and withdrawing the connector from the socket 5 Grasp the loop in the front edge of the MPU Controller board and pull the board straight out of the case 6 Place the MPU Controller board in a static shielding bag INSTALLATION 1 While wearing a grounded wrist strap remove MPU Controller board from static shielding bag 2 Partially insert the MPU Controller board into the case and connect the Ethernet cable 3 Carefully guide the connector end of the board until it mates with the connector at the back of the case Only when the connectors are mated should additional force be applied to seat the board 4 Disconnect wrist strap 5 Insert a MultiMediaCard with the desired configuration into the MMC Socket 6 Install Display Assembly as described in the previous section 10 5 4 I O Expander Board REMOVAL 1 Ina hazardous area remove input power from Controller 2 Remove Display Assembly and MPU Controller board as described in previous sections 3 Refer to Figure 10 5 Grasp the edge of the I O Expander Board and pull the Board straight out of the case 4 Place the Board in a static shielding bag INSTALLATION 1 While wearing a grounded wrist strap remove the I O Expander Board from its static shielding bag 2 Insert the I O Expander Board into the case and carefully guide the connector end of the board until it mates with the connector at the back of the case Only when the connectors are mat
354. pecifications 13 0 MODEL DESIGNATION AND SPECIFICATIONS This section provides model designation information lists of controller accessories and service parts detailed controller specifications and hazardous area installation information IMPORTANT Before installing or servicing controller refer to the controller labels and the applicable specifications and hazardous area classifications in this section to ensure that the correct model with the needed certifications is at hand Every controller is identified by several labels Labels are located on the case and inside the drop down door on the Display Assembly as shown in Figure 1 1 Typical labels are shown below SIEMENS Input Requirements 120 240 VAC 25 W 47 63 Hz 40 VA Max Amb 50 C WARNING Substitution of components may impair the suitability for Class 1 Div 2 LR38024 ce CLI Div 2 GPS A amp D Temp Code 4 See UM353 1B APPROVED ABS Approved 13 1 MODEL DESIGNATION SIEMENS WARNING Do not connect or disconnect configuration port cable while in hazardous location Do not remove the rear terminal housing SIEMENS Model No TGX 353A4F1CNB4 Sales 9999999999 999999 Serial 99999999 Input and Output Capacity Xmtr Pwr Sply Out 25 120 mA Anlg inp 0 to 5 30uA Anlg out cur 4 to 20 mA 800 Ohms inp 0 to 30 Vdc 5 mAdc Dgtl out cur 100
355. plays that are used on one per loop basis to configure the local operator display functions and network parameters See the ilware PC faceplate on the next page The block will display up to four process variables P1 to P4 in both analog bargraph and digital form Two alarms are associated with each process variable They can be configured as HI or LO alarms Each alarm function has associated block outputs that are high 1 when the alarm is active Output LE is high 1 when loop event is active Output SE is high when a station error is active LOOP parameters are used to index reads and writes to Modbus network parameters See Section 5 for network parameters The VIEW OD parameter when set to YES enables the operator Operator Display for Analog indication amp alarming Process Range 1 Process Range 2 Process Range 4 Process 1 Process 2 Process Range 3 Ra Process 3 Process 4 Alarm A P1 RD Alarm B P1 P1 Operator Display AE R27 for Alarm B P2 227 Analog pacaton Alarm A P3 Alarming Alarm B P3 Pa Alarm A P4 Alarm 4 E Loop Event Watch Dog Station Error display to be viewed and accessed locally In cases where it is desired 1 PTR Process 1 RanGe PoinTeR is lop iagbiocktag e P2RG Process2 RanGe PoinTeR s loop tag block tag null to view display or operation parameters only from network P
356. pment The reader should become familiar with the symbols and their meaning Symbols are provided to quickly alert the user to safety related situations issues and text Symbol Meaning Indicates an immediate hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death DANGER or serious injury WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or serious injury CAUTION gt gt Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in minor or moderate injury Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in CAUTION property damage Indicates a potential situation which if not avoided may result in an undesirable NOTICE result or state IMPORTANT Identifies an action that should be taken to avoid an undesirable result or state Note Identifies additional information that should be read Electrical shock hazard The included Warning text states that the danger of electrical shock is present Explosion hazard Indicates that the danger of an explosion hazard exists Electrostatic discharge The presence of this symbol indicates that electrostatic discharge can damage the electronic assembly Conventions and Usage Notes e In this User s Manual the Siemens 353 can be referred to as a Model 353 or simply 353 The terms c
357. point S GoNTROLLER parameter TD is non zero The controller includes an Feedback Absolute Error autotune feature that can be initiated from the operator Auto E AT Warning faceplate using the QUICK access feature DD When input is high 1 the controller operates in the RIG Rance Pointer loop tag block tag normal auto mode and when low 0 causes reset R to track DIRect ACTING 9 NO YES NO Proportional Gain 5 0 001 to 100 0 1 000 F GE This will force the controller output to track the TLL Time integral 0 001 to 4000 100 0 feedback within the controller limits and allow the Time Derivative 5 0 0010 100 00 min 0 00 K DIG Derivative Gain 5 1 00 to 30 00 10 00 controller to switch back to auto without bumping the minimum SCALE Real 00 output MAX MAXimum SCALE H Real 100 0 i D P P Decimal Point Position preferred S 0 0 ENIG UIN I ENGineering UNITS 5 PRCT The process range pointer parameter points to another AUTOTUNE 5 YES gt DEViation during Autotune AUTO 2 5 to 25 0 AUTO function block that has range scaling such as an analog 9 HYSteresis during Autotune S AUTO 0 5 to 10 0 AUTO input that is the process variable This enables the ISITIEIP output STEP on first Autotune S
358. position and units for another block e g operator display to reference Output MAX SCALE Output MIN SCALE Input MAX SCALE Input MIN SCALE Input MIN SCALE 48 4 Output MIN SCALE ENGingeering UNITS Input RanGe PoinTeR BLOCK DIAGRAM Rev 2 3 2 81 SEL Signal Selector SEL function blocks can provide a high or low signal selection on the three input signals Unused inputs will be set equivalent to the lowest real value when configured as HI selector and to the highest real value when configured as SCALER ae Range Analog Input D SCALER RG T R RanGe PoinTeR 5 loop tag block tag MINSGCA LE Output MINimum SCALE Output MAXimum SCALE Decimal Pt Position preferred S 0 0 0 0 00 0 00 ENGineering UNITS 5 6 ASCII Char PRCT INPUTAW loop tag block tag output null 1 6 Exec Seq No H 001 to 250 Output Range Output 1 Real 0 00 Real 100 00 SIGNAL SELECTOR SEL ESN 000 Input A AD FN SIGNAL Output 1 a LO selector Input B LBI SELECTOR Ci pg SEE 1 ISIEL SELector TYPE S
359. r 40058 This parameter can also be written to change the loop 3 Parameter NTTB will indicate the number of Analog Trend Display blocks that are available in the loop specified by the MLTP 4 Undefined data e g unconfigured inputs period station was in HOLD or powered down are represented by value of 0 April 2012 6 25 Data Mapping UM353 1B 6 3 12 Configuration Data Sequencer Loop The Modbus registers on this page refer to configuration parameters of function blocks within specific loop previously defined by Modbus parameter MSLCP 40048 For example to read or write the Step I Group 0 Input Mask for the PRSEQ block that is in loop with Modbus Index of 3 write 3 to 40048 then read or write to register 410001 Sequencer MASK Configurations Code CR W Description Range Register MB 5001601 R W Step 1 Group 0 Input Mask 0000 FFFF 410001 S001G00 R W Step I Group 0 Output Mask 0000 FFFF 410002 SO01G11 R W Step I Group I Input Mask 0000 FFFF 410003 S001G10 R W Step I Group I Output Mask 0000 FFFF 410004 5001621 R W Step 1 Group 2 Input Mask 0000 SFFFF 410005 5001620 Step I Group 2 Output Mask 0000 FFFF 410006 5001631 Step I Group 3 Input Mask 0000 FFFF 410007 S001G30 R W Step I Group 3 Output Mask 0000 FFFF 410008 5250 R W Step 250 Group E Input Mask 0000 FFFF 417997 5250 R W Step 250 Group E Output Mask 0000 FFFF 417998 2500 Step 250 Group F Inp
360. r knob and installation instruction Does not contain Display Board or black Display Assembly mounting screws MPU Controller Board Kit for 120 240 Vac Power Input for TGX 16353 Model 353A 302 MPU Controller Board Kit for 24 Vdc Power Input for TGX 16353 Model 353D 303 I O Expander Board Kit for Model 353 1 __ Contains I O Expander 16353 52 Board and Range Resistor and Reference Junction Kit Does not include terminals 277 52 Case supplied with all needed connectors Spare Parts Kit includes 16353 131 Power Input and Range Resistor Kit includes 250 Ohm 0 1 3W WW resistor and insulating sleeving qty 3 each Crimp on connector qty 6 Range Resistor and Reference Junction Kit includes 250 Ohm 0 1 3W WW resistor qty 1 3 75 Ohm 1 3W WW resistor qty 2 Insulating sleeving qty 5 Crimp on connector qty 6 100 Ohm reference junction for TC inputs qty 2 Crimp on Connector qty 18 O Ring Display Assembly qty 1 Fuse 120 240 Vac MPU Controller board 0 4A or 0 5A 250V SloBlo qty 1 Fuse 24 Vdc MPU Controller board 2A 250V SloBlo qty 1 Case Mounting Clip and 8 32 x 1 Fillister Hd Screw qty 2 each Case Ground Screw Green qty 1 E LCASEANDCASEMOUNTEDCONMECTORS Standard Case with Ethernet Connector and Case Mounted Connectors Case 15353 206 Option 4 Model 353 4 includes Flange and Case Assembly qty 1 Expanded Connector Socket Assembly with Ethernet Connector and 52 Case Mounted Conn
361. r one scan cycle April 2012 UM353 1B Data Mapping Sequencer Loop ODS Code R W Description L HS R 1 Hold Sequencer L L R W 1 Loop Local L RSQ W 1 Reset Sequencer R 1 Track L CN R W 1 Console L CM R W 1 Computer L SSF W 1 Step Forward normal 0 LHSSB W 1 Step Backward normal 0 spare L CH R 1 Configuration Hold L SSC R 1 Steps Completed spare spare L PB1 R PB1SW Input MD L PB2 R PB2SW Input MD L PB3 R PB3SW Input MD LHA1 R 1 Alarm I is Active L N1 R W 1 Alarm 1 is Not Acknowledged L E1 R W 1 Alarm 1 is Enabled L A2 R 1 Alarm 2 is Active L N2 R W 1 Alarm 2 is Not Acknowledged L E2 R W 1 Alarm 2 is Enabled L A3 R 1 Alarm 3 is Active L N3 R W 1 Alarm 3 is Not Acknowledged L E3 R W 1 Alarm 3 is Enabled L A4 R 1 Alarm 4 is Active L N4 R W 1 Alarm 4 is Not Acknowledged L E4 R W 1 Alarm 4 is Enabled 052 R W 1 Alarms Out of Service 1 Configuration has Changed L NA R W 1 Unacknowledged Loop Event L AE R 1 Active Loop Event spare Range 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 Coil MB 00296 48 1 00297 48 1 00298 48 1 00299 48 1 00300 48 1 00301 48 1 00302 48 1 00303 48 1 00304 48 1 00305 48 1 00306 48 1 00307 48 1 00308 48 1 00309 48 1 00310 48 1 00311 48 1 00312 48 1 00313 48 1 00314 48 1
362. r was tested Individual test results may vary Radiated Immunity tests caused deviations beyond the standard performance specifications of the Universal Analog Inputs thermocouple Type K and RTD DIN at certain frequencies as listed in Table 1 All tests on the 353 were conducted with a field strength listed in Table 1 However CE allows tests in the ITU bands 87 108 174 230M amp 470 790M to be conducted with a field strength of 3 V m This will effectively reduce the deviations within these bands by a factor of approximately 8 1 10 9 I 1 4 10 Volts meter 500M 750M 850 950M 10 Volts meter 90 72 5 2 62 10 Volts meter 16 186 RTD 5 0 dH 0 10Voltsimeter 206 RTD 12 3Volts meter 206 2410 RTD 500M 950M Thermocouple 5 5 750M 10 Volts meter 750M 950 Thermocouple 3 3 10 Voltsimeter 206 Thermocouple 3 07 3 Volts meter 206 210 Thermocouple 06 Table 1 Annex to the EC Declaration of Conformity April 2012 13 13 Model Designation and Specifications UM353 1B 13 14 April 2012 UM353 1B Abbreviations And Acronyms 14 0 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS This section contains definitions for many of the abbreviations and acronyms that frequently appear in this User s Manual Less frequently used terms are defined where they appear Where a term has more than one meaning context will
363. rature exposure to sunlight vibration types of contaminates Station Common COM Terminal 6 e Connect station common to the user s instrument bus common at only one point e Station common is electrically isolated from case safety ground the green ground screw Terminals 6 9 18 21 24 34 40 and 42 are electrically connected Use the terminals that allow the best wire routing and the least stress on components such as range resistors Digital Input Commons DIN Digital input commons are isolated from the station common and case safety ground Connector Terminal and Ground Screw Torque Specifications e connector terminals 5 in Ibs 0 56 m e green case safety ground screw 20 in lbs 2 26 N m Crimp On solderless Connectors pin style crimp on connector can be used when two or more wires or a combination of wires and component leads are to be inserted into a connector terminal at the rear of the case Wires and leads are crimped in the connector and the connector pin inserted in the Crimp On selected connector terminal The connector can provide a more secure Signal Input Wire Connector connection when multiple leads are involved An example of its use is shown at 5 right Several crimp on connectors are provided in various Siemens 353 a 8 installation kits and they are available from most electrical supply sources Range Resistor g Wire Routing and Conduit DC wiring should be separated from AC w
364. rmware is intended for a Design Level Model 353 with 4 00 4 01 or 4 02 firmware Firmware is installed using the Controller Firmware Upgrade Utility version 4 03 available for download from http support automation siemens com US view en 51785815 The download includes the Upgrade Utility and controller firmware For more information about the utility and firmware installation steps refer to Software Release memo SR15939 71 6 ENHANCEMENTS The following enhancements are included in version 4 03 firmware Universal T C inputs At power up a design level 353 controller with an I O Expander Board will now correctly clear an error status retained from the previous session Faceplate buttons UNITS and TAG now require only a single press to update the faceplate display Previously more that one press could be needed OPERATIONAL CONSIDERATIONS In the STATN Station Parameters function block parameters CONFG LO and PARAM LO can have a value of either 0 or 1 2 or 3 a 0 allows writes 1 2 or 3 prevents writes There is no difference in operation in selecting a 1 2 or 3 Earlier User s Manuals list write values as YES NO which was correct for earlier firmware Later manuals list values 1 2 or 3 incorrectly Reads are always enabled Simultaneously pressing faceplate buttons 1 and PB2 will cause the loop status to toggle even if the and PB2 function blocks are not configured
365. roller output has MINSCALE and MAXSCALE parameters allowing the output signal to be scaled for engineering ranges other than the default of 0 100 PRCT This may be necessary when the controller output is the setpoint to another controller The Autotune feature is accessible using the TUNE pushbutton when AUTOTUNE is set to YES It can be initiated while the loop is in Auto or Manual The autotuner when initiated replaces the PD controller with an on off control function places the A M block in Auto if in Man and cycles the control loop through six on off cycles while learning the process dynamics which it uses to provide tuning recommendations for the PD controller The DEV parameter is the maximum amount in that the process should deviate from the setpoint during the on off cycles This parameter can be set manually or can be configured as AUTO When AUTO is configured the autotuner will set the DEV to 4 times the HYS This is the minimum value needed to provide good autotuning results The HYS parameter is the amount that the process must deviate from setpoint before switching the output in the opposite direction This value must be equal to or slightly greater than any process noise band If the noise band can not be determined the autotuner will compute it at the start of an autotuning exercise when the HYS parameter has been configured as AUTO The STEP parameter is the amount that the valve will change on the first 1 5 on o
366. rr 3 38 3233 DOU E Digital Outputs a ttt t ar o lo dedii deis 3 38 3 2 34 DIM Dedd Time Table t ERR EE ERE RUE 3 39 3 2 35 DWE Digital Write Ethernet ie cecinere 3 40 3 236 DYE pori e ea annonis 3 41 3 2 37 External Internal Transfer Switch esee nennen nenne nennen nenne 3 42 3 2 38 ESL Events Sequence Logger uoo qued ip entes ee pe Renta 3 43 3 2 39 EXP NATURAL 3 44 3 2 40 EXT EXPONENTIATION sosrernvororonononorererennrnrararererensnrerunnsenenenrsvenerenensursreserenensenererensnrresus ner 3 44 32441 FTG Falling Edge Trigger enean 3 45 3242 GB Gam amp 3 45 3 22 43 HEID Old vasene rettet e e dui det tete ei 3 45 3 2 44 ID 1D Controller 2e Street eee e XE este ene uie beet ose Pee be eeu eer 3 46 3 245 LE Eead E g eoe eb dote parere a em ep t ER Re 3 47 32 46 LMT Litt n eoe ete urere a 3 47 3247 LN NATURAELOGARITHM 5 ngo staat 3 48 3 2 48 LOG EOGARITHM BASE 10 notet eere 3 48 3249 MTH Math eher noeh eet estere bem tremulis 3 49 3 2 50 M l phicati n n ah naa rt Rr AER GS RR RI GERENTE D nies 3 50 32 51 NND 1 incedo elected e De bp eee Per 3 50 32 52 NOR NOREOS IC eigen ep Re EP ERE BUD
367. s registers that can be accessed from any device having Modbus TCP Ethernet capability See the DIE function block Section 3 2 27 for a listing of these registers 3 2 33 DOUT Digital Outputs DOUT function blocks are used to turn on remote devices powered from an external source The negative terminal of the external power source must be connected to station common The transistor switch will turn on when the block input S is high 1 and will turn off when low 0 Two digital output function blocks are available on the Controller Board RELAY 1 1 24 V de 1 1 1 DIGITAL OUTPUT ETHERNET Input 0 EM ver outeur THERNET Input F Ethernet Network I NIPIUIT 0 loop tag block tag output null I 1 INPUT 1 tag block tag output null I NPUT 2 INPUT20 tag block tag output null INPUT 3 INPUT30 oop tag block tag output null INPUT 4 INPUTA4 tag block tag output null 5 inputs 9 tag block tag output null I NIPUTT 6 iNPUT6 9 oop tag block tag output null I NIPIUT 7 INPUT7 oop tag block tag output null I NIPUTT 8 inputs tag block tag output null I NIPIUT 9 iNPUTO 5 tag block tag output null I NPUT A 4
368. s each function block This type of troubleshooting analysis is intended to be implemented in an off line test bench situation On line checks of the controller input and output signals i e analog and digital can be performed without affecting station operation Signal tracing is usually carried out behind an instrument panel Refer to the Installation section Table 7 1 for rear terminal assignments There are no user settable jumpers or switches on either the Controller or I O Expander board ETHERNET ACTIVITY LED The Ethernet LED is located on the exposed edge of the MPU Controller board as shown in Figure 10 2 The LED will blink with each received communication MMC ACTIVITY LED The MultiMediaCard LED is located on the exposed edge of the MPU Controller board see Figure 10 2 The LED blinks when a file is being written to or read from the MMC The card or the file being transferred may be corrupted if the MMC is ejected from the MMC Socket while the LED is blinking Inserting a card into the MMC Socket see Figure 10 3 on the front edge of the Controller board will cause the MMC LED to flash indicating that the controller software is accessing the card To remove an press the eject button on the MMC socket see Figure 10 3 Do not eject the card while the LED is flashing If an MMC FAIL or FileErr message appears on the alphanumeric display refer to Section 10 4 3 for MultiMediaCard error code descriptions 10 4 April
369. s information is given in the Help gt About screen e If there is a problem with product operation e 5 the problem intermittent or repeatable What symptoms have been observed e What steps configuration changes loop modifications etc were performed before the problem occurred e What status messages error messages or LED indications are displayed e What troubleshooting steps have been performed e 5 the installation environment e g temperature humidity within the product s specified operating parameters For software does the PC meet or exceed the minimum requirements e g processor memory operating system e copy of the product Service Instruction User s Manual or other technical publication should be at hand The Siemens public Internet site see the table has current revisions of technical literature in Portable Document Format for downloading e To send an instrument to Siemens for warranty or non warranty service call Repair Service and request Return Material Authorization RMA IMPORTANT An instrument must be thoroughly cleaned decontaminated to remove any process materials hazardous materials or blood borne pathogens prior to return for repair Read and complete the Siemens RMA form s The Siemens public Internet site has current revisions of technical literature in Portable Document Format pdf for downloading For support and the location of your local Siemens representative refer to
370. s of control functions Remote configuration requires a personal computer running the ilconfig Graphical Configuration Utility and either a configuration cable or a Modbus or Modbus TCP Ethernet network connection The configuration can be created at and downloaded from the personal computer A network connection is made at the controller s terminals or the Ethernet RJ45 connector The configuration cable plugs into the configuration port in the underside of a 353 Display Assembly The other end of this cable connects to a personal computer s serial port or to a modem A WARNING Explosion hazard or other circuits Explosion can cause death or serious injury JJ In a potentially explosive atmosphere remove power from the 22 equipment before connecting or disconnecting power signal Comply with all pertinent regulations regarding installation in a hazardous area April 2012 2 3 Configuration Overview UM353 1B configuration is designed by first arranging the needed function blocks in fashion similar to that of a PI amp D drawing Parameter and calibration values are determined next and then entered on Configuration Documentation Form or into ilconfig the Graphical Configuration Utility The controller may then be configured locally by entering the information on the form into the controller s configuration memory by way of the controller faceplate Alternatively a configuration developed in ilconfig c
371. se within each ESN 000 configured LOOP The operator display function block e g Rane S output Operator Display for Controllers defines the loop type the function of the Process PID local faceplate as well as the processing of commands coming from a 8 SD CONTROLLER DOS remote workstation A single controller function block can be selected TE C AT Warning from one of five available choices ID ON OFF PD PIDAG and PID mia NEM within each loop When used within a loop the unique block name becomes lt loop gt lt block gt e g TC2053 PID for the PID controller used in loop 2053 Arithmetic Function Blocks are also designated as LOOP function blocks and can be used as many times as needed in each loop Each use of a block is puta FAT automatically assigned a unique name i e 01 02 within each gt Output 1 loop so that the unique block name becomes lt loop gt lt block gt e g ADD SUB MUL DIV TC2053 MATHOI CP Logic Function Blocks are also designated as LOOP function blocks and be used as many times as needed in each loop Each use of block is ED a automatically assigned a unique name i e ANDO1 02 within each loop so that the unique block name becomes lt loop gt lt block gt e g ED m TC2053 ANDO1 EP 1 4 April 2012 UM353 1B Introduction General Purpose Func
372. sent in the controller Messages are displayed according to priority until all active messages have been acknowledged If no link code has been assigned to the active message the SE code will remain at its last value Table 10 2 lists on line error and status codes For most error codes replace the involved circuit board to repair the controller For most status codes acknowledge or otherwise respond to the situation Table 10 2 On Line Error and Status Codes DISPLAYED LINK MODBUS DESCRIPTION CODE Hex Dec 0001 MPU Controller board A D Error T O Expander Board Universal Analog Input 2 A D Error AINU2 000A I O Expander Board Universal Analog Input 2 T C Burnout AINU2 RJ 000B Expander Board Universal Analog Input 1 Reference Junction Error UDIN El 000C 2 a 4 ei 6 AINUI TC 5007 7 VO Expander Board Universal Analog Input 1 T C Burnout 8 Edi 0s pu 12 VO Expander Board Universal Digital Input 1 Underflow Error ai AINUI RJ 0008 I O Expander Board Universal Analog Input 1 Reference Junction Error AINU2 AD 0009 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 11 12 13 AIH Noe JalamalHigh 0 02 AILO 00 2 AIHID None jAlamAlHighDevition AILOD Noe Alarm Al Low Deviation 000000000000 AIDEV Non 1 Deviation AIOR JNone jAlamAlOvemage 00000000 None JjAlnmmA2High 0 Noe J A
373. splayed on the local faceplate using the ioci gp D button When first stepping into loop using the Loop button the Process 4 Alarm DeadBAND 5 01051050 08 PU EN Process 1 Alarm A Power Up ENabled NO YES ves loop tag will be displayed e g AnDisp1 However if there is a point 1B EUEN Process B Power Up ENatled 9 NONES ED within the loop that has an unacknowledged alarm that point will be 2 PU Process 2 Alarm B Power Up ENabled s NO YES ves M PU EN Process3 Alarm A Power Up ENabled s NO YES YES displayed alternating between the point tag and the alarm condition PU Process Alarm B Power Up ENabled s NOYES ves 4 PU Process 4 Alarm A Power Up ENabled s NO YES ves e g PI693 3B LO Press the D button to scroll through the analog 4B PU process 4 Alarm B Power Up ENabled 5 NO YES ves 2 2 PRIOR Process 1 Alarm A PRIORity 5 1 2 3 415 points displaying the point tag e g 712 in the alphanumeric and TB p OR Process 1 Alarm B 5 100305 8 e d Process 2 Alarm PRIORity s 1 2 3 4 5 the value of the point in the digital display e g 348 47 Press 2B I OR Process2 Alarm PRIORily 1 2845 PRIOR Process3 Alarm PRIORity 5 1 2 3 4 5 UNITS button to display the units of the point Press the Loop t
374. stable position most likely to cause tip over e Sharp Edges An accessible edge projection or corner of an enclosure opening frame guard handle or the like shall be smooth and well rounded and shall not cause a cut type injury during normal use of the equipment e Use of the equipment in a manner not specified by the manufacturer may impair the protection or performance provided by the equipment the power to the controller through a clearly labeled circuit breaker or on off switch that is located near the controller and is accessible by the operator The breaker or switch should be located in a non explosive atmosphere unless suitable for use in an explosive atmosphere e Following is a Declaration of Conformance with the standards or other normative documents stated on the certificate Forcritical applications using thermocouples and RTDs where improved performance is necessary at the frequencies of use other Siemens solutions are available The Siemens Sitrans T series of Temperature Transmitters with 4 20 ma outputs can be used as the input signal to the Model 353 e When using the contact closure as the frequency input to the Universal Digital Input the debounce feature for low frequencies may not function in an area of high Electrical Fast Transients The use of flow meters that provide solid state switches or contacts that do not bounce are recommended for these applications April 2012 13 11 Model Des
375. stained Action 0312850 Basic Display MD Message Display UOD Universal Operator Display BLOCK DIAGRAM PB3 Switch Operator Display Interface BOD LEDS UOD MSG pr MD HIST MDHIAC G J kkkkk kkkkk PB3 MDLOST MDLOAC MD R kkkkk MD Input NC gt 1 gt PS PB Switch NO e Output Momentary Action POWER UP When the switch is configured for momentary action it will always power up in the NC position For sustained action with the POWER UP parameter set to YES the switch will power up in the last position during hot or warm start and during a cold start it will power up in the NC position When the POWER UP parameter is set to NO the switch will power up in the last position during hot start During warm or cold start will power up in the NC position April 2012 3 67 Function Blocks UM353 1B 3 2 66 PCOM Phase COMmunication The Phase Communication PCOM function block is AE available on one per loop basis to enable Phase COMunication communication with a higher level device such as a PC po running a batch management software program When ESO the controller configuration is structured such that logic Emerg OR 2 Phase Emerg OR operations are partitioned in small phase operations the iT ok 9 Communication InterlocKed PCOM block facilitates the interface between the logic Phase Fail controlling the overal
376. stepping into a loop using the Loop button the loop tag will be displayed e g DigDisp1 Pressing the D button will scroll through the discrete points displaying the point tag e g SV 103 in the alphanumeric and the value of the input on the left 3 positions of the digital display e g On and the output in the right most 3 positions e g OFF The A M button will display the point mode and enable switching the point between auto amp manual using the A M button The manual value can be changed by turning the pulser and pressing the ACK button If the ACK button is not pressed within 4 5 seconds the display will return to the actual output value Operator Display for Discrete indication amp control ODD Input 0 D 00 Output 0 Input 1 ED Output 1 Input 2 B Operator Display O Output 2 Input 3 B for Output 3 Input a Discrete indication MA output amp 5 B control O Output 5 Input 6 B O6 Output 6 Input 7 O Output 7 Input 8 B 08 Output 8 Input 9 B 09 9 Input Output Input B OB Output Input Output Input D Ir Output D Input E E O Output E Input F O Output F Watch Dog 1 0 imputo TAG 6 ASCII Char 0 TAG 11 T AG 1 TAG 5 6 ASCII Char 1 TAG 12 T AIG Input2 TAG 5
377. t S SET Input LO Last Output don t care BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 2 86 SRT Square Root SRT function blocks compute the square root of input signal A The input has a built in low limit that will limit the signal to the square root computation to 0 0 LO Limit l gt A gt 0 0 01 BLOCK DIAGRAM SR FLIP FLOP ESN 000 SR FLIP FLOP Output 1 Reset E Power Up LAST 8 NO YES YES INPUT S INPUTS loop tag block tag output nulh R INPUTR loop tag block tag output EISIN Exec Seq No 001 to 250 POWER UP During a warm start when PU LAST is set to YES the block will initialize at the input output states at the instant power down occurred cold start will initialize the input output states to 0 SQUARE ROOT SRT ESN 000 Analog Input SQUARE ROOT Output 1 LIN P U T INPUT loop tag block tag output null ES Exec Seq No 001 to 250 3 88 April 2012 UM353 1B Function Blocks 3 2 87 SUB Subtraction SUB function blocks perform arithmetic subtraction on the two input signals Any unused input will be set to 0 0 All inputs should have the same engineering units If units are not consistent a SCL fu
378. t a 2 A PG gt gt 33 lt 0 lt 1033 gt gt 4 1 01 S b Output 1 scaling Setpoint R 1 inverse scaling t 12 1 Feedback i Auto lt l Absolute Value Mall Initialize lt i Absolute Error I et EE re M Ra RN NM D rM TM Cp M M NE i er M BLOCK DIAGRAM j 3 72 April 2012 UM353 1B Function Blocks The controller output has MINSCALE and MAXSCALE parameters allowing the output signal to be scaled for engineering ranges other than the default of 0 100 PRCT This may be necessary when the controller output is the setpoint to another controller The Autotune feature is accessible using the TUNE pushbutton when AUTOTUNE is set to YES and can be initiated while the loop is in Auto or Manual The autotuner when initiated replaces the PID with an on off control function places the A M block in Auto if in Man and cycles the control loop through six on off cycles while learning the process dynamics which it uses to provide tuning recommendations for the PID controller The DEV parameter is the maximum amount in that the process should deviate from the setpoint during the on off cycles This parameter can be set manually or can be configured as AUTO When AUTO is configured the autotuner will set the DEV to 4 times the HYS T
379. t 0 7 C Conformity eese 0 06 Software Output Type Analog configurable F R Ambient Temperature Effect 0 15 N Thermocouple Range Limits sss 200 C to 1300 C 325 F to 2370 F Performance Range 0 to 1300 C vulpe 0 5 Conformity eese lt 0 06 Software Output Type Analog configurable F R K Ambient Temperature Effect 0 10 Type DIN 43760 751 0 003850 Range Limits esses 185 C to 622 C 300 F to 1152 F dere EES 0 4 Software Output Type Analog configurable F R K Ambient Temperature Effect 0 04 C C Type US NBS126 0 003902 Range Limits sess 185 C to 613 C 300 F to 1135 F A CCUFAC i nete pene tuts 0 4 Software Output Analog configurable F R Ambient Temperature Effect 0 04 Type JIS 1604 RTD 0 003916 Range 1111115 185 C to 610 C 300 F to 1130 F 0 4 Software Output Analog configurable R K Ambient Temperature Effect 0 04 Slidewire Resistance
380. t 1 EEE E ox 01 Input X pupul X inpurx loop tag block tag output E S N Exec Seq No 00010250 000 MR BLOCKDAGRAM 3 2 40 EXT EXPONENTIATION EXT function blocks will provide an output that equals input raised to the power of X input All negative values of input EXPONENTIATION Y will be treated as 0 0 When input Y is 0 0 and X is negative the output will be set to the maximum number i e 1 17 38 ESN 000 Input X xp x Her der ey tee bee gt Input I 1 1 I Input Y BLOCK DIAGRAM Input Y Y X tag block tag output null Y iNPUTY loop tag block tag output E S N Exec Seq No 00010250 000 3 44 April 2012 UM353 1B Function Blocks 3 2 41 Falling Edge Trigger FTG function blocks provide a high 1 output for one scan cycle each time input transitions from high 1 input to low 0 input cy cw em Cm CR e ew c ct cm cm Ca Output 1 Pulse Input p
381. t to 1 and or T2 and when used the internal preset will be ignored If an external preset is used the value can be viewed but not changed in QUICKSET The action of the presets is also determined by the action setting of the integrator When DIR ACT is set to YES the presets will be direct acting and will cause outputs A1 or A2 to go high when the integrated total is equal to or higher than the preset If set to NO the total will cause A1 or A2 to go high when the total is equal to or lower than the preset The actual preset value is available on outputs T1 and T2 The function block can also provide a pulse output to drive a remote counter The pulse output function integrates the input signal using the same time base and output pulses at a rate determined by the PUL SCAL configuration parameter This parameter determines the change to the integrator total that must occur to cause a new output pulse In the above example if PUL SCAL equals 10 a total of 30 pulses will have occurred in the same time period The PUL SCAL value is also the multiplier that would be used to read the exact value of gallons to a remote counter The pulse output function operates on the absolute value of the analog input When both negative and positive values are to be totalized a CoMParator block can be used to sense the polarity of the analog input and the CMP output can then indicate a direction to the counter Be sure that the PUL SCAL setting does not require a pulse
382. t up while the controller performs power up diagnostics April 2012 9 1 Controller and System Test UM353 1B If power up diagnostic test fails an error code will be displayed on the alphanumeric display Refer to Sections 10 3 and 10 4 for troubleshooting error codes If WAIT remains displayed for more than I minute the controller is not powering up correctly and power connections should be checked for loose wiring 9 1 2 Configuration 1 Determine the current configuration refer to Section 9 0 above Then perform one of the following steps To load FCO101 go to step 2 IMPORTANT Loading FCO101 will overwrite the current configuration and any entries made since shipment Skip step 2 if the installed configuration is to be retained To proceed with the installed configuration go to Section 9 1 3 2 To load FCO101 locally or to download it from PC running the Graphical Configuration Utility refer to Section 2 5 Configuration Procedure as necessary and to Section 4 Factory Configured Options for the block diagram and parameter values 3 Edit the configuration as desired Refer to Section 9 1 5 Modifying an FCO 9 1 3 Input Output Press the D button on the faceplate to scroll through Loop01 S Setpoint LoopO1 V Valve Output and Loop01 P Process Input Note from the FCO101 block diagram that INPUT P is configured as the output from function block AIN1 INPUT S is configured as the output of function block
383. t while NO will cause the integrator output to A input acy loop tag block tag output null decrease When INIT VAL is set to a predetermined batch 86 INPUTS loop tag block tag output nul d e ill id d LNPUT INPUTR loop tag block tag output amount ECICASINE action wi provi e a count down IJINPUT 1 INPUT T1 loop tag block tag output null counter This is sometimes preferred since the count 2 INPUTT20 loop tag block tag output EISIN Exec Seq No 001 to 250 output then represents the amount remaining in a batch ZDO is used for setting a small positive value insuring that the integrator will stop when the flow is shut off which might not otherwise happen if a flowmeter zero is out of calibration The function block has two trip presets PRESET 1 and PRESET 2 These can be set to cause a high output 1 from Al or A2 when the count total equals or exceeds the preset values The preset values entered in configuration can also be set using the QUICK button if the parameter QUICKSET has been set to YES The QS DPP parameter allows fixing the decimal point during quickset to speed up changes to these settings A parameter value with no decimal point position the default is for applications dealing with the totalizer count as whole units An external preset can be used by providing an inpu
384. table for non incendive CE compliant and ABS approved 77777 Contact Siemens Industry Inc Process Instrumentation Division for the latest model designation information availability of certain options and current electrical approvals Always refer to the labels on the controller case for approvals and certifications before installing configuring connecting data transfer cables or servicing a controller 13 2 April 2012 UM353 1B Model Designation and Specifications 13 2 ACCESSORIES The following two tables list the accessories currently available ACCESSORY PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION ilconfig Graphical iCONFIG Vn nn Windows 98 NT 2000 and XP compatible software for Configuration Utility PC based controller configuration and creation of function block diagram Transfer configuration to and from controller via Modbus or Ethernet Vn nn the latest software version will be supplied Includes 16353 61 Cable see description below 16353 63 Adapter see description below Transmitter Power Supply 15124 1 Acopian Model B24G210M 24 Vdc 2 0A Adapter Bezel 15738 123 A panel cutout adapter for mounting a controller in a 3 x 6 panel cutout Blank Filler Panel 15738 168 Enhances control room appearance by covering a panel cutout intended for future mounting of a controller Loop Identification Card Custom printed loop identification for flip down access door Specify up to 5 lines with 24 characters per line
385. tag output INPUT R loop tag block tag output ozz m vv Acc EDGE TRIGGER 0 NO 1 YES 1 moa 219120 Exec Seq No H 001 to 250 3 90 April 2012 UM353 1B Function Blocks 3 2 91 TSW Transfer Switch TSW_ function blocks select one of two analog input signals as the output signal Input A becomes the output when input SC is low 0 and input B will be the output when input SC goes high 1 Unconfigured inputs will default to SC low 0 A 0 0 B 100 0 A Input A b a Output 1 B Input B gt 01 witch Command 5 5 0313550 BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 2 92 Exclusive OR Logic XOR function blocks perform logical exclusive OR function on all three inputs An unused input will cause the block to function as two input The output will be low 0 when all configured inputs are low 0 or when all configured inputs are high 1 TRANSFER SWITCH TSW ESN 000 Input A aD InputB B TRANSFER SWITCH Switch Command m Output 1 INPUT A loop tag block tag output INPUT B loop tag block tag output S INPUT SC loop tag block tag output null Eis Exec Seq No 001 to 25
386. ted in a user supplied enclosure located out of doors or in a location whose environmental parameters exceed controller operating specifications A thin bead of silicon sealant is often applied between the controller s Display Assembly and the mounting panel to prevent air or liquid leakage at this joint Do not mount the controller where direct sunlight can strike the faceplate or case Direct sunlight can make the displays difficult to read and will interfere with heat dissipation Mount the controller either horizontally or with a backward tilt i e the front of the case higher than the rear If the controller is to be mounted with some electronic recorders or with pneumatic recorders or stations tilt back restrictions for these units may have a bearing on panel design and layout Route electrical power to the controller through a clearly labeled circuit breaker fuse or on off switch that is located near the controller and is accessible by the operator The breaker or switch should be located in a non explosive atmosphere unless suitable for use in an explosive atmosphere Thermocouple inputs are accommodated with an optional I O Expander board and a Reference Junction temperature sensor At the factory two Reference Junctions are included in a Range Resistor and Reference Installation Kit For troubleshooting and assembly replacement see Section 10 Maintenance Refer to this material when installing or storing a controller or an MPU Control
387. temperature mv for millivolts and is not affected by the temperature units conversion digital filter scaling or the output bias adjustment The full block output with these parameters applied can be viewed in the VIEW mode within loop configuration During a hot a warm or a cold start the function block will temporarily by pass the digital filter to enable the output to initialize at the actual hardware input signal Note that the field calibration is erased when the SENsor TYPE is changed Keke Ep E JE jor EEE Ac A MM MC MCI MCI MC HE SLIDE WIRE OHM MV TN AN AN E ENG UNITS VE NIA Y J z L a NL Universal S Digital Range I d R Converter lt 1 a gt gt 01 EEE ue j Quality Test gt QS 354 and 354 only Models 353 Models 353 BLOCK DIAGRAM April 2012 3 17 Function Blocks UM353 1B Table 3 7 Input Types AINU Block ENGineering UNITS AVAILABLE ON INPUT TYPES Deg C degrees Celsius JT C KT C ET C ST C RT C BT C NT C DRTD URTD JRTD Deg F degrees Fahrenheit JT C ET C ST C RT C BT C NT C DRTD URTD JRTD Table 3 8 Calibration Input Values AINU Block TYPE DESCRIPTION OPERATING RANGE FIELD CAL FLD
388. teps and up to 256 discrete inputs and outputs In addition the Graphical Configuration Utility ilconfig can be used to design the logic ladder diagram Combining these features with continuous control loops within the same controller offers a well integrated solution for small batch operations Several function blocks are available at the station level for configuration of STATION level parameters such as the station address and station tag name Function blocks include the CLOCK block and the ETHERNET block to configure parameters such as the IP address All other function blocks are used for configuration within an individual LOOP Control implementations are configured in the Siemens 353 by first creating a loop then entering a unique loop tag name and selecting function blocks for use within that loop A number of loops can be configured in the Siemens 353 and a number of function block types are available as described in the sections that follow 1 2 1 LOOP Function Block Types Local I O Function Blocks are provided on both the MPU Controller Board 1 and the I O Expander Board These blocks can be used in any LOOP but as D anatoc neur fixed resources are expendable When used within a loop the unique block amns Nede name becomes lt loop gt lt block gt e g TC2053 AINI for Analog Input 1 used in loop TC2053 gt Output 1 Quality Status Fixed Loop Function Blocks can be selected once for u
389. ters 1 amp 2 4 20 mA 5 l gt gt gt Analog Output 3 Universal Relay Digital Inputs gt gt gt gt Outputs 1 amp 2 Digital S Input 4 2 di 8 gt Figure 12 1 Siemens 353 Design Level Block Diagram April 2012 12 1 Circuit Description UM353 1B 12 2 MPU CONTROLLER BOARD The heart of the 353 is the powerful microprocessor based MPU Controller Board The flexible software supports reusable function blocks beneficial in solving a vast array of control strategies such as single loop cascade and dual loop The Controller Board assembly contains both analog and digital circuits The analog circuitry operates in real time while the microprocessor based digital circuitry operates at high speed under program control The MPU microprocessor unit contains 32 bit core System Integration Unit SIU Communications Processor Module CPM a Serial Peripheral Interface module SPI UARTs timer modules and Fast Ethernet Controller FEC The MPU is capable of arithmetic logical and support circuit control functions and interacts with surrounding on board and off board circuitry to control the internal operation of the 353 The MPU Board also contains 32 bit SDRAM 16 Bit NVRAM and 16 bit ROM a 2 wire RS485 connection a RS232 connection and an Ethernet connection The MPU communicates with the RAM ROM via the SIU All communication between the MPU and the I O display and expander board
390. the controller will ignore change to the RATIO parameter value and continue to run with the pre download value April 2012 3 79 Function Blocks UM353 1B 3 2 73 RCT Repeat Cycle Timer RCT function blocks provide repeat time cycles that can REPEAT CYCLE TIMER be used in logic timing operations or with PID blocks to provide adaptive on times controlled by the PID block ROT ESN 000 N ET Elapsed Time Output ET will provide the time in minutes that has elapsed during the current cycle ON OFF Output RT is the remaining time in the current cycle and will equal the total cycle time ON OFF when the timer has not been started The ON and OFF TIME is adjustable over the full range of the display which is 0 00000 to 999999 If the delay time is set to less than the scan time of the station the delay time will equal the scan time Start PD REPEAT CYCLE TIMER Adapt Time RT gt Remaining Time Output 1 IT 1 IME OFF TIME minutes 5 Real 0 0 ON TIME minutes 8 Real 0 0 ILIAISIT Power Up LAST S NO YES YES 1 S INPUTS H loop tag block tag output 1 INPUT AT 9 loop tag block tag output null Exec Seq No 001 to 250 Input S asserted high 1 will cause the RCT block to start the timing cycl
391. the current limit value will be moved to gt HISELECTOR LO SELECTOR 1 1 High limit Status gt HS Low limit Status gt LS 1 1 LO LIMIT HI LIMIT 1 1 1 1 BLOCK DIAGRAM April 2012 3 87 Function Blocks UM353 1B PRIORITIES The priority assigned to SL PRIOR will affect the operation as follows the outputs HS and LS will go high with all priority assignments including 0 when event is active 1 Bargraphs event LEDs and condition will flash 2 Bargraphs event LEDs and condition will flash ACK button must be used to stop flashing Flashing will stop if ACK or if event clears 3 Event LEDs and condition will flash ACK button must be used to stop flashing 4 Event LEDs and condition will flash Flashing will stop if ACK or event clears 5 Event LEDs and condition will turn on when event is active and off when the event clears 0 No display action occurs when event is active The HL and LL status bits are always set to 0 3 2 85 SRF_ SR Flip Flop SRF function blocks perform a set dominant flip flop function as detailed in the truth table An unused R input will be set high 1 and an unused S input will be set low 0 SR FLIP FLOP TRUTH TABLE 5 R LO 01 x 1 0 Output 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 R Input 01 Outpu
392. this space The actual loop that can be accessed is contained in the Modbus parameter MSLCP Modbus Sequencer amp Timers Configuration Pointer located in register 40041 This register contains the Modbus Index for the loop that can be configured with these extended parameters small number of these parameters have also been mapped in the areas listed within the actual loop area for those Masters that cannot access the extended area In addition there are number of registers reserved for the mappings of Modbus registers used in the Peer to Peer functionality of the Ethernet function blocks Sequencer Mask Configurations x10001 x18000 Real Time Trip Block Configurations eee x19001 x19021 Sequencer Time amp Analog Configurations x20001 x20999 Timer Function Block Configurations eee x21001 x21009 Reserved Modbus TCP Block x29001 x29019 Reserved Modbus TCP Analog Inputs Static Data x30001 x30352 Reserved Modbus TCP Analog Outputs Static Data x30353 x30608 Reserved Modbus TCP Digital Inputs Static Data x30609 x30704 Reserved Modbus TCP Coil Inputs Static Data x30705 x30832 Reserved Modbus TCP Analog Inputs Dynamic Data x30833 x30896 Reserved Modbus TCP Digit
393. tion 1 4 4 has lists of the items a typical controller shipment If the Display ATTENTION Assembly or a circuit board s must be installed in the case go to Section 10 5 labels below and apply fem Assembly Replacement for installation information in a visible place near the assembly DANGER DANGER Refer to Section 13 9 Agency Approvals as necessary CSA Hazardous Location Precautions and Special Conditions for Safe Use are included in this section Use of the equipment in a manner not specified by the manufacturer may impair the protection provided by the equipment warning label shown at right is included with the controller Install the label in highly visible location near the rear terminals of the controller to insure that all plant personnel with access to controller terminals are aware of potential electrical shock hazard and if installation is in hazardous area possible explosion hazard a B muttiple an cause death or s rlous injury Disconnect all circuits and verify no hazardous voltage 7 1 INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS A Siemens 353 is intended for flush panel mounting in a vibration free instrument panel or rack in an indoor or sheltered location Mount a single controller in a single station panel cutout or mount several controllers in a row in a multiple station panel cutout For a watertight panel mount each controller in a single station cutout The controller can be moun
394. tion Blocks are also designated as LOOP function HD ESN 000 blocks and include blocks that do not fall into the arithmetic or logic categories These can be used as many times as needed and each use will automatically be assigned a unique name e g HLDO1 HLD02 within each loop so that the unique block name becomes lt loop gt lt block gt e g TC2053 HLDO1 HOLD O1 Output 1 Ethernet Function Blocks are used as needed within a LOOP for communication over Ethernet They will automatically be assigned a unique name e g AIEO1 DIEO1 within each loop when it is configured so that the m unique block name becomes lt loop gt lt block gt e g TC2053 AIEO01 ETHERNET gt Output OR gt Output O1 Output QS 1 2 2 Power Up Initialization The Siemens 353 will retain in the station NVRAM calculated block values e g outputs elapsed time last input output logic states including the time since power was lost Three power up modes are used in the 353 hot warm and cold These affect the initialization of function blocks and are configured by two power up timers warm and cold included in STATION parameters The station will initialize a hot start when power up occurs prior to the expiration of the warm timer A cold start will occur when power up occurs after the expiration of the cold timer and a warm start will take place when the station powers up after the expiration of the warm timer but prior to the expiration of the
395. to derivative action only during startup v gt oo Ef x LO 2 GAIN 3 2 gt Selector Selector ne A HI LIMIT Batch Pre Load LO HI p i 2 J gt GAIN X 2 2 Selector Selector Output O1 A A LO LIMIT Rev2 BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 28 April 2012 UM353 1B Function Blocks 3 2 20 BIAS Bias BIAS function blocks can be used on one per loop basis and provide means to bias signal such as the setpoint in BIAS an external set application Inputs A and E external bias summed and then added to the operator adjustable bias Range Input AD B gt Output 1 put BIAS Track Command input TC asserted high 1 will cause the Track Command MP L Tracked Output block output to track input TV and BIAS to be recalculated Track Variable TV as B TV A E The value of B will be clamped at the HI and LO LIMIT settings It is important to realize that the min RG RanGe PoinTeR S loop tag block tag null inputs and outputs are in engineering units and the limits BIAS 5 0 00 1 1 1 High Bias LIMIT 5 Real 150 0 must be adjusted accordingly with the expected minimum ILIO Low eias L
396. to display MINSCALE Press STEP DOWN to display current 0 of range Turn the pulser knob to display 1 in the last digit Display should read 0 00001 BJ GS OY FU Now press the left arrow TAG button Notice that the decimal place will move one place every time the button is pressed Press the arrow button until the display reads 100 000 and then press the STORE button 10 Press STEP UP 11 Turn the pulser knob or use the arrow button to display MAXSCALE 12 Press STEP DOWN to display 100 000 13 Press the right arrow button until display reads 0 00001 14 Turn the pulser knob to change the last digit to 5 Display should read 0 00005 15 Press left arrow button until display reads 500 000 and press store 16 Press STEP UP 17 Turn the pulser knob or the use arrow button to display DPP 18 Press STEP DOWN Notice 0 00 or 2 decimal places is the default Turn the pulser knob to set the number of decimal places to 0 0 or to show 1 decimal place on the display and press STORE button 19 Press STEP UP and turn the pulser knob or use the arrow button to display ENGUNITS 20 Press STEP DOWN Notice that the default units are PRCT 21 Use the arrow buttons to move the flashing cursor to the space before the P Now turn the pulser knob to display D Use the arrow button to move to the next position and turn the pulser knob to select E Repeat until display reads DEG F and pr
397. tpoint features RAMP ON OFF Ramp RATE TARGET setpoint and POWER UP SETPOINT The ramp feature can either use a ramp TIME ramp RATE USE RATE is set to YES as the default see SETPT function block details in Section 3 2 82 To see how the Ramp rate works make sure the controller is in AUTO mode and do the following steps 1 Press QUICK to display RRATE 2 Rotate the pulser knob to set the ramp RATE to 300 and press STORE Since the SETPT range pointer is configured for AIN1 scaled 100 to 500 DEG F 300 will represent a ramp rate of 300 DEG F min 3 Press QUICK to display TARGET Set the target to 250 and press STORE 4 Press QUICK to display R ON OFF Turn the pulser knob to change the setting to ON and press STORE 5 Press ENTER EXIT to display the setpoint on the numeric display The setpoint should ramp to 25 in 30 seconds To change from a Ramp RATE to a Ramp TIME do the following steps 1 Press CONF to display LOOP Press STEP DOWN twice to display VIEW Press the right arrow button or turn the pulser knob to display EDIT FB Press STEP DOWN to display A M Turn the pulser knob to display SETPT Press STEP DOWN to display RG PTR Turn the pulser knob to display USE RATE Press STEP DOWN to display YES Turn the pulser knob to change to NO and press STORE Press STEP UP GE ON oe 90 10 Turn pulser knob counterclockwise or use left arrow button to display RTIME April 2012 9
398. tput DF Ethernet Network DF QS Output QS The IP ADRES parameter is used to configure the IP address of the source device The MB ADRES LUP IP ADGRESs 192 168 0 0 parameter allows Modbus address to be IMB _A DIR ES ADdRESSs 0 255 1 configured When connecting to other Siemens 353 we REGister t 1 65535 1 controllers the Modbus address is set to 1 In some UD uppate RATE M E P2P Ct Pa cases other devices may use a different address or T YiP E reGister TYPE InPut Holding InPut when going through a Modbus TCP gateway a Modbus network may have multiple devices each having a unique address The MB REG parameter identifies the location of the digital data in the source device The REG TYP parameter enables reading of Holding Registers Modbus Function Code 03 or Input Registers Modbus Function Code 04 Both are treated the same in most Modbus devices but the Input type is the most common usage The use of DOE blocks in other Siemens 353 controllers as the input source is defined by using the Modbus Registers from the table below The UD RATE parameter configures the rate at which the block will request data The P2P setting will update the data at the rate set by the 2 RATE parameter in the ETHERNET block The Ct setting will update the data at the cycle time of the controller Ou
399. tput QS indicates the quality of the received data and will go high 1 when the data is bad This is normally associated with failure to receive data due to a communication failure or a misconfiguration of the source FB MB FB MB FB MB FB MB Number Register Number Register Number Register Number Register DOEO1 31025 DOE09 31033 DOE17 31041 DOE25 31049 DOE02 31026 DOE10 31034 DOE18 31042 DOE26 31050 DOE03 31027 DOE11 31035 DOE19 31043 DOE27 31051 DOE04 31028 DOE12 31036 DOE20 31044 DOE28 31052 DOE05 31029 DOE13 31037 DOE21 31045 DOE29 31053 DOE06 31030 DOE14 31038 DOE22 31046 DOE30 31054 DOE07 31031 DOE15 31039 DOE23 31047 DOE31 31055 DOE08 31032 DOE16 31040 DOE24 31048 DOE32 31056 Note Registers listed are Extended Modbus Registers Not all Modbus devices support them 3 34 April 2012 UM353 1B Function Blocks 3 2 28 DIN Digital Inputs DIN function blocks can be used to sense a discrete signal from an external source and provide block output representing the state of this signal Blocks are available on the Controller Board and on the Expander Board Function block names IDs and terminal designators are listed in Section 7 4 Electrical Installation The block output is high 1 when the input is on and low 0 when off Output QS indicates the quality status of the output signal O1 and will be high 1 when the output is of
400. tput since the reset will wind up This requires the process to overshoot the setpoint in order to bring the controller output back down With a batch switch in the 100 0 feedback path lower reset value will be present when ILO LOw LIMIT 0 0 crossover occurs thus reducing or eliminating overshoot GT ul ds 2 S EEA ein eap 32 0 INPUT A loop tag block tag output null As input equals or exceeds the HI or LO LIMIT setting EESIN Exec Sed the output of the batch switch will be either decreased HI LIMIT or increased LO LIMIT changing the feedback signal and therefore the controller reset signal This maintains controller output at the batch switch limit setting and eliminates reset windup If controller has large proportional gain setting the reset can be modified too much such that the process may under shoot the setpoint during startup condition The BPL Batch Pre Load is adjusted to optimize the controller for startup conditions by limiting how much the batch switch can adjust the controller feedback signal When the controller output is within its normal operating output the batch switch has no effect on the controller This allows the controller to be tuned optimally for normal operating conditions and the batch switch to add additional compensation very similar
401. ty CLOCK real time CLOCK ETHERNET Modbus TCP Ethernet Communications 2 2 STATION HARDWARE BLOCKS Function blocks that are available during configuration depend on the hardware installed in the controller These blocks can be selected within a LOOP but as fixed resources once selected are no longer available The left column shows the minimum and maximum quantities of each block and the right column shows the quantity for each circuit board AINI 4 Analog Input MPU Controller Board 3 I O Expander Board 1 AINU1 2 Analog Input Universal I O Expander Board 2 3 Analog MPU Controller Board 2 I O Expander Board 1 4 Digital Input 22222 MPU Controller Board 3 I O Expander Board 1 2 Digital Input Universal I O Expander Board 2 DOUT1 2 Digital 2 22 MPU Controller Board 2 2 Relay I O Expander Board 2 2 3 LOOP FUNCTION BLOCKS The following blocks are available as needed within each loop in the quantities indicated the quantity is one if no number is shown Some blocks e g A M BIAS can be used only once within each LOOP Others e g ADD are reusable within a LOOP and can be used up to the maximum nu
402. ul Div Input B A 1 INput B BIAS 1 v pr He OPeration B OUTput HIN gt can gt 5 add Sub Mut Div SAN gt gt gt O1 Input Output 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 INput OUTput BIAS BIAS 1 BLOCK DIAGRAM April 2012 3 49 Function Blocks UM353 1B 3 2 50 MUL Multiplication MUL function blocks perform arithmetic multiplication on the three input signals Any unused input will be set to 1 0 and will therefore have no affect on the output 1 1 Input S 1 gt 01 Input B X Output 1 1 Input 1 1 BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 2 54 NND NAND Logic NND function blocks perform a logical NAND on the three inputs Any unused input will be set high 1 la a a a le BLOCK DIAGRAM MULTIPLICATION MUL ESN 000 Input A A B MULTIPLICATION Input c Output 1 INPUT H loop tag block tag output INPUT loop tag block tag output INPUT C loop tag block tag output 6 Exec Seq 001 to 250 NAND NND ESN 000 Input A ED 1 Input
403. ull null null 0 1 oncE INPUT 0 H ag block tag outpu INPUT 1 ag block tag outpu INPUT 2 H ag block tag outpu INPUT 3 ag block tag outpu INPUT 4 H ag block tag outpu INPUT 5 H ag block tag outpu INPUT 6 ag block tag outpu INPUT 7 ag block tag outpu INPUT 8 ag block tag outpu INPUT 9 INPUT9 loop tag block tag outpu INPUT loop tag block tag output INPUT INPUTB loop tag block tag output INPUT inputcw loop tag block tag output INPUT INPUTD loop tag block tag output INPUT INPUTE loop tag block tag output INPUT INPUTF loop tag block tag output INPUT INPUTT 5 loop tag block tag output P ADRES iPADdRESs nnn nnn nnn nnn 192 168 0 0 ADR ES wBADGRESs 0 255 MB REG modBus REGister 1 65535 D upDate TYPE oncE P2P Ct The Ct option is normally used only when writing time critical changes Input T can be used to trigger a write This would be used in cases where the oncE option has been selected input values do not change and there may be a concern that the receiving device has lost the values Output QS indicates the quality of the write operation and will go high 1 when the write is not completed successfully This is normally associated with failure of the destination device to receive data due to a communication failure or
404. ulse input must remain on for 20 msec to be recognized as valid pulse Output SF is linear with frequency and can be characterized using the CHR function block if necessary An engineering range and units are assigned to this signal using the MINSCALE MAXSCALE DPP and ENGUNITS parameters They are available to other blocks using the OR output connection Input R resets output CT to 0 0 Input D controls the direction of the count When direction input D is low 0 the count will move backwards including negative values The direction input feature enables the use of count down counters and it allows duplication of functions performed by previous computer pulse interfaces having Pulse Direction format Input TC asserted high 1 will force the scaled count to track an external signal This can be used in applications where the CT output is being used to set value e g setpoint that can be changed from another source The quality status output QS indicates the gt gt quality of the block outputs and is high 1 TV ee gt Count rack Comman when outputs IS or SF are of bad TC gt quality Bad quality indicates a failure in the K Count Total Lg OT hardware conversion circuit DIU CP OM ENG UNITS igi caler req POWER UP With PU LAST set to YES the r d EP
405. ure 7 1 As shipped from the factory the cover is not installed on the case 2 Locate the connector to be removed As necessary disconnect unclamp or unbundle wires connected to the connector to be removed Be sure there is sufficient slack in the wiring for connector removal 3 Loosen the two captive screws securing the removable portion of the connector to the fixed portion 4 Grasp the removable portion and pull it from the fixed portion Be careful not to stress or damage connected wires and components Installation 1 Align the removable portion of the connector with the fixed portion 2 Press the removable portion onto the fixed portion 3 Tighten the two captive screws Do not over tighten Check that wires and components remain connected securely 4 Install the cover as shown in Figure 7 1 April 2012 7 3 Installation UM353 1B To install or remove cover Squeeze both sides 1 16 to clear alignment tabs 7 3 2 Panel 1 2 i lE IS i ra 7 rz 3 emn 2 om Hr en eu E N N e 2 2 oi e e mie TF Oo 5 D D 2 1 SG 2 2 on 2 2 12
406. ures for calibration of analog input and output circuits Section 12 Circuit Description furnishes a block diagram level description of the controller s circuits Section 13 Model Designation and Specifications shows controller model numbers a list of accessories mechanical electrical and environmental specifications and a list of current agency approvals Section 14 Abbreviations and Acronyms is convenient reference for new users that explains many abbreviations and acronyms appearing in this manual April 2012 1 1 Introduction UM353 1B 1 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The Siemens 353 offers the control system designer the ultimate in flexibility and capability for the implementation of continuous solutions and batch solutions An exploded view of the controller appears in Figure 1 1 Connector Cover gt Ground Screw Voltage Input Approvals and Warning Label Warning and I O Capacity Label Mounting Clip Top and Bottom Nameplate O Ring Display I O Expander Assembly Board gt 7 Removable Portions of Connectors Te Display Assembly with K Connector Socket Operator Faceplate 1 Assembly Communications gt Pon on Underside RJ 45 Enemi Connector Case with Flange 2 NE Ethernet Connector MG00500a 3 MPU Controller Board 222 Display Assembly Cable MultiMediaCard Socket Flip Down Door with Loop ID Card Warning Label Case Assembly Figure
407. us TCP PB1 SWITCH PB1SW ESN 000 NC Input Inc NO Input mp PB1 Switch Message Display m PB Switch Output Switch ACTION 8 MOM SUS LOPU LIAIS T Power Up LAST 5 YES 5 MD HI STatus message 5 5 ASCII Char GREEN IMD S T MDLO STatus message 5 5 ASCII Char RED MID HI AIC MDHIACtion message 5 5 ASCII Char RED 10 MDLO ACtion message 5 5 ASCII Char GREEN INPUT NO 9 loop tag blocktag output null LUN PUT INPUTNC loop tag block tag output MD INPUT MD loop tag block tag output null EISIN Exec Seq 001 to 250 This block operates with an operator faceplate that includes green and red LEDs that are turned on using input MD A HI 1 input will turn on the Green LED and a LO the Red LED The default connection will be the PS output of the block but should be changed as required to display the correct status The message parameters do not apply to the current product PB1 Switch Operator Display Interface BOD LEDS MSG MDHIST MDHIAG N G kkkkk PB1 gt MDLOST MDLOAC lt MD f R ker Input NC gt o gt PS PB Switch Output Momentary Action Sustained Action
408. use a MATH function A C block that has built in scaling functions 2 2 NEA NEMNT EINE 459264 AED LINTE EN INPUT H loop tag block tag output LIN PIUT INPUT loop tag block tag output INPUT C loop tag block tag output A Exec Seq 001 to 250 1 1 Yt N B gt gt O1 N BLOCK DIAGRAM Revie April 2012 3 9 Function Blocks UM353 1B 3 2 4 AGA 3 Orifice Metering of Natural Gas function blocks can be used one per loop basis This block uses the AGA 3 American Gas Association Report 3 AGA 3 calculation to accurately measure the flow of natural gas using n an orifice meter with flanged taps The basic equations EN AG3 ESN 000 calculated by this block in accordance with AGA Report No 3 nputhw Orifice Metering of Natural Gas Part 3 November 1992 mu Pr MD eons Output Qb Catalog No XQ9210 are nput Tt gt Output nput Gr ter Qb V Pry muzo DA Zt 24 Zb 12 Fi Fo Fs Y Foy Fi FqF Ep dir diameter ref i 4 where volume flow rate at base conditions ne P b base Pressure psia d C composite or
409. usually indicate the meaning Terms that identify a function block are indicated by FB A ampere s AC action alternating current ACS Arccosine FB ACT acting ADD Addition FB address AIE Analog Input Ethernet FB AIN Analog Input FB AINU Analog Input Universal FB A M auto manual AOE Analog Output Ethernet FB 5 Advanced Process Automation and Control System ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange ASN Arcsine FB AT adaptive time autotune transfer Analog Trend Display FB Arctangent FB AWG American Wire Gauge BAT battery BATSW Batch Switch FB BATOT Batch Totalizer FB BPL batch pre load BOD Basic Operator Display C centigrade CAL calibrate calibration CHN channel CHR Characterizer FB CHAN channel CIE Coil Input Ethernet FB CL console local CMP Comparator FB COS Cosine FB CRC Cyclical Redundancy Check D deviation denominator DAM Deviation Amplifier FB DC direct current DEG degrees DEV deviation DG derivative gain DIE Digital Input Ethernet FB DID Digital Input Discrete FB DIG digital DIN Digital Input FB DINU Digital Input Universal FB DIR direct DIS Digital Input State DISP display DIV Division FB DLY delay DMM digital multimeter DNC Divide by N Counter FB DOD Digital Output Discrete FB
410. ut Mask 0000 FFFF 417999 S250GFO R W Step 250 Group F Output Mask 0000 FFFF 418000 Real TimeTrip Block Configurations Code R W Description Range Register MB RTTOLY R W Year 1999 419001 RTTOIM R W Month 1 12 419002 RTTOID R W Day 1 31 419003 RTTOIHR R W Hour 0 23 419004 RTTOIMN R W Minute 0 59 419005 RTTOISC R W Second 0 59 419006 RTTOIDA R W Day 0000 0000 OSMT WTFS 419007 RTTO2Y R W Year 1999 419008 RTTO2M R W Month 1 12 419009 RTTO2D R W Day 1 31 419010 RTTO2HR R W Hour 0 23 419011 RTTO2MN R W Minute 0 59 419012 RTTO2SC R W Second 0 59 419013 RTTO2DA R W Day 0000 0000 05 WTFS 419014 RTTO3Y R W Year 1999 419015 RTTO3M R W Month 1 12 419016 RTTO3D R W Day 1 31 419017 RTTO3HR R W Hour 0 23 419018 RTTO3MN R W Minute 0 59 419019 RTTO3SC R W Second 0 59 419020 RTTO3DA R W Day 0000 0000 OSMT WTFS 419021 6 26 April 2012 UM353 1B Data Mapping Sequencer Time amp Analog Configurations Code R W Description Range Register MB 5001 R W Step 1 Time Period min Real 420001 5001 R W Step I Analog End Point Real 420003 S002TIM R W Step 2 Time Period min Real 420005 5002 R W Step 2 Analog End Point Real 420007 S003TIM R W Step 3 Time Period min Real 420009 5003 R W Step 3 Analog End Point Real 420011 S004TIM R W Step 4 Time Period min Real 420013 004 R W Step 4 Analog End Point Real 420015 5246 R W Step 246 Time Period min Real 420981 S246AEP R W Step 246 Analog End Point Re
411. utput null INPUT D INPUTD loop tag block tag output INPUT E loop tag block tag output null INPUT F INPUTF loop tag block tag output INPUT InputTw loop tag block tag output null IP ADR ES iPADGRESs MB ADR ES MBADGESs 0 255 0 START STARTing Coil 1 65535 1 NO OF NO OF Coils 1 1 16 1 UD upDate TYPE t ONCE P2P Ct once 3 32 April 2012 UM353 1B Function Blocks 1 oncE will write once to the START CL Modbus Starting Coil The controller will write when any block input value changes state 3 Ct will update at the cycle time of the controller P2P will update at the controller peer to peer rate set in the ETHERNET block The Ct option is normally only used when writing time critical changes Input T can be used to trigger a write This would be used in cases where the oncE option has been selected input values do not change and there may be a concern that the receiving device has lost the values Output QS indicates the quality of the write operation and will go high 1 when the write is not completed successfully This is normally associated with failure of the destination device to receive data due to a communication failure or a misconfiguration of the device 3 2 26 DAM Deviation Amplifier DAM_ function blocks comput
412. ve been entered The Tb base Temperature deg F Real 60 0 METHANE composition Real 96 5222 AGA8 computation is time consuming and is calculated NITROGEN NITROGEN composition 52 over total of 100 cycles so as not to have any DI ox D Carbon DIOXiDe composition 5956 Doni THANE composition 1 8186 significant effect on the controller cycle time PROP ANE PROPANE composition ee WAT ER WATER composition 0 0 IBN i M HY SUL Hydrogen SULFiDe composition Real 0 0 Zs compressibility at standard conditions is calculated HIYIDIRIOIG HYDROGEN compoetten an after power up or after configuration change is made N 9 x Carbon MONOXiDe composition 0 0 OXYGEN composition 0 0 Zp and Zf are calculated on a periodic basis with the BUT ANE HBUTANE er OA actual update time dependent on the number of gas n BUT ANE nBUTANE composition Real 1007 i PNT ANE iPeNTANE composition Real 0473 components and the scan 1 of the controller n composition Heal 0324 n HEX ANE n HEXANE composition Real 0664 n n HePTANE composition Real 0 0 n OCTANE nOCTANE composition Real 0 0 n NONANE n NONANE composition Real 0 0 n NE n DECANE
413. when two wires of significantly different gauges would otherwise be inserted in a single connector terminal Perform the following steps for each analog input 1 Select an analog input terminal pair for connection of the input signal wiring Refer to Table 7 1 and the following illustrations as necessary For a 4 20 mA input go to step 2 For a 1 5 Vdc or millivolt input go to step 4 Model 353 Rear Terminals 26 Vde Typical Model 353 External Device Rear Terminals 26 Vdel 5 E External Device Analog Signal 5 e g SITRANS 8 Analog Signal amp DSIII 2 Wire e g SITRANS P Station Common 8 Transmitter 1 5 Vdc DSII 2 Wire gt 4 20 mA Output 20 72 74 Transmitter 1 5 Vde 5 S 4 20 mA Output 20 Lape 1 118 250 TM 18 250 t Common Ground Bus Manone Earth Or any station common terminal Common Ground Bus MG00506b Ground See Table 7 1 for AIN2 and 4 terminals Or any station common terminal Ground See Table 7 1 for AIN2 3 and 4 terminals A Controller Powered B External Power Supply Note Terminals 6 9 18 21 24 34 40 and 42 are electrically connected Use the terminals that allow the best wire routing and least stress on components such as range resistors Figure 7 6 Analog Input AIN1
414. x number x for Modbus data Input CL controls local arbitration of changes to loop data from the network When input CL is not configured the three status outputs LO CN and CM will be set high 1 and changes can be made from a network command or the local faceplate When CL is configured it can be changed locally from a pushbutton switch such as PB1SW output PS configured as momentary and will change from local to console or console computer to local with each positive transition of the input Also when output LO goes high output CN will also go high and CM will go low indicating that the control source will change to Console whenever Local is disabled either by a positive transition 3 54 April 2012 UM353 1B Function Blocks on input CL or from network command The Computer CM state can be set high using network command The NL output will normally be connected to the MD input of pushbutton block PB1SW to indicate the C L switch position on the operator faceplate green LED for and red LED for LO Output WD will go high 1 when the controller fails to receive command within the watchdog time The watchdog time is set in the STATN Station Parameters function block Input can be used to acknowledge all the alarms in all of the loops in controller Output PN Pulse oN will go high for 0 5 seconds or one scan cycle whichever is longer whenever the bargraph flashes Bargraph flashing is controlled by the
415. xed setpoint is desired the input to the SETPT function block be set to UNCONFIG If the loop tag LOOPOT is changed all configured references will automatically be changed to the new tag TV Process O1 lt SETPT SPLIM LU LD C aint T e SETPT Setpoint Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer Loop01 AIN1 OR INPUT TV Input TV Loop01 AIN1 01 INPUT TC Input TC Loop01 A M NA INPUT LU Input LU Loop01 SPLIM HS INPUT LD Input LD Loop01 SPLIM LS ESN Exec Seq No 5 SPLIM Setpoint Limit Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer 01 INPUT A Input A Loop01 SETPT O1 ESN Exec Seq No 10 ALARM Alarm Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer Loop01 AIN1 OR INPUT P Input P Loop01 AIN1 01 INPUT D Input D Loop01 SPLIM O1 ESN Exec Seq No 15 PID PID Controller Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer _ Loop01 AIN1 OR INPUT P Input P Loop01 AIN1 01 INPUT S Input S Loop01 SPLIM O1 INPUT F Input F Loop01 A M O1 INPUT A Input A Loop01 A M AS ESN Exec Seq No 20 Valve A O1 s LAE Ww 5 2 AOUT1 lt 2 LOOPO1 A M Auto Ma
416. ys output the high limit value Output status HS or LS will be high 1 if the block is limit condition The status event S HI LIM or S LO LIM will be displayed in the alphanumeric if the SL PRIOR is greater than 0 A priority of 0 disables the reporting of the limit function and sets the bits in the status word to 0 See the table on the next page for additional details regarding priorities SINE ESN 000 InputX X SIN X gt Output 1 X inputx tag block tag output E S N Exec Seq 000 to 250 000 SETPOINT LIMIT SPLIM ESN 000 R R N O1 Output 1 n 4 ange HL SETPOINT LIMIT Input A AL High Status Low Status RG RanGe PoinTeR H loop tag block tag LIMI High LIMIT 8 Real 100 00 LOw LIMIT 9 Real 0 00 INPUT loop tag block tag output ISL IPIR 110 Setpt Limit PRIORity S 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 E S Exec Seq NO H 001 to 250 The SPLIM function block has an RG PTR parameter input R that defines the normal operating range of the block Limit settings can be made within 10 to 110 of the range pointer values If the range pointer is not configured a range of 0 0 to 100 0 will be used If a range be the same value within the new range change is made

process automation controller - Service, Support

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents